JP7160164B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of presentation modes can be set as presentation modes displayed on a display device and presentation is executed (Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-215579 A

However, in the gaming machine described above, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention provides any one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode. It has determinable performance mode determination means and performance mode display means for displaying the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means on a display means, and any one of stage information indicating each of a plurality of stages. determination means capable of determining the stage information of step display means for displaying a display mode for indicating the stage information determined by the determination means on the display means; and the display mode displayed by the stage display means. and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the determining means is different from the one stage information in a state in which the one stage information is determined. Stage information can be determined , and the effect mode determination means can determine the second effect mode when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied in a situation where the first effect mode is displayed on the display means . The stage display means causes the display means to display the first display mode as the display mode corresponding to the first presentation mode when the first presentation mode is displayed on the display means, and When the second presentation mode is displayed on the display means, the second display mode different from the first display mode corresponding to the first presentation mode is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the second presentation mode. means can be displayed, the predetermined determination condition can be established regardless of the display mode displayed by at least the stage display means, and the game machine comprises determination means capable of performing determination; A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the means, and a privilege is given when the identification information for indicating that the result of the determination is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. a privilege giving means capable of displaying a plurality of said display modes in the same mode in a situation where at least said first presentation mode is displayed on said display means, and is displayed on said display means. When any one of the plurality of display modes satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect, and of the display modes, the display mode displayed at a predetermined position determines the different stage information by the determination means than the display mode displayed at a specific position different from the predetermined position. The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in an effect mode based on the determination result of the determining means, and the game machine dynamically displays the identification information. The display mode for indicating the stage information can be changed a plurality of times while the display mode for indicating the stage information is displayed, and the display mode for indicating the stage information of the 1 stage indicates the stage information different from the stage information of the 1 stage. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting a change to the display mode of .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , any one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode can be determined . It has a determining means and an effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means on a display means, and determines any one stage information out of the stage information indicating each of the plurality of stages. possible determining means; stage display means for causing the display means to display a display mode for indicating the stage information determined by the determination means; and the display mode displayed by the stage display means satisfies a predetermined condition. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the game is determined, and the determining means can determine stage information different from the one stage information in a state in which the one stage information is determined. wherein the effect mode determination means can determine the second effect mode when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied in a situation where the first effect mode is displayed on the display means , and the stage display means causes the display means to display the first display mode as the display mode corresponding to the first presentation mode when the first presentation mode is displayed on the display means, and the second presentation mode is displayed on the display means; When displayed on the display means, a second display mode different from the first display mode corresponding to the first presentation mode can be displayed on the display means as the display mode corresponding to the second presentation mode. and the predetermined determination condition can be satisfied at least regardless of the display mode displayed by the stage display means, and the gaming machine displays determination means capable of performing determination and a result of the determination means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for the determination, and benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit when the identification information indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed and, in a situation where at least the first effect mode is displayed on the display means, the plurality of display modes can be displayed in the same mode, and the plurality of display modes displayed on the display means can be displayed in the same mode. When any one of the display modes satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect, and Among them, the display mode displayed at a predetermined position is more likely to determine the different stage information by the determination means than the display mode displayed at a specific position different from the predetermined position. wherein the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in an effect mode based on the determination result of the determining means, and the gaming machine, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, The display mode for indicating the stage information is variable a plurality of times, and the display mode for indicating the one stage information is changed to the display mode for indicating the stage information different from the one stage information. It is possible to execute a suggestive production for suggesting that a change is made .

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a slide unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member; It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (a) is a front view of an upper combined unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper combined unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper combined unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper combined unit. It is a front view of an upper combination unit. It is a rear view of an upper united unit. It is a front view of a lower combination unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower combination unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combined unit. It is a front view of a lower combination unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the drive arm in a retracted rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a vertical rotation position, and an extended rotation position; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged schematic front view of the drive arm when it is rotated from the retracted rotational position to the extended rotational position; It is a front view of an upper combination unit and a lower combination unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protruding unit; 4 is a front view of a base member and a lift base; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a lifting base and a rotating member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lifting base and a rotating member; It is a front view of a raising/lowering base and a rotation member. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member; FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotation member. (a) is a front view of the driver in a first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the driver in a second rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (a) is a front view of the lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting unit. 4 is a front view of the lifting unit in the first state; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the lifting unit in a second state; FIG. 11 is a front view of the lifting unit in a third state; It is a rear view of the raising/lowering unit in a 1st state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lifting unit in the second state; FIG. 10 is a rear view of the lifting unit in a third state; (a) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state; (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state; ) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating units in a combined state; FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. 53; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the lift base and rotating member of the projecting unit. (a) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the lift base and rotating member of the projecting unit. (a) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the lift base and rotating member of the projecting unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are front views of a slide unit, an upper combined unit, and a lower combined unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a slide unit, an upper combined unit, and a lower combined unit. 65(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, the upper combined unit, and the lower combined unit viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65(a), and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 65(b). , a schematic diagram of an upper combined unit and a lower combined unit. FIG. 66(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, the upper combined unit, and the lower combined unit viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66(a), and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66(b). , a schematic diagram of an upper combined unit and a lower combined unit. FIG. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit in the second embodiment; FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit; (a) is a rear view of a transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are engaged, and (b) is a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are disengaged. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit front. 72(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and FIG. 72(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72(b). FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit according to a third embodiment; (a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear of the main body base member and the transmission gear are meshed; FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the first side rack gear and the transmission gear are disengaged. 75(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a front view of a base member in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 4B is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear are engaged with each other; FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit in a state viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of a left slide member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member; (a) is a schematic front view of the left slide member before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member after the switching plate is operated. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of a left slide member in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member; (a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic front view of the slide unit after the switching plate is operated. be. 84(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84(a), and FIG. 84(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84(a). FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit according to a seventh embodiment; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit viewed from the front; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit viewed from the front; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit viewed from the front; FIG. 21 is a front view of a slide unit in an eighth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a slide unit viewed from the front; (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93(b); 93(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line XCIVc-XCIVc of FIG. 93(c). FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit in a ninth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member; It is a front view of a slide unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97(b); (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97(c). (a) is a front view of the lifting unit in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit. Action units in a combined state. 101(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit along line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. (a) is a front view of the driving body in the state where the driving body is arranged in the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the driving body in the state where the driving body is arranged in the second rotation position; It is a front view of a driver. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device in the first control example; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the La-La cross section in the first control example, (b) is the Lb-Lb cross-sectional view, and (c) is the variable winning device in the first control example. is a top view of the. (a) to (b) are rear views of part of the variable winning device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen area division setting and effective line setting in a first control example, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen in the first control example. . (a) is a diagram showing the area division of the display screen when the reach-navi effect is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach-navi effect. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect display mode of a reach-navi effect. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main controller, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special design, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special design (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal design. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for big win, (c) FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a failure (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a navigation effect selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first navigation effect selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first navigation effect selection table. , and a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second navigation effect selection table. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing reach-navi effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a display jackpot-related command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a V command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flow chart which shows production command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 3 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing image transfer setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the compound pressing effect is started in the second control example, and (b) is a view showing the point in time when the effect setting timing D3b is reached in the compound pressing effect in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the timing pressing period Db1 is reached in the compound pressing effect in the second control example; It is the figure which showed another example of the time of arrival. (a) is a diagram showing an example when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing pressing period in the compound pressing effect in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a time point when a double hit period Dc is reached; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous slot effects executed in the second control example; FIG. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode" in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "sugoroku mode" in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a main display area Dm in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of the point effect in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a press scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal press scenario in the second control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of a long press scenario in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the content of a compound press scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a character selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a winning character selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a winning character selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character selection table for the game; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a point selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a winning point selection table, and (c) is a losing point selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a point selection table for use; FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing point effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a pressing effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing auto press effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing slot effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing during the initial slot effect executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing normal slot effect in-progress processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing during the first shortened slot effect executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing during a second shortened slot effect executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing during extension slot effect executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing press effect related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a flowchart showing press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing push command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing auto press start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 4 is a flowchart showing auto-press command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing auto press end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing release command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing slot effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing point effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a press scenario table in a first modification of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first compound press scenario; FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second compound press scenario; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first modified example of the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing slot effect setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modified example of the second control example; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a frame button control device in a second modified example of the second control example; 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the frame button control device in the second modified example of the second control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of each effect executed in each control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of each effect executed in each control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing each mode used for point effects in the third control example; (a) is a diagram showing a display example of "Normal Mode A" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "Sugoroku Mode" in the third control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "bingo mode" in the third control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which a character is displayed in the third control example; (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which points are displayed in the third control example; FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing an example of synthesizing a plurality of layers in the third control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an internal score selection table in the third control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the number of times selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the number of times selection table for wins in the third control example. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a number-of-times-of-errors selection table for failure in the third control example; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a used score selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the final display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a final first display mode selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final second display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a final third display mode selection table in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character display selection table in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display data table in a third control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transfer data table in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing point effect setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a point effect initial setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing mode transition processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing display mode change processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing point effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; (a) is a flowchart showing point effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; 4 is a flow chart showing point command processing. 14 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing another example of a layer on which characters are displayed in the third control example; (b) is another example of a layer on which points are displayed in the third control example; and (c) is a diagram schematically showing another example in which a plurality of layers are combined in the third control example. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the flow of the reach-navi effect executed in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect display mode of the reach-navi effect in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second internal level selection table in the fourth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a production scenario storage area in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a production scenario selection table in the fourth control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing reach-navi effect setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing Modification 1 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing Modification 2 of the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 3 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in Modified Example 3 of the fourth control example. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example, and (b) is a timing showing the flow of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example. Chart. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM in an audio ramp control device in a fifth control example, and (b) is a RAM configuration in the audio ramp control device in a fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display mode storage area in a fifth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a display mode selection table in a fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a winning display mode selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a display mode selection table for failure in the fifth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a stop mode selection table in a fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a winning stop mode selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a stop mode selection table for deviation in the fifth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing 2 during initial slot effect executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing 2 during normal slot effect executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing processing 2 during the first shortened slot effect executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing process 2 during second shortened slot effect executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing processing 2 during extension slot effect executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example. (a) and (b) are examples of schematic diagrams of the display mode of the rear image in the sixth control example. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the flow of a compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the background change operation mode of the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the composite pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (b) is a schematic diagram showing the button operation content and effect mode executed in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a pressing effect 2 in a compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an auto press effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example; FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing a flow of setting an additional effect in the seventh control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing display examples displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing display examples of an additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the first variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is the second variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, (d) schematically shows the contents of the third variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table in the seventh control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in an audio lamp control device in a seventh control example, and (b) schematically showing the configuration of an effect counter in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a seventh control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. (b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a flow of setting an additional effect in a modified example of the seventh control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an additional effect in a modification of the seventh control example. (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modification of the seventh control example. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing modifications of additional effects. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of an effect in the eighth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 judges whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also judges the kind of big win when it is judged as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state in which the probability is not variable or the time is shortened (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state) The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric role product 140a is opened once. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric role product 140a and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a like the second prize winning port 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second prize winning opening 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 , 475 , 476 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction away from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are each at the retracted position. 8, the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced from the state shown in FIG. 7 toward the right slide member 450, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the extended positions. FIG. 9 shows a state in which the rotating member 730 and the lifting member 820 are displaced from the state shown in FIG. 7 to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape. The projecting unit 700 and the lifting unit 800 are rotatably accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 which is rectangular in front view and is arranged above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the upper end portion of which is slidably arranged on the base member 410. Each slide member 430 is independently moved in the left-right direction (base member 410 longitudinal direction) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to contact each other. A restraining structure is employed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

A horizontally long guide member 419 that is rectangular when viewed from the front is arranged in parallel with the base member 410 in the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. is slid laterally, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and guided between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lower end sides of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper combined unit 500 includes a horizontally long base member 510 that is rectangular in front view and is arranged in front of the base member 410 of the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 that is displaceably arranged on the base member 510. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, the lower combined unit 600 includes a substantially L-shaped base member 610 in a front view and a lower base member 610 disposed on the left side and the lower side of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. and a lower displacement member 640 disposed so as to be displaceable.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position extending to the front side of the opening 301 a of the back case 300 . is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position extended to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 When the displacement members 530 and 640 are extended to the extended position, the side surfaces of the displacement members 530 and 640 (the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643) are brought into contact with each other (union).

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, which are displaced in the direction of approaching each other, come into contact with each other, an impact may be generated, causing them to bounce off each other, which may make their postures unstable. In this embodiment, a structure for suppressing the impact at the time of such contact is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The protruding unit 700 includes a horizontally long rectangular base member 710 arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a vertically long base member 710 arranged on the base member 710 so as to be able to ascend and descend. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720 are provided. It is formed so that it can be displaced (lifted/lowered) between it and a protruding position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a.

The protruding unit 700 includes a protruding member 735 arranged to be retractable (slideable) on the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 arranged to swing on the rotating member 730, these protruding members 735 and and a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swing member 732 .

The protruding unit 700 drives the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 by one drive motor 763 . Therefore, the driving force required for driving the protruding member 735 and the driving force required for the swinging member 732 overlap, increasing the load and possibly reducing the durability of the drive motor 763. In terms of form, a structure that suppresses the load on the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such structures will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a horizontally elongated base member 810 arranged in front of the base member 510 of the upper combined unit 500, and an elevating member 820 arranged on the base member 810 so as to be able to ascend and descend. The elevating member 820 is formed to be displaceable (liftable) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position extended to the front side of the opening 301 a of the rear case 300 .

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. FIG. First, referring to FIGS. 10 to 12, a structure for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 with respect to the base member 410 will be described.

10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. FIG. 10 to 12 illustrate a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest away from the right slide member 450).

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 provided on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a sliding rod provided on the base member 410. A member 420, a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced along the slide bar member 420. and a drive mechanism for causing it.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, on the base member 410, a plate-shaped protruding plate portion 411 horizontally protrudes from the lower portion of the sliding bar member 420 toward the front side. A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the protruding plate portion 411 , and a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the projecting plate portion 411 .

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod having a circular cross section for guiding the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted through the slide holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. By doing so, both slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415 .

The base-side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The base side rack gear 412 is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engaged with the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. Transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 that is oblong and rectangular in front view, a first side pinion gear 432 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second side pinion gear 432 that meshes with the first side pinion gear 432. A horizontally long rectangular second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a base member 434 vertically long and rectangular in front view hanging down from the tip side of the second member 433, and the base member 434 rotatable to the front side. , a displacement member 436 disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435, and a transmission for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotation member 435. Gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 has a slide hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section. , slide (sliding displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420 . That is, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420 .

A first side rack gear 431 a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431 . The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear that meshes with a left driving gear 471, which will be described later, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. As shown in FIG. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. be.

In addition, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably arranged (rotatably supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged (the front side of the first member 431) A rectangular plate-shaped cover 431b in a front view is arranged in the . That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged while being covered with the rear side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 meshes with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 . Therefore, when the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420, that is, when it is slid with respect to the base member 410, it is acted upon by the base-side rack gear 412 along with the sliding displacement. As a result, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is disposed (connected) to the first member 431 so as to be displaceable, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole on the tip side, thereby While being displaced, it is possible to slide (sliding displacement) along the sliding rod member 420 . The slide hole has an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433 .

In this case, a second side rack gear 433 a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 433 , and the second side rack gear 433 a meshes with the first side pinion gear 432 . Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the sliding displacement of the first member 431, it receives an action from the first side pinion gear 432 (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into linear motion by the second side rack gear 433 a and then transmitted to the second member 433 .

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, A driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 431. can be done.

A left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably disposed on the slide rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact, and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. be.

The right slide member 450 includes a horizontally long rectangular rack member 451 when viewed from the front, a base member 454 which is vertically long and rectangular when viewed from the front and hangs down from the base end side of the rack member 451, and can rotate toward the front side of the base member 454. , a displacement member 456 disposed on the rear side of the rotation member 455, and a movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 to the rotation member 455 and transmission gears 457a to 457f.

The rack member 451 has a slide hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section on the base end side, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. Thus, sliding (sliding displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420 is enabled. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420 .

A rack gear 451 a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 . A right driving gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right driving gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid along the sliding rod member 420. FIG.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the drive gears 471 and 472, respectively. It mainly includes a left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 whose drive shafts are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474, respectively.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 mesh with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, the left driving motor 475 and the right driving motor 476 rotate the left driving gear 471 and the right driving gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby rotating the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be independently slidably displaced.

A cover member 416 is provided on the front surface of the base member 410, and drive gears 471, 472 and pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. . Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416 . In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole through which the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 as the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slid and displaced will be described.

13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 includes a back-side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front-side base member 434a disposed (covered) on the front side of the back-side base member 434a. A base member 434b is provided, and transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. The front-side base member 434b is provided with a circular pivot hole 434b1 when viewed from the front.

The transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, as described above. , form one gear train (gear train) with the transmission gear 437a at the head and the transmission gear 437f at the tail.

As described above, the front transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the top transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The power is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotating member 435 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f.

The rotating member 435 includes a rotating shaft 435a and a supporting shaft 435b coaxially protruding from the rear surface. The rotating shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, a transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotating member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434 by rotating the transmission gear 437f.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back side of the rotation member 435, and is rotatably inserted through the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. As shown in FIG. By fitting an E-ring into a fitting groove formed in the tip of the support shaft 435b, the displaceable member 436 is prevented from coming off from the support shaft 435b.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted through the shaft support hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435. As shown in FIG.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotating member 435, the rotating shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface centering on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 meshes with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 forward or backward by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 435 about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b). can be made

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose length dimension is larger than its width dimension when viewed from the front, and is positioned substantially at the center in the length and width directions. A rotating shaft 435a is arranged in the . When viewed from the front, the displacement member 436 is formed into a shape in which the rotating member 435 is substantially divided into two at the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b), the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement member 436. can be done.

Further, since the driving motor 441 is arranged on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the driving motor 441 are arranged on the rotating member 435 The center-of-gravity position can be brought close to the rotating shaft 435 a of the rotating member 435 . Therefore, the rotation of such a structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In this embodiment, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged at 435 is substantially coincident with the rotating shaft 435 a of the rotating member 435 . Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in a state in which the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (a state in which the displacement member 436 protrudes to the side of the rotation member 435 so as to be visible), The position of the center of gravity of the structure described above can be separated from the rotating shaft 435 a of the rotating member 435 by the amount of protrusion of the displacement member 436 . As a result, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be performed smoothly.

That is, when starting the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state, the driving force increases due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the structure described above with the displacement member 436 protruding to the side of the rotating member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity when the left slide member 430 starts to slide (that is, rotates the rotating member 435). When the displacement member 436 is positioned on the displacement side, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotated in one direction). Rotation can be assisted. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the left slide member 430 can smoothly start sliding from the stopped state.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the structure described above with the displacement member 436 projecting to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the left slide member 430 starts to slide (that is, rotates the rotating member 435). When the displacement member 436 is located on the side to rotate, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435 (rotated in the other direction) so that the center of gravity of the structure described above approaches (matches) the rotation axis 435a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. As a result, the left slide member 430 can smoothly start sliding from the stopped state.

Further, the center of gravity of the structure described above with the displacement member 436 projecting to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the left slide member 430 stops sliding (that is, rotation of the rotating member 435). When positioned on the side to rotate, the weight of the above-described structure makes it easier to stop the rotation. As a result, the left slide member 430 can be quickly stopped when the driving of the left driving motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped.

15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. FIG. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (pivotally supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. The front-side base member 454b is provided with a circular pivot hole 454b1 when viewed from the front.

The transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, as described above. , form one gear train (gear train) having the transmission gear 457a at the head and the transmission gear 457f at the tail.

As described above, the front transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotation member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the top transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The power is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotating member 455 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b coaxially protruding from the rear surface. The rotating shaft 455a is a portion that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to it. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454 by rotating the transmission gear 457f.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back side of the rotation member 455, and is rotatably inserted through the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. As shown in FIG. By fitting an E-ring into a fitting groove formed in the tip of the support shaft 455b, the displaceable member 456 is prevented from coming off from the support shaft 455b.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted through the shaft support hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455. As shown in FIG.

The relief hole 456b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc by dividing the annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotating member 455, the rotating shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface centering on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. A drive motor 461 is provided on the back surface of the rotary member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 meshes with a curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward or reverse direction by the driving motor 461, the displacement member 456 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 455 about the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b). can be made

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose length dimension is larger than its width dimension when viewed from the front, and the rotating shaft 455a is formed on one end side in the length direction. A drive motor 461 is arranged on the other end side. In addition, since the displacement member 456 is disposed on the opposite side of the driving motor 461 across the support shaft 455b from the rotating member 455, the structure in which the rotating member 455 is disposed with the displacement member 456 and the driving motor 461 The center of gravity can be arranged at a position eccentric to one end of the rotating member 455 (a position spaced apart from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, at the start of sliding displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, rotation of the rotating member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the rotating member 455 is provided with the displacement member 456 and the driving motor 461 is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. Positioning it on the side allows the weight of the structure to act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. As a result, the load on the right driving motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the sliding displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-described structure is positioned on the side to be displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure itself acts as a resistance. can be acted upon to help stop the rotation of structure values. As a result, the right slide member 450 can be quickly stopped when the driving of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped.

Further, as will be described later, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) abuts (collides) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), causing the right slide member 450 to move backward (right side in FIG. 10). ), by positioning the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure on the side that displaces upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure itself acts as resistance, and the rotation of the structure exerts a cushioning effect. can be made

Next, operations of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, illustrating transition states when the left slide member 430 is slidably displaced. 17 and 18 illustrate a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left slide member 430 is placed at the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side in FIG. 17(a), the position farthest away from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from this state, the first member 431 moves rightward (see FIG. 17(a) right side, the direction toward the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 433a are arranged facing each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed while being meshed with both rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated together with the first member 431 while being slid. is slid in the same direction as the first member 431 . That is, the second member 433 is slid relative to the base member 410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 431 .

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 431 slides relative to the first member 431. As a result, as shown in FIG. The member 433 is partially overlapped (the total longitudinal length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is shortened).

From this state, the left driving motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction, and the first member 431 moves further rightward with respect to the base member 410 (to the right in FIG. 17(a), toward the right sliding member 450). ), the second member 433 is maximally displaced in the shortening direction relative to the first member 431 as shown in FIG. (a) the right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), ie, the extended position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(a), when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the direction opposite to the above case from the state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the extended position, , the left driving gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid to the left with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 18(a), the direction away from the right slide member 450). .

Also in this case, as in the case described above, the actions of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 As a result, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 431 .

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the second member 433, whose speed of sliding displacement is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, precedes the first member 431, and the first member 431 The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extension direction (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is extended more than the total length at the extended position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the opposite direction, and the first member 431 moves further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ), the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, as shown in FIG. (a) the position furthest apart from the left and right slide members 450), ie, the overhang position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is arranged on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position capable of detecting the detected portion of the second member 431 when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position. is detected, the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position.

On the other hand, stopping the driving of the left driving motor 475 at the extended position is the cumulative addition of the number of driving steps of the left driving motor 475 after starting the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is done by That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches the predetermined value, the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the extended position.

Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) overlaps the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 in a portion. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movable range of both and enhance the performance effect.

However, if the movable ranges overlap in this way, it may be caused by fluctuations in the amount of displacement due to fluctuations in the dimensions and assembly of parts and tolerances (gap), or due to poor control (for example, The left slide member 430 slidably displaced to the overhang position comes into contact with the right slide member 450 due to the occurrence of an error in cumulative addition of the number of drive steps, which may lead to damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the presentation effect associated with the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 while ensuring the presentation effect associated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 .

That is, as described above, due to the action of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431, the second member 433 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state of being accelerated more than the first member 431, and the second member 433 has a base member 434 (a rotating member 435 and a Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the sliding displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the presentation effect associated with the sliding displacement can be ensured.

On the other hand, the left slide member 430 brings the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433, into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), as described above. , the impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is kept on standby (stopped) closer to the retracted position than the overhang position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid toward the overhang position. When the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, the left slide member 430 pushes the right slide member 450 in the direction of slide displacement, thereby performing an effect of sliding and displacing them together. be able to. In this case also, the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to suppress the breakage of both by weakening the impact of the .

The right slide member 450 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 , and the direction of slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 . That is, when the right slide member 450 is arranged at a position where it can contact the left slide member 430 arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 moves away from the left slide member 430 ( 18 (a) right side), and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can be slidably displaced is the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 abuts. is the direction that allows the sliding displacement of

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 abuts against the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (releasing backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. , the cushioning effect can be exerted (see FIG. 18(b)). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the directions of sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel. It is possible to smoothly perform the escape action of. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert a cushioning action and easily suppress damage to both.

Further, in this case, by sharing the sliding rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the sliding displacement directions of both members are made parallel, so that the overall size can be reduced. . That is, when the slide bar member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the slide bar member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. , the space is increased accordingly, leading to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, both slide members 430 and 450 share one slide rod member 420, thereby improving space efficiency and achieving miniaturization.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction (right side in FIG. 18A) away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhang position. It can be placed at a position where it abuts. That is, it is possible to create a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450 .

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the left slide member 430 will extend beyond the target position due to the variations and control failures described above. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (to function as a stopper), and the left slide member 430 is slid at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position with the target position. Therefore, by arranging the right slide member 450 at a position where it does not come into contact with the left slide member 430, the number of times of contact can be reduced, and the fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, since the left slide member 430 increases the speed of the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, both members 431 and 433 are provided separately, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear are provided. Since it is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a, the number of parts and the number of sliding parts increase, resulting in increase in weight and drive resistance. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving becomes maximum due to the influence of the inertial force. As a result, the initial motion (initial speed when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) is slowed down, so there is a possibility that the rendering effect associated with the slide displacement will be hindered.

In this case, in this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be able to abut against the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the abutted state (see FIG. 18(a)). ) to the left). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 . As a result, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid from the stopped state. As a result, the initial motion (initial speed) can be increased, and the presentation effect associated with the slide displacement can be improved.

Further, the right slide member 450 abuts on the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is slid in the direction (leftward in FIG. 18(a)) that pushes the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position. (the first member 431 is pushed back), the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the left slide member 430 can be enhanced.

That is, the right slide member 450 is brought into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 whose slide displacement speed is slower than that of the second member 433, and pushes back the first member 431. The time during which the assist force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (that is, the time when the speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after the stopped left slide member 430 starts to be pushed back). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

Here, a mechanism (the left pinion gear 473, the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational driving force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion to slide the left slide member 430 (the first member 431). and a mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a) that converts the rotational driving force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The ratios are set to different gear ratios, and in this embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio greater than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a are respectively formed in the same shape, so the number of teeth of the left driving gear 471 is the same as that of the right driving gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be greater than the number of teeth. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the direction of sliding displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) rotates once. means large quantity.

As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily and quickly slid from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (the second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance effect associated with the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. , the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) can be increased. The speed of sliding displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect associated with the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is made small in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of sliding displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , the initial motion (start of slide displacement from the rest state) is hindered (slowed). That is, it is difficult to achieve both the smooth initial movement of the left slide member 430 and the increase in the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (the second member 433) in the steady state after the initial movement. Although it was impossible in the prior art, by adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, such coexistence has become possible for the first time.

Next, detailed configurations of the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. First, the upper combined unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. FIG.

19(a) is a front view of the upper combined unit 500, and FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the upper combined unit 500. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper combined unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper combined unit 500. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper combined unit 500 is connected to a base member 510, a rack member 520 slidably disposed in the inner space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

The base member 510 includes a rear base 511 which is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a front base 512 which is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front and which is arranged (covered) on the front side of the rear base 511. The rear base 511 and the front base A rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of 512 .

The rear base 511 includes a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc, and a rack member projecting to the front side. and a support shaft 511c that is inserted into the guide groove 522 of 520 .

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the rear base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted through the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted. The posture (orientation) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed with a shaft support hole 521 which is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It has a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 engraved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a horizontally long rectangular plate.

The support shaft 511c of the rear base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. As shown in FIG. When the support shaft 511c of the rear base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is aligned with the rear base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of sliding displacement of the rack member 520 is defined in the extending direction of the connecting holes 511 a of the rear base 511 .

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 projecting from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511 a of the rear base 511 . It is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a larger diameter than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a larger diameter than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. . An upper contact portion 533 is formed on the side surface of the upper displacement member 530 . The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that contacts the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640. It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, a drive motor 543 with a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542, Prepare. Drive gear 541 meshes with rack gear 523 of rack member 520 . Therefore, by rotating the driving gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the driving motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced via the rack gear 523 along the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a.

Next, the operation of the upper combined unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 22 and 23 are front and rear views of the upper combined unit 500, illustrating transition states when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 23(a), in the state where the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are positioned at one end side ( 23), and the upper displacement member 530 forms a horizontal posture and is arranged in a state hidden behind the base member 510. As shown in FIG.

When the driving motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from this state, the connecting shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connecting hole 511a as the rack member 520 is slid, and the guide pin 532 is moved to the guide hole 511b. 22(b) and 23(b), the upper displacement member 530 is tilted (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) and horizontally. is displaced to That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further tilted (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) and horizontally displaced, as shown in FIGS. As shown in 23(c), a vertical posture is formed in which the tip side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhang position (first position).

Next, the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29. FIG.

24 is a front view of the lower combined unit 600. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower combined unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combined unit 600. As shown in FIGS. Note that FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower combined unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a proximal end of the drive arm holding member 620. a drive arm 630 rotatably held on the side thereof; a lower displacement member 640 to which the tip side of the drive arm 630 is connected; a connection arm 650 that connects the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610; A biasing spring 660 for applying force and a drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the front. A connecting shaft 612 is provided. The protruding base portion 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position protruding from the front surface of the base member 610 (raised toward the front side). protruded.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a rear side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base portion 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the rear side holding member 621 . A driving arm 630 and transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (pivotally supported) between the facing surfaces (internal spaces) of the rear-side holding member 621 and the front-side holding member 622, respectively.

In the driving arm holding member 620, the rear side of the rear side holding member 621 is arranged at the projecting tip of the projecting base 611 of the base member 610, so that the projecting height of the projecting base 611 A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back side holding member 621 ) and the front surface of the base member 610 . In this embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position is formed in such a space so as to be able to be accommodated therein, so that the outer shape of the lower combined unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

The drive arm 630 has a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a plurality of teeth along the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631 . A long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at the end opposite to the gear portion 632, and having a predetermined distance between the shaft supporting hole 631 and the connecting hole 633. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 projecting from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the driving arm 630 , and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650 . It is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connecting arm 650 and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 by rotating the drive arm 630 .

A lower contact portion 643 is formed on the side surface of the lower displacement member 640 . The lower contact portion 643 is a portion to be contacted by the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530. It is formed on the side surface spaced apart toward the overhanging direction side (the right side in FIG. 24). In this embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface oriented substantially perpendicular to the imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 .

The connecting arm 650 has connecting holes 651 and 652 formed at one end side and the other end side. are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement trajectory of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion is shifted to the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as a circular arc shape with a center.

The biasing spring 660 is a torsion spring made of metal. is urged in the rotational direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 27(a)), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force moves the drive arm 630 to the displacement member. 640 is biased in a rotational direction (right rotation in FIG. 27(a)) to displace 640 from the retracted position to the extended position. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 672 is assisted, and the initial movement of the lower displacement member 640 in the projecting direction can be performed smoothly.

The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, and a drive shaft connected to the transmission gear 671a and arranged in front of the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). and a drive motor 672 provided. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630. By connecting (engaging) in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the head and the transmission gear 671c is at the rear. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671 c meshes with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630 . When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c acts on the gear portion 632, thereby rotating the drive arm 630. As shown in FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 27, the operation of the lower combined unit 600 will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower combined unit 600, illustrating transition states when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise direction in front view (left rotation direction in FIG. 27(a)). It is positioned at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as a “retracted rotational position”) and is in a tilted posture in which it is tilted downward from the base end side (rotation center, ie, pivot hole 631) toward the distal end side (connection hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 has a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the position farthest in the horizontal direction from the overhanging position, the left side in FIG. 27A), and the lowermost position in the vertical direction. It is arranged at a position (the position furthest in the vertical direction from the extended position, the lower side in FIG. 27(a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from this state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in a front view, the lower displacement member 640 near the drive arm connecting shaft 641 rotates as shown in FIG. 27(b). is displaced upward (upward in FIG. 27(b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced rightward (rightward in FIG. 27(a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 27(b), the lower displacement member 640 near the drive arm connecting shaft 641 further moves along with the clockwise rotation of the drive arm 630 when viewed from the front. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position.

In the extended position, the drive arm 630 is positioned at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as the "extended rotational position") where the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum clockwise direction (right rotation direction in FIG. 27(c)). At the rotating position, the drive arm 630 is arranged such that its distal end side (connecting hole 633) crosses a vertical line passing through the proximal end side (the center of rotation, ie, the pivot hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted to the highest position. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the rightmost position in the horizontal direction (the position farthest in the horizontal direction from the retracted position, the right side in FIG. 27(c)), and the uppermost position in the vertical direction ( It is arranged at a position which is the most separated in the vertical direction from the retracted position, which is a position slightly lower than the upper side in FIG. 27(a).

Here, the displacement speed of the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 in the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extended rotation position. 29(a) to 29(d) are partially enlarged schematic front views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotational position to the extended rotational position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the extended rotation position. The rotational position at which the virtual line connecting the axes of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction is referred to as a "horizontal rotational position", and is rotated by an angle θ2 from that horizontal rotational position. A rotational position at which the drive arm 630 is in an upright posture (a posture in which an imaginary line connecting the axes of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a "vertical rotational position." Note that the projecting rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29(a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (angle θ1 range) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29(b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29(c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the interval between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), and FIG. 29(d) corresponds to the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. 630, and FIG. 29(e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retraction rotation position.

The drive state (supplied power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, so that the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period during which the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation from a stopped state is sufficiently small and there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(a), and 29(b), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633 in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1). The inclined position is such that the connecting hole 633 is positioned downward from the hole 631. As the connecting hole 633 is rotated from the retracted position toward the horizontal rotation position, the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward. ), the upward velocity component (velocity Vv) gradually increases and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward and its upward speed is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(b) to 29(d), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633 in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). The inclined posture is such that it is positioned above the hole 631, and as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the connection hole 633 is displaced further upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually decreased to 0 at the vertical rotational position. That is, in this section (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward and its upward speed is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(d), and 29(e), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the extended rotation position. The inclined position is such that the drive arm 630 is positioned above the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position. It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward in this section (the range of the angle θ1).

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 can be prevented from rebounding from each other, and the postures of these displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(a) to 29(d), the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is While the leftward velocity component Vh gradually increases, the rightward velocity component Vh of the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 increases in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (the range of the angle θ2). Gradually increased.

As a result, the vicinity of the connecting hole 633 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced leftward in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, while the displacement direction is shifted horizontally. It is reversed at the rotation position, and is displaced rightward (toward the retracted position) in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position.

That is, the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced to the left, and after temporarily stopping at the leftmost position (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed and shifted to the right. It can be horizontally displaced in a state of gradual acceleration toward the direction. As a result, the motion of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be realized, and the motion of the lower displacement member 640 can be given a sense of dynamism.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section (angle θ1 range) where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased, the vertical velocity component Vv is increased, while the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle θ2 range), the vertical velocity component Vv is reduced, so that the above-described horizontal bending and stretching motion can be emphasized. can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displacement member 530, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (the range of the angle θ2 ), in a configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, there is a risk that the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 will be hindered. On the other hand, in this section (range of angle θ2), the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased. 640 production can be performed, and as a result, the production effect can be secured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 has a connecting arm 650 at a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) spaced upward from a portion (drive arm connecting shaft 641) to which the driving arm 630 is connected. Since it is connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (in the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced rightward as the connecting arm 650 rotates around the connecting hole 652. . Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 640 is caused to bend and stretch in the horizontal direction, the bending and stretching movement is increased by the horizontal displacement to the right due to the rotation of the connecting arm 650. The dynamism of the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. In addition, instead of the upward displacement, when performing the production of the lower displacement member 640 by displacing it in the horizontal direction (rightward), the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce the production effect. can be easily secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the abutting (merging) operation of the upper displaceable member 530 and the lower displaceable member 640 in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, illustrating transition states when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. .

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c), the upper displacement member 530 moves from the retracted position, which is hidden behind the base member 510, to the distal end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. (Upper contact portion 533) descends while drawing a curved trajectory, and is disposed at the overhang position in a state in which a vertical posture is formed with the tip side (upper contact portion 533) directed downward. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowest position. placed in the exit position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the extended position are united with the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 in contact with each other. As a result, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is shaped like a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is shaped like a horse's body, and the connecting arm 650 is shaped like a horse's leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the retracted position.

Here, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 come into contact with each other at the retracted position, the impact generated at the time of contact causes them to rebound in the direction of separating from each other. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time required to integrate these two displacement members 530 and 640 to form one character is The effect of production is hindered because it is bulky and elongated.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) velocity component of the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 is Since the component Vv is decreased when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the impact generated when the lower displacement member 640 abuts against the upper displacement member 530 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from rebounding in a direction away from each other, and the postures of these displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually decreased in the section (range of angle θ2) from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the lower displacement member 640 as a whole can ensure an upward velocity component Vv of . Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to form one character by integrating the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, and to suppress the lengthening. As a result, the effect of presentation can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the tip of the drive arm 630 (connection hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connection portion (connection hole 633) ) draws an arc-shaped trajectory so that the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually decreased. can be done as That is, there is no need to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640 . Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified to reduce control costs and improve reliability.

Here, in the present embodiment, the extended rotational position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 contacts the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the extended position. That is, in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the projecting rotation position, the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is changed to the downward direction (the direction away from the upper displacement member 530). can be a component.

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 come into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can escape (retreat) downward from the upper displacement member 530, thereby generating an impact. can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement members 530 and 640 from rebounding in the direction of separating from each other, and stabilize their attitudes.

Further, in this manner, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhang position in a state where the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 has a negative value. With this configuration, even if the contact (union) position is displaced due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, control variations, etc. in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to facilitate contact with the upper displacement member 530 within the range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the projecting unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 700. FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevation base 720, and illustrates a transition state when the elevation base 720 is elevated with respect to the base member 710. FIG.

The protruding unit 700 includes a base member 710 , an elevation base 720 arranged to be able to ascend and descend on the base member 710 , a rotating member 730 arranged to rotate on the elevation base 720 , and It mainly includes a drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720 .

First, referring to FIGS. 31 to 33, a structure for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 includes an insertion hole 711 which is circular in a front view and is opened substantially in the center in the width direction, a support shaft 712 which protrudes from the front, and a support shaft 712 which protrudes from the back. and two support shafts 713 and 714 . A rotary shaft 771 a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted through the insertion hole 711 . A support shaft 712 on the front side rotatably supports a shaft support hole 719a of a connecting arm 719, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the support shafts 713 and 714 on the back side. .

The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 positioned in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed between the rear base 721 and the front base (FIGS. 34 and 34). 35). A rear base 721 and a front base 722 are opposed to each other at a predetermined distance corresponding to the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and a rotary member 730 is placed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. is rotatably housed (arranged).

One side in the width direction of the rear base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via a slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extending and retracting direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a proximal rail provided on the front surface of the base member 710, a distal rail provided on the rear surface of the elevating base 720 (back base 721), and an interposed portion between the proximal rail and the distal rail. and an intermediate rail provided to allow the proximal and distal rails to be longitudinally displaceable relative to each other. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be vertically moved with respect to the base member 710 by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL.

A rear base 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting a rotating shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. Apertures are formed. The slide pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted through the slide groove 721a through the collar C. As shown in FIG. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the driving arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 slides along the sliding groove 721a, thereby raising and lowering the elevation base 720 (back base 721). be.

The connecting arm 719 includes a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevation base 720 (back base 721) projecting from the front at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ), and a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. . A driving pin 771b of the driving arm 771 is slidably inserted through the driven groove 719c through the collar C. As shown in FIG. As will be described later, when the driving arm 771 is rotationally driven, the connecting arm 719 is rotated around the shaft support hole 719a.

A driving mechanism for raising and lowering the elevation base 720 with respect to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 having a rotation shaft 771a rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. Transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and a driving shaft connected to the leading transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d and arranged in front of the base member 710. and a motor 773 .

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the transmission gear 772a leads the transmission gear 772d. to form a single gear train (gear train).

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state in which the lift base 720 is arranged at the lowest position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21(a)), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. The power is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the driving arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) around the rotating shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated about the pivot hole 719a in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)), and the lift base 720 is lifted to the uppermost position (extended position) (FIG. 21(c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state where the lift base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extended position) (see FIG. 21(c)), the rotational driving force is transferred to the top transmission gear. 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the driving arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the rotating shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 rotates in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) around the pivot hole 719a, and the lift base 720 is lowered to the lowest position (retracted position) (FIG. 21(a)). )reference).

Next, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG.

34 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730. FIG. 36 is a front view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the lifting base 720. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed at the lower ends of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. In addition, the rotating shaft 731a is supported by the shaft support hole 721b of the rear base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the facing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. As shown in FIG.

The rotating member 730 has a curved rack gear 731b arranged on its rear surface. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear engraved along the peripheral surface with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees around the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and meshes with the transmission gear 781a. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevation base 720 by rotating the transmission gear 781a.

A driving mechanism for rotating the rotary member 730 with respect to the elevation base 720 is composed of transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevation base 720, and a transmission gear 781b. and a drive motor 782 disposed in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, when the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the curved rack gear 731b at the center in the circumferential direction, the rotation member 730 is arranged such that the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 (protrusion or retraction direction when protruding or retracting) is the vertical direction. 36(b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 36(b)). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36(c)) (see FIG. 36(c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36(c)), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is rotated as the rotation shaft. 731a is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36(c)). As a result, after passing through the central rotation position, the rotating member 730 is placed in a posture in which the sliding displacement direction of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36(a)) (see FIG. 36(a)). .

Next, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42. FIG.

First, referring to FIGS. 37 to 39, the overall configuration of rotating member 730 will be described. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of rotating member 730. FIG. FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotary member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the protruding member 735 is projected and retracted from the rotary member 730 and the swing member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swinging member 732 arranged swingably in front of the rear base 731, and the swinging member 732 and the rear base 731. An interposed member 733 interposed between, a front base 734 arranged in front of the rear base 731, a projecting member 735 arranged slidably on the rear surface of the front base 734, and the front base 734 and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the rear base 731 .

The rear base 731 is formed in the shape of a container that is generally circular in front view and has an open front surface. A portion of the wall projects upwards. On the rear surface of the rear base 731 are, as described above, a rotary shaft 731a supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevation base 720, and a curved gear meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731b is provided.

In addition, a pair of shaft support holes 731c for rotatably supporting a rotating shaft 732a of the swinging member 732 and a tip end of a driven shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 are slidably inserted into the rear base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e through which a slide pin 733b of the interposition member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc around the axis of the shaft support hole 731c. The positions in the vertical direction are set to different positions. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the driven shaft 732d of the swinging member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swinging member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-like opening that extends linearly, and the axis of the rotation shaft 731a is positioned on the extension line of the extending direction, and is aligned with the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, which will be described later. formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support hole 731c and the guide hole 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The rocking member 732 has a rotating shaft 732a and a driven shaft 732b which are formed as cylindrical shaft bodies, and is oriented such that the base ends on which the rotating shaft 732a and the driven shaft 732b are arranged face each other. A pair is provided. The rotary shaft 732a is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 731c of the rear base 731, and the operated shaft 732b is slidably inserted through the action hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the rear base 731. be done.

A collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, and the flange portion of the collar C serves as a retainer for the rotating shaft 732a. It is slidably interposed therebetween. Similarly, a collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the operated shaft 732d, and the flange portion of the collar C serves as a retainer for the operated shaft 732d. It is slidably interposed between 731d and action hole 733a.

The interposed member 733 is a plate-like portion interposed between the rear base 731 and the swing member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a slide wall 733c. The action holes 733a are holes for transmitting the elevation (vertical sliding displacement) of the interposition member 733 to the action shafts 732b of the swinging member 732. They are arranged axisymmetrically.

As will be described later, when the intervening member 733 is lifted (upwardly slid), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes the driven shaft 732b upward, causing the swinging member 732 to lift its tip side. When the interposed member 733 is lowered (slid downward) while being swung (rotated), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes the operated shaft 732b downward, and the swinging member 732 moves downward. The tip side is swung (rotated) in a downward swinging direction.

The slide pins 733b are columnar portions that are slidably inserted into the slide holes 731e of the rear base 731, and a plurality of the slide pins 733b (two in this embodiment) protrude from the rear surface of the interposed member 733. Together, they are arranged on the line of symmetry of the pair of working holes 733a described above while being spaced apart by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the interposing member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the rear base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending in the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement of the interposing member 733) and protruding from the front surface of the interposing member 733, A cam portion 761b of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism, which will be described later, is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (the distance from the center of rotation of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c) The intervening member 733 is moved up and down (upwardly or downwardly slidably displaced) in accordance with the change (increase or decrease) of . That is, when the cam diameter increases with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter decreases, the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight.

Between the rear base 731 and the interposing member 733, an urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed in an elastically stretched state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , act as an urging force in the direction of lowering (downwardly slidingly displacing) the interposing member 733 . That is, the descent (downward sliding displacement) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the weight of the interposed member 733 itself). As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to quickly swing (rotate) the swinging member 732 in the tilting direction (the direction in which the tip is lowered).

The front base 734 is a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 731 (the end surface of the outer peripheral wall). The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a through which a slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734 a is formed as a groove-like opening that extends linearly and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731 e of the rear base 731 .

The protruding member 735 is an elongated plate-like body slidably disposed on the back side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a slide hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a columnar portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734. A plurality of the slide pins 735a (two in this embodiment) protrude from the front of the protruding member 735 and , are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735 at predetermined intervals. Therefore, the projecting member 735 moves up and down along the extension direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed at one longitudinal end side (base end side) of the protruding member 735, and a sliding pin 761c of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is slidably inserted. be. Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the slide pin 761c slides along the slide hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 735b is pushed upward or downward by the slide pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (upward or downward sliding displacement) along the slide hole 734a.

Between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735, an urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , act as an urging force in the direction of lowering (downwardly slidingly displacing) the protruding member 735 .

A drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 includes a driving body 761 rotatably disposed in front of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. Transmission gears 762a to 762e with a rear transmission gear 762d connected to 761a, and a driving shaft connected to the transmission gear 762a at the head of the transmission gears 762a to 762e and arranged on the rear surface of the rear base 731. and a drive motor 763 .

The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is formed as a disc cam having a curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 on its outer peripheral surface. The interposition member 733 is driven (slid and displaced) by sliding it on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733 . Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the center of rotation of the driving body 761, and acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 as described above, thereby protruding. The member 735 is driven (slide displaced).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 763 to the driving body 761, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the transmission gear 762a is at the head and the transmission gear 762e is connected. to form a single gear train (gear train).

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. The driving body 761, in which the driven gear 761a meshes with the transmission gear 762e, rotates in one direction.

When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the interposing member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Accompanying this, the driven shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported in the action hole 733a of the interposing member 733 can also be lowered, so that the tip side of the swinging member 732 moves downward due to its own weight. 39(b) and 39(c)).

Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in one direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is raised. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is lifted (upwardly slid) (see FIGS. 39(b) and 39(c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the driving body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the intervening member 733 is raised, so that the actuation hole 733a of the intervening member 733 pushes up the operated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732, thereby The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction to displace its distal end side upward.

Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (slid downward).

Next, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. FIG.

40(a) is a front view of the driver 761 in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the driver 761 in the second rotation position. be. 40(a) and 40(b), the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733 and the protruding member 735 slide when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. A hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 has a cam surface contacting the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. In the state where the cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter and the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position, the cam surface (position P2) which contacts the sliding wall 733c The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and is formed such that the cam diameter continuously decreases from position P1 toward position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has its bottom surface (lower surface in FIGS. (a) and FIG. 40(b) left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intervening member 733) changes from the top to the maximum when the driving member 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously lowered to the bottom, and when the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top.

The slide hole 735b has a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side (right side in FIG. 40(a)) of the slide hole 735b within a predetermined range, and a curved portion 735b1 extending from the terminal end of the curved portion 735b1 to the other end of the slide hole 735b. and a straight portion 735b2 extending to the side (left side in FIG. 40(a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is curved in an arc concentric with the rotation center of the driving body 761 when the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. At the first rotation position, the slide pin 761c is located at one end of the slide hole 735b. Therefore, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (that is, while the sliding pin 761c is passing through the curved portion 735b1), the driving body 761 does not slide. No driving force is transmitted to the driving hole 735b (that is, the projecting member 735). That is, the vertical position of the slide hole 735b does not change, so that the protruding member 735 is maintained at the lowest position.

The rotational position where the driving body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotational angle from the first rotational position (that is, the rotational position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is referred to as the "predetermined rotational position. ”.

The linear portion 735b2 is formed in a linear shape along the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b)). Therefore, the vertical position of the slide hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that, while the slide pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2, the driving body 761 is moved to the second rotational position by the action of the slide pin 761c. When the driver 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when the driver 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40(b)), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, and the predetermined position on the linear portion 735b2 does not enter. It is positioned at the position (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the slide pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, enters the straight portion 735b2, and reaches the end (slide) of the straight portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end of the moving hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40(a)), the direction is changed at the terminal end, and the linear portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1 slides toward the curved portion 735b1. It stops just before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). Thereby, as will be described later, the driving force required for the driving motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, illustrating transition states when the protruding member 735 is slid and the swinging member 732 is swung. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically illustrated. Further, FIG. 41(a) shows the state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotational position, and FIG. 41(b) shows the state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at the predetermined rotational position. 42B shows a state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at a rotational position between the predetermined rotational position and the second rotational position, and FIG. 42B shows a state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotational position. be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41(a) (that is, the state in which the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position and the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position. be done. When the driving body 761 is rotated from this state to a predetermined rotation position, as shown in FIG. (a)), the interposing member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which its tip is lowered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the protruding member 735 is such that the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the predetermined rotational position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowest position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41(a)).

When the driving body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 41(b)) is further rotated toward the second rotational position, as shown in FIG. By decreasing (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and along with this, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the tip thereof is lowered. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid upward when the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushes up the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. be.

When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41(b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2 as shown in FIG. 42(b). As a result (see FIG. 40(b)), the interposing member 733 is lowered to the lowest position by its own weight, and accordingly the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight and its tip is positioned at the lowest position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position by pushing the linear portion 735b2 to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the driving body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. ), the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40(b)), so that the intervening member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. As a result, the swinging member 732 is rotated in a direction in which its tip is lifted. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid downward when the slide pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the slide hole 735b pushes down the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. be.

When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42(a) to the predetermined rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1, as shown in FIG. 41(b). The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the swinging member 732 is also continued to rotate in the direction in which its tip is raised. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowest position by pushing down the linear portion 735b2 to the lowest position by the slide pin 761c.

When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41(b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased to the maximum radius R1 as shown in FIG. 41(a). As a result (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposing member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and accordingly the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned to the uppermost position. On the other hand, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the protruding member 735 is at the lowest position (that is, FIG. ) at the same position as ).

As described above, according to the rotating member 730 , one drive motor 763 can displace two members (swing member 732 and projecting member 735 ).

Here, in the conventional product, when two members are displaced by one drive motor, the driving force for driving each of the two members is duplicated, so the load on the drive motor increases and the durability decreases. There was a problem of inviting On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are alternately displaced (one by one), the load on the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the presentation effect by the displacement is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (the cam portion 761b and the interposed member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 763 to the swinging member 732 lowers the tip of the swinging member 732. The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) is increased to the section in which the tip of the swing member 732 is lifted (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position). The load of the drive motor 763 can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the interval of rotating to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (slide pin 761c and slide hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the protruding member 735 slides downward the protruding member 735 (the second rotation of the driving body 761). The load of the drive motor 763 in the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid upward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position). It can be smaller than the load on the motor 763 .

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the load on the first transmission means is relatively high, the load on the second transmission means is relatively low, and when the load on the first transmission means is relatively high, allows the second transmission means to be relatively lightly loaded. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to alternately displace the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 (one by one), it is possible to create a state in which both the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 are displaced, thereby reducing the load on the drive motor 763. At the same time, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by displacing the two members 732 and 735 .

The first transmission means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means displaces the projecting member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. Depending on the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the slide hole 735b, the cam portion 761b and the slide pin 761c are oscillated per unit displacement amount (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761). The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load on the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supplied power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, the displacement speed of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be varied. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 763 and enhance the presentation effect.

Also, it is a section in which the load on the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (a section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), In the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position) is caused by the displacement of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 . It is formed by providing a downward displacement component, that is, by utilizing the displacement due to the weight of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 . Therefore, complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the slide hole 735b can be suppressed. Thereby, the reduction of part cost can be aimed at. In addition, since the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the slide hole 735b are suppressed from becoming complicated, the displacement speed of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily made constant. It can reduce the burden.

In this case, since the cam portion 761b of the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c of the second transmission means are integrally formed in this embodiment, the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are arranged separately. This eliminates the need for a space for the rotation, and the size of the rotating member 730 can be reduced accordingly. In addition, compared to the case where the cam portion 761b and the slide pin 761c are formed separately, displacement deviation of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. can be enhanced.

Here, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position, that is, when the protruding member 735 in the stopped state starts to slide upward, the driving motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load on the engine becomes large, the initial speed becomes slow, and there is a risk that the performance effect will be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c) extends from the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b). ) can be made non-transmission. Therefore, while the slide pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be accelerated accordingly. The upward sliding displacement can be started smoothly.

On the other hand, while the slide pin 761c is passing through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driver 761 is being rotated from the first rotational position to the predetermined rotational position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state. Meanwhile, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the tip is lowered (see FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b)). Therefore, when the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state and the swinging member 732 is swung, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 necessary for the swinging can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the momentum of the rotation of the driving body 761, so that the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

In addition, since the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are brought into the stopped state. By avoiding this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by the displacement.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sliding hole 735b is provided with the curved portion 735b1, and when the projecting member 735 starts to slide upward, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the driving body 761. By imparting momentum to the protruding member 735, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the protruding member 735 starts to slide, the driving body 761 stops rotating before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, when the driving body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, and is at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1). positioned (see FIGS. 40(b) and 42(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank friction contact member in an arc concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), whereas the pin of the crank member In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, when the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position, the shape of the non-transmission section becomes a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member. becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section after the direction change, not only does the sliding resistance increase, but also the amount of upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the driving body 761 rapidly increases. , and the load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the driving body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load on the driving motor 763 from becoming excessive.

Next, the lift unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the lifting unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. FIG. 43(a) is a front view of the lifting unit 800, FIG. 43(b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 43(c) is a side view of the lifting unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the lift unit 800 includes a horizontally long rectangular base member 810 disposed in front of the base member 510 of the upper combined unit 500, and a vertically long base member 810 disposed on the base member 810 so as to be vertically movable. a driving motor 891 that imparts driving force to the lifting member 820; a transmission gear 840 that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving motor 891; A link member 850 arranged to be rotatable about a shaft support by rotation of a transmission gear 840; a slide member 860 connected to the link member 850 and arranged to be slidable by displacement of the link member 850; and a transmission member 870 for transmitting the sliding displacement of the slide member 860 to the lifting member 820 .

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center portion in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 43(b)), and pivot pins 814 to 817 projecting cylindrically on the back side. and are formed mainly.

Each slide hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole through which each slide pin 861, 862, 863 of a slide member 860, which will be described later, is inserted to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860. 43(b) in the up-and-down direction) is formed in a long hole shape. Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each slide hole 811, 812, 813. As shown in FIG.

The sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 are formed side by side, with the sliding hole 811 formed in the center and the sliding holes 812 and 813 formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. . In other words, the slide hole 811 is formed between the slide holes 812 and 813 .

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted through the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 to be described later and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole.

The pivot pin 817 is a projection that is inserted into a through hole 851 that is formed through one end of a link member 850 (to be described later) to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter that is smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. is formed in a cylindrical shape.

The drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a drive force to the lifting member 820 as described above. The drive motor 891 is arranged on the base member 810 via a rear cover 892 formed of a plate on the rear side of the base member 810 . The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted through a through hole 892a formed through the rear cover 892, and is internally fitted to the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 through the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

Transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting gears 841 to 844. As described above, gears 842 to 844 are rotatable on pivot pins 814 to 816 projecting from the back side of base member 810. pivoted on. Therefore, when the gear 841 rotates, its driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gears 842 and 843 . Therefore, by driving the drive motor 891, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated.

The gear 844 is formed with a projection 844a projecting in a columnar shape to the rear side. The projection 844a is a projection for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850, which will be described later.

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate. The link member 850 has a circular through-hole 851 at one end, a transmission-side slide groove 854 at the other end extending in substantially the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 , the through-hole 851 and the transmission. and a connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854 .

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole through which the pivot pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted to rotatably pivotally support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. It is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817 . Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 in an unremovable manner by inserting the pivot pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through-hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the rear side and fastening with a screw or the like. be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850, an annular portion 852 is formed that protrudes in an annular shape toward the front side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 43(b)). Annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between base member 810 and link member 850 and for rotatably accommodating transmission gear 840 in the gap. The projection dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 841-844.

A torsion spring SP<b>1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852 . The torsion spring SP1 is formed by winding a wire made of a metal material in a columnar spiral, and can exert a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the spirally wound inner edge portion of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the spirally wound state of the torsion spring SP1 is broken, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied in the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large columnar helical portion, the annular portion 852 can prevent the helical state from collapsing and stabilize the biasing direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1. can be done.

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 projecting like a hook from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 projecting like a hook from the back side of the base member 810. engaged. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850 and apply a biasing force to the link member 850 in the direction around the rotation axis.

The connection-side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the projection 844 a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844 , it can be displaced by sliding inside the coupling-side sliding groove 853 . Accordingly, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced around the through hole 851 as the projection 844a is displaced. A detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side slide groove 854 is a hole through which the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 as the link member 850 is rotated. is smaller than the outer diameter of the slide pin 861 . Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 inserted through the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 .

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the pivot pin 816 from the rear side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected with the base member 810 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the slide member 860 provided on the front side of the base member 810 can be slidably displaced by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 provided on the back side of the base member 810 .

The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body that is vertically oblong when viewed from the front, and the length dimension in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the length dimension in the direction of gravity of the base member 810 . Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are superimposed on each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from projecting outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810 . This makes it possible to reduce the overall outer shape of the lifting unit 800 when viewed from the front.

The slide member 860 includes a plurality of slide pins 861 to 863 projecting cylindrically from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a circle projecting to the front side. It is mainly formed with two columnar protrusions 867 .

As described above, the slide pin 861 is inserted through the transmission-side slide groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced as the transmission-side slide groove 854 is displaced. The slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the slide member 860. The slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 are inserted through the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 of the base member 810. Collars C3 are fastened to the tips of the moving pins 863 from the rear side of the base member 810 by screws or the like.

Therefore, the slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 formed in the base member 810 in the shape of a straight long hole. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810 and slidably connected in the direction of the long holes of the sliding holes 812 and 813 . As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, so that the slide member 860 can be displaced in the gravitational direction (the direction of the elongated holes of the slide holes 812 and 813).

The plurality of slide-side slide holes 864 to 866 are holes into which projections 871a to 871c of a second slide member 871, which will be described later, are inserted, and are formed in an elongated hole shape long in the direction of gravity, with a width dimension in the short direction. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the projections 871a-871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member arranged on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with a pair of racks 872 arranged symmetrically and extending in the direction of gravity, and the rack gear of each rack 872. It is mainly formed by each pinion gear 873 and a second slide member 871 arranged between each pinion gear 873 .

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810 . A pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically about the central portion of the base member 810 . A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and meshes with a pinion gear 873, which will be described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 and meshes with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is also displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that it rotates as the slide member 860 is displaced.

The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a plurality of projections 871a to 871c projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side.

The upright portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevating member 820, which will be described later, is fastened to the upright end surface thereof. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the lifting member 820 can be fastened.

The standing portion 871e forms a gap between the lifting member 820 and the base member 810, and is a gap forming portion for disposing a decorative member 830, which will be described later, in the gap. The standing dimension is set to be larger than the thickness of the Thereby, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the lifting member 820 and the base member 810 .

The rack gear 871 d is a meshing surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on both left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871 . That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set substantially equal to the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873 .

As described above, the plurality of projections 871a to 871c are inserted through the slide side slide holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and the projections 871a to 871c are inserted from the rear side of the slide member 860 to the slide side. The collar C4 is inserted through the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and held slidably along the longitudinal direction of the slide side slide holes 864 to 866 .

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, so that the second slide member 871 meshing with the pinion gear 873 can be slidably displaced with the rotation. Therefore, the second slide member 871 is slidably displaced relative to the slide member 860 in the gravitational direction. A greater distance can be displaced than member 860 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the lifting unit 800 as a unit, and to prevent the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the lifting member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 from being reduced.

The elevating member 820 is a member that is vertically displaced as the second slide member 871 is displaced as described above, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. The elevating member 820 has a protrusion 821 protruding to the rear side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion that is connected to the standing portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and protrudes from a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the standing portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed in the projecting tip end surface, and a screw inserted through the inside of the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened in the fastening hole 821a. Thereby, the second slide member 871 and the lifting member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are arranged on the front side of the transmission member 870 . The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the frontward displacement of the transmission member 870 , thereby suppressing the frontward displacement of the transmission member 870 and colliding with the decorative member 830 .

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape that imitates the title or logo of the gaming machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, light can be emitted from the title, logo, or the like to the player side to give interest to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, a movable mode of the lifting unit 800 will be described.

46 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 52(a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52(b) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. 52(c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is the state in which the elevating member 820 is positioned at the top and is disposed on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810. The third state is the state in which the elevating member 820 is The second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. be.

In addition, in FIG. 51, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 placed at the end of the rotating members 435 and 455 that is the farthest from the rotation shaft is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is given the symbol of a virtual line KS3. .

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52(a), when the lifting unit 800 is in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side slide groove 854 is formed) is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, the transmission member 870 has the pinion gear 873 meshed with the upper end of the rack 872 and the pinion gear 873 meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is positioned upward. Accordingly, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is similarly positioned upward.

In the first state, an imaginary line KS1 connecting the shaft of the terminal gear 844 of the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the projection 844a and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 and an intermediate position in the width direction of the connection-side sliding groove 853, which is perpendicular to the imaginary line KS2 (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the terminal gear 844 of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the lifting member 820 can be held by the coupling-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844 a of the gear 844 . Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the link member 850 from being displaced by the load of the lifting member 820 . As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, so energy consumption can be reduced.

46, 49 and 52(a), when electric power is applied to the driving motor 891 and a rotational driving force acts, the gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate as described above. A driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the gear 844 is driven to rotate. The projection 844a is inserted into the connecting-side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and connected. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860 connected by inserting the slide pin 861 into the transmission-side slide groove 854 of the link member 850 is slidably displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by a rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to its displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 arranged between the two pinion gears 873 can be slidably displaced. As a result, the lifting member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52(b), the lifting unit 800 in the second state rotates the link member 850 about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. state. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward with respect to the base member 810 from the first state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52(c). In the lifting unit 800 in the third state, the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced around the axis of the through hole 851 . Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward from the second state with respect to the base member 810 .

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged below and adjacent to the decorative member 830 . Therefore, the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830 can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the elevating member 820 is adjacent to the lower part of the decorative member 830, so that the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the lifting unit 800 from the first state of the initial position to the third state, a pattern (character) combining the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 and the decorative member 830 can be displayed in front of the game area. can.

Furthermore, in the third state, the slide pins 861-863 of the slide member 860 are positioned at the lower ends of the slide holes 811-813 of the base member 810. As shown in FIG. Therefore, since the load of the lifting member 820 can be held by the three sliding pins 861 to 863, the load of the lifting member 820 can be suppressed from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 of the transmission gear 840. As a result, damage to gear 844 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61, the combined state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) will be described.

First, referring to FIGS. 53 and 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the action unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 200 along line LIV-LIV in FIG.

The combined state shown in FIG. 53 means that the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is elevated with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating members of the elevation unit 800 are displaced. 820 is displaced downward with respect to the base member 810 . In this way, one pattern ( The title, logo, character, etc. of the gaming machine 10 can be visually recognized by the player.

Each member of each movable unit is formed in a pattern-like shape. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating animal wings, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in a bow-shaped shape, and the elevating unit 800 The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape that imitates the title of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the lifting unit 800 can combine the lifting member 820 and the decorative member 830 to form a single pattern (character). 455, the lifting member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character).

That is, the lift unit 800 not only forms one display surface by combining the lift base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also the other movable units (projection unit 700 and slide unit 400) provided in the operation unit 200. can be combined into one display surface. As a result, by varying the displacement state of each movable unit (elevating unit 800, protruding unit 700, and sliding unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200, a plurality of display modes can be formed, which is of interest to the player. can give

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 , the operation unit 200 in the combined state is such that a part of each rotating member 435 , 455 of the slide unit 400 is attached to the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54 ). placed in overlapping positions. That is, the lifting member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The lifting member 820 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 54) of each rotating member 435, 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed with a protruding unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are displaceable between the retracted position and the combined (extended) position, and the elevating member 820 protrudes. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since one pattern can be formed by displacing the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting unit 800 of the three movable units, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. can.

In this case, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is arranged in a different position in the longitudinal direction than the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 . That is, when the members come into contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of coming into contact with each other, it is necessary to consider damage due to impact at the time of contact. And since it does not come into contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the trailing elevating member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the leading rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhang position, and a dramatic effect can be achieved when forming a pattern (character). can increase

Also, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is arranged on the rear side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 . Therefore, when each slide member 430, 450 is displaced, if the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each rotation member 435, 455 will not move to the protruding member 735. Contact can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the projecting member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400 and projecting unit 700) are movable and united in the space in the central part of the game machine (in front of the third pattern display device 81), the side surface There is a game machine that collides with each other and unites. However, when the side faces are collided and merged, the collision tends to cause scratches on the collision surfaces. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is likely to be impaired.

Also, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to slow down the speed of collision, but since it is necessary to slow down the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the character is slowed down. I went down. There is a problem that the player's interest is spoiled.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, sliding unit 400, and projecting unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The sides do not collide with each other when displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit, thereby suppressing deterioration of the design of the movable unit.

Furthermore, when the movable units are displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined, the side surfaces do not collide with each other, so that the speed of displacement can be made constant during the combined displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled by suppressing the slowdown of the combination motion of the accessory.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the lifting unit 800 and the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 are connected to a two-stage rack (the lifting unit 800 has a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871). 873, and the slide unit 400 is configured with a first side pinion gear 432 between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). The speed of the displacement operation can be improved more than that of the rack of the type (a form consisting only of a rack and a pinion). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time during which the player can visually recognize the joining action, thereby preventing the player from losing interest.

Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the size in the front-rear direction becomes large. If the front-rear dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are made small (thin) in order to suppress the front-rear dimensions, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, the lifting member 820 includes a second slide member 871 formed so as to protrude on the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the front-rear direction. The total length of the member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the gaming machine 10 in the front-rear direction, while increasing the front-rear size of the elevating member 820 to increase its rigidity. can be secured.

In addition, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is arranged at a position protruding toward the front side by the second sliding member 871, and the second sliding member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the sliding unit 400 move forward and backward. arranged in overlapping positions. As a result, the space on the back side of the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 can be increased, and the width that is bulky in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a smaller width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53), the lift unit 800 and the slide unit 400 It is possible to reduce the width that is bulky in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference between the two (see FIG. 54). In addition, since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, it is possible not to cross the displacement trajectory of the rotation members 435 and 455, so that the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 Collision can be suppressed during displacement (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58, a description will be given of how the movable units (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the lifting unit 800) are displaced to the combined state. 55-58 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. FIGS. 55 to 58 sequentially illustrate displacement states when the movable units are displaced to the combined state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In this embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710 . In the second action, the projecting unit 700 continues its action from the first action, and the base members 434, 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435, 455 rotate about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swing member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 , the projection unit 700 slides the lift base 720 with respect to the base member 710 to perform the first operation. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the lifting base 720 is as described above, the detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second motion is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lift unit 800. FIG. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434, 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed while the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is being displaced with respect to the base member 710 . Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation of displacing the elevation base 720 of the projecting unit 700 with respect to the base member 710 and the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevation member 720 can be substantially the same.

As the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and displaced as described above, the rotation members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. (Fig. 57, center position in the left-right direction).

Here, the first member and the second member are provided so as to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and the first member and the second member are displaced to the united position. There is a game machine that associates (integrates) the first member and the second member by bringing them close to each other or bringing them into contact with each other so that the player can see them as one character.

In this case, in order to enhance the presentation effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member to be large.

However, if the structure is such that the first member and the second member are each displaced to the united (overhanging) position by linear displacement, if the first member and the second member are made larger, they may be displaced to the united position while being displaced to the united position. may interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to perform the respective displacements at different times. , the production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is linearly displaced to ascend and descend with respect to the base member 710, so that the rotation members 435 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are disposed at the combined position. 455 is arranged at the combined position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 provided on the elevation base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the combined position. can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, thereby shortening the time until the character is formed and enhancing the presentation effect. be able to.

Further, the displacement trajectory of the rotary members 435 and 455 is a rotation trajectory that does not intersect the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 that is linearly displaced. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement locus of the elevation base 720, the rotation loci of the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotation loci having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevation base 720. ) position, the displacement component in the displacement direction of the lift base 720 is set to decrease.

As a result, the displacement trajectories of the rotary members 435 and 455 can be made to be displacement trajectories that wrap around the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 from the outside. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set to a displacement trajectory that avoids the displacement trajectory of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that performs linear vertical displacement. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the lift base 720 are shifted, their trajectories do not intersect with each other, so that interference between the members can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Further, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a displacement trajectory that wraps around the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape of the linearly displaced slide unit 700 in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the lifting base 720 is increased, interference with the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily suppressed. Therefore, the lift base 720 can be enlarged.

As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the base members 434 and 454 that are slidably displaceable. That is, the rotary members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement, and are displaced to the combined (extended) position. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 can easily form curved trajectories. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating member 730 while the rotating members 435 and 455 are being displaced to the combined position.

That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the protruding unit 700 while moving to the combined (overhanging) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the protruding unit 700 instead of movement, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotationally displaced, the positions of the rotating shafts are fixed. However, when the rotary members 435 and 455 are rotated, only the ends opposite to the rotary shafts are rotationally displaced. Further, when the rotation shafts of the rotating members 435 and 455 are set at the center of the rotating members 435 and 455, the tips of the rotating members collide with the rear case 300 when displacing from the retracted position to the extended position. , it is difficult to dispose the rotating member at the retracted position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation shafts of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the central positions of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation shafts are attached to the base members 434 and 454 which are slidably displaceable. Because they are coupled, the rotary members 435 and 455 can be operated in a combination of linear displacement and rotary displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted positions from colliding with the rear case 300 when they are rotationally displaced. A large displacement distance can be set.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is different from the posture at the combined position. Can be defined independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced between the retracted position and the combined position only by rotation, the attitude of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the extended position. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 combine rotational displacement and linear displacement, the orientation at the retracted position can be defined independently of the orientation at the combined position by the amount of linear displacement. Therefore, it is possible to increase the freedom of attitude of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position.

In other words, the rotation members 435, 455 have their longitudinal direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retraction space at the retracted position (the position where the base members 434, 454 are arranged on the outside). On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), the direction is substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third pattern display device 81 by rotating. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the orientation of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position, and at the combined position, the central portion of the game board 13 can be protruded.

Furthermore, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is disposed in the central portion of the game machine 10 (operation unit 200), the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged as the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged. , the space on the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in a configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally elongated shape and arranged in a horizontally elongated posture at the combined (extended) position to form a character together with the projecting unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully exhibited. That is, the game area is formed vertically, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow. , it is difficult to secure the installation space for the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third pattern display device 81 at the retracted position, it was necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the combined (extended) position, and are arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the third pattern display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged accordingly, and as a result, they are formed together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined position. Patterns (characters) can be made larger.

That is, the retraction space in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are retracted is reduced to secure the space in the central portion (the third symbol display device 81) of the game machine 10, and at the united position, the central portion of the game machine 10 is moved. overhang amount can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are connected to the base members 434 and 454 so as to be rotatably displaceable. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protrusion unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation members 435 and 455 from interfering with the projecting unit 700 while being displaced to the projecting position.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size accordingly, and together with the projecting unit 700 at the combined (overhanging) position, the The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the third pattern display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member 435 , 455 can be set, and the rotary members 435 and 455 can be formed large.

The protrusion unit 700 also includes a swinging member 732 on the rotating member 730 . In the second operation, the rocking member 732 is displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730 , so that it can come close to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and come into contact therewith. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by contacting the swinging member 732 . In this case, the tip of the swinging member 732 is displaced upward, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swinging member 732 . A detailed description of the contact of the swinging member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be given later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. FIG. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700 and lifting unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 can displace the rocking member 732 as it is displaced.

Therefore, by displacing the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 , the tip of the protruding member 735 is displaced to the rear side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 . Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the lifting unit 800 are connected, the player can see the state in which the movable units are integrated (unified state), and can be entertained by the displacement of the character.

Furthermore, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward along with the displacement of the projecting member 735, the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide members 430, 450 in the slide unit 400 is reduced. The gap (space) can be made larger than during the second operation.

As a result, when the rotary members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) are in the united state, a space that can be displaced can be secured. As a result, the rotation members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) can be displaced to rotate further in the motion unit 200 in the combined state, and the variation of the displacement mode in the combined state of the motion unit 200 can be increased. .

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730 so as to perform the role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455. displaces the swing member 732 in a direction approaching the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as a displacement space for the rotating members 435 and 455. can increase

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by uniting each operation unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is shown. For example, when each member of each operation unit (rotating members 435, 455, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), lifting member 820) is combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by forming the rotating members 435 and 455 into a bow-like shape, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated using the gaps between the swing member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow moves. It is possible to create a state in which the bow is pulled by an arrow and the bow is released, or an arrow is released from the bow. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow, and the lift base 720 (rotating member 730) is part of the rear end side of the arrow (opposite side to the arrowhead). is the central part of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, the case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described. 59(a) and 59(b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700. FIG. 59(a) and 59(b) illustrate a transition state when the stop position of the left slide member 430 is displaced in the excess direction and the left rotating member 435 collides with the rocking member 732. FIG.

59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 will be described, and when the right rotating member 455 collides with the swinging member 732, 435 are arranged symmetrically about the central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state may not be in their original state as shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 will not stop at the stop position in the combined state and will collide with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 . Therefore, there is a possibility that the rocking member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 and damages the parts.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is arranged to be rotatable with respect to the elevation base 720, so that it is shown in FIG. By rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 in this way, the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the elevating base 720, not only is the variation of the displacement mode of the protruding unit 700 increased, but also the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide. can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevation base 720, The swinging member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 arranged in a pair rotate and come into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450 .

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to reduce the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, the driving force for further rotating the rotating member 435 is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, further rotation of the rotating member 730 can be restricted.

That is, the rocking member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed in two sets on the left and right. Since the rocking member 732 in the other set is formed to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) as it contacts, for example, in the one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) When the rocking member 732 is displaced beyond the reference position and comes into contact with the rocking member 732, the rocking member 732 of the other set is directed toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) along with the contact. can be displaced. Therefore, when the swinging member 732 contacts the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) contacts the swinging member 732 in the one set. The impact can be received not only by the swinging member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and breakage of each member can be suppressed.

Also, in this case, the swing member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 07(b)). 435), a driving force can act in the direction opposite to the rotational moment acting about the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435). ) can be used to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 730 . Therefore, since it is not necessary to supply electric power to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730, the driving energy can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described. 60(a) and 60(b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. FIG. 60(a) and 60(b) illustrate transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the rotary members 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 collide.

Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 deviate in the excess direction, the swing member 732 collides with the rotation members 435 and 455, causing the swing member 732 or the rotation members 435 and 455 to collide. was likely to be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the rocking member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-described third motion at the end timing of the second motion (the end timing of the displacement motion of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to reduce the impact of the collision. As a result, damage to the rocking member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455 can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for projecting the protruding member 735. Therefore, the drive motor 763 for driving the protruding member 735 load can be reduced. That is, by transmitting the impact when the rocking member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455 to the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 through the sliding wall 733c, the driving body 761 (see FIG. 40) is moved. can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third action may be performed after a predetermined period of time after the second action is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the sliding members 430 and 450 are displaced in the excess direction and the swinging member 732 collides with the rotating members 435 and 455, the swinging member 732 and the projecting member 735 are displaced. The rotation resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacing the rocking member 732 .

Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotational direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy required to drive the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435, 455 in the third motion will be described. 61(a) and (b) are front views of the rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the lift base 720 and rotation member 730 of the projection unit 700 in the third operation. It should be noted that FIG. 61(b) illustrates a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced in the third operation.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the gaps between the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third motion are such that the rotary member 730 is displaced in the third motion. As the protruding member 735 is displaced, the swinging member 732 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61(a)) to increase its size. Therefore, the rotating members 435, 455 in the third motion can be displaced further than in the second motion.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61(b), by further sliding the base members 434, 454 of the left and right slide members 430, 450 toward the central portion of the gaming machine 10, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated, It can be displaced to the central portion of the gaming machine 10 . As a result, the combined (overhanging) state of the lifting member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player can be further enhanced with a sense of unity.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68, the second combined state of operation unit 200 will be described.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. 62 to 64 illustrate transition states in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 projects to the position of the second combined state. 62 shows the action unit 200 at the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the action unit 200 at the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the action unit 200 at the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. are respectively illustrated.

Furthermore, each member (rotating members 435, 455, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730 ) and the lifting member 820) in the combined (overhanging) position will be referred to as a first combined state. In addition, in the first combined state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the first rendering mode. Players can be made aware of this.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is arranged at the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17(a)) and the upper combined unit 500 is at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. )) and the retracted position (position shown in FIG. 27(a)). 62, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slid to the center of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 is displaced. By being displaced downward and displacing the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 upward, the state shown in FIG. 63 is formed. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 18(a)), the upper combined unit 500 is in the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 22(a)), and the lower combined unit 600 is in the extended position ( 27(c)), the second united state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second combined state, each movable unit of the second group of movable units (slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, and lower combined unit 600) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as a second presentation mode. Players can be made aware of this. The pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode is, for example, a pattern (character) that imitates Pegasus (an imaginary creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the part forming the body of Pegasus is the lower combined unit 600, the part forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper combined unit 500, and the part forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second combined state, the base member 434 arranged to be slidably displaceable is displaced to the extension position (the position shown in FIG. 18(a)) of the end position of the slide. That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged with different distances by which they are slid from the retracted position. Further, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position of the rotating member 435 can be changed between the first combined state and the second combined state.

Furthermore, as described above, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, so that the base member 434 moves from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. The rotation angles (postures) of the rotating members 435 are arranged differently because the sliding distances are different. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (orientation) of the rotating member 435 differs by approximately 180 degrees around the rotation axis between the first combined state and the second combined state.

As described above, the operation unit 200 extends each member (rotating members 435, 455, elevation base 720 (rotating member 730), and elevation member 820) of each operation unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800). Displacement to the out position allows the members to coalesce to form a single pattern (character).

In other words, the action unit 200 only forms one pattern (character) by combining each member in the central space of the action unit 200 (the space in front of the third pattern display device 81) as the first effect mode. Instead, as a second effect mode, each member can be combined in the central space of the action unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, etc. can be made Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects, so that the players can be entertained by showing various effects.

Here, a first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units displaceably formed between the retracted position and the combined (extended) position, and a first movable unit group displaceably formed between the retracted position and the extended position A gaming machine is known that includes a second movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units.

According to this game machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged in the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) to form one pattern ( character) is recognized by the player as the first presentation mode, and when each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged in the projecting position, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is associated with each other. (Integrated), an effect is performed in which the player recognizes another pattern (character) as the second effect mode. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is arranged to the overhanging position, so that the first A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group, and in the second game state, each first movable unit is retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is retracted to the retracted position. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the projecting position, an effect is performed in which each movable unit of the second movable unit group forms the second character in the game area.

In this case, it is effective to be able to form a larger pattern (character) in order to enhance the presentation effect. For this purpose, each movable unit in the first movable unit group and each movable unit in the second movable unit group must be formed large.

However, forming a plurality of characters (drawing modes) as in the above-described conventional technique increases the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters, and each movable unit is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit because the area (space) for keeping them is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to make each character (drawing mode) larger.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit in the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600) is also used, the number of movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) rendering modes is correspondingly increased. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 has a part of the pattern (character) visually recognized by the player as the first presentation mode and a pattern (character) visually recognized by the player as the second presentation mode. , so the number of movable units for forming the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, since a space is created in the retraction space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (space other than the central space in the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third pattern display device 81)), each movable unit (sliding Unit 400, upper combined unit 500, lower combined unit 600, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) can be enlarged.

In addition, since each member of each movable unit (rotating members 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), and elevating member 820) can be increased in size, the first A pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode can be enlarged.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 has a part of the pattern (character) visually recognized by the player as the first presentation mode and a pattern (character) visually recognized by the player as the second presentation mode. ), if it is placed at the same position in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, it is movable in common in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is being used, which impairs interest.

In addition, if it is necessary to use the member (rotating member 435) arranged at the same position to form the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, respectively, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has a combined (extended) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a combined (extended) position arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since the exit position) is set to a different position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and the interest is hindered. can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged differs between the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, the patterns (characters) formed in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode are different. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being disturbed.

In addition, since the rotary member 435 can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the degree of freedom can be increased, and the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode can be arranged. It is possible to easily form the difference (shape and arrangement position) from.

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating member 435 is shared between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize this, which hinders interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode by using the rotating member 435 in the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly, and the first rendering mode and the first rendering mode are required. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the second presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has different postures when forming the first effect mode and when forming the second effect mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest. In addition, it is possible to easily form the difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

Therefore, as described above, the rotation member 435 is arranged in different positions and in different orientations (rotation angles) between the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first performance mode and the second performance mode are used in common, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of interest.

In other words, the rotating member 435, which is used both in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, is arranged in a state where either the position or the posture in which it is arranged differs between the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. However, there is a possibility that the player will recognize that the rotating member 435 is used for both the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. Since both the arrangement position and the posture are different between the mode and the second presentation mode, the player should be informed that the rotating member 435 is shared between the first combined state and the second combined state. It can be difficult to be seen.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably disposed on the linearly displaceable base member 434, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the projecting position and attitude (rotation angle) when forming the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (orientation) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be enhanced. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) to allow the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed in a larger size, and the pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode can be formed in a larger size. can be For example, even if there is a relatively narrow area such as one side and the other side of the third pattern display device 81 in the width direction of the game area and it is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members, the rotating member is located in this area. The rotation member 435 can be formed large while setting the retracted position of the member 435 .

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in a region so that the striking rotary member 435 of the base member 434 overlaps in the retracted position when viewed from the front. ) can be made smaller in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, a detailed description will be given of how the operation unit 200 is displaced to form the second combined state. 65(a) to 66(b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600. FIG. FIG. 67(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65(a), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb. FIG. 68(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66(a), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb.

Note that FIGS. 65(a) to 66(b) sequentially illustrate the manner of displacement from the retracted state to the second combined state. 65(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, and FIG. 2A and 2B respectively show the slide unit 400 in the retracted state.

Further, the displacement from FIG. 65(a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. As shown in FIG. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 at an intermediate position of displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the second combined state shown in FIG. 66(b). It is a front view. In the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66(a), the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 continues to slide from the first state, while the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are displaced. It is done by That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second rendering mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper combined unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower combined unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated with dashed lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a), in the retracted state (located at the retracted position), the upper combined unit 500 is in a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is housed inside the base member 510. , and the lower combined unit 600 is disposed at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 has a base member 434 partly arranged on the rear side of the lower displacement member 640 and a rotating member 435 arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640 . That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434 .

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is composed of the front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and the rear side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the rear side as described above. A stepped portion 434b2 recessed toward the rear side is formed on the lower side of the pivot hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b (lower side in FIG. 67(b)).

The stepped portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600. By recessing to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, since the lower side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is recessed toward the back side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower combined unit 600 can be inserted into the gap. A displacement member 640 may be provided.

Further, since the thickness of the lower side of the base member 434 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slid to a first state (the state shown in FIG. 65(b)), which will be described later, the contact between the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting drive to the rotating member 435 can be arranged above the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said that

As described above, the base member 434 is connected to the base member 410 at its upper end (upper side in FIG. 65) so as to be slidably displaceable, and is in a suspended state, and its lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is connected to the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the upper side of the base member 434 is slid in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 65(a)). Since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

At the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 65(a)), the rear side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower combined unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the stepped portion 434b2 and the pivot hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower combined unit 600 in the retracted state from collapsing in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower combined unit 600, the lower displacement member 640 is elongated in the vertical direction. , the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 is prevented from collapsing in the front-rear direction, and the position in the front-rear direction of the lower combined unit 600 at the retracted position can be stabilized. Therefore, contact with the lower displacement member 640 can be suppressed when the base member 434 is slid to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65(b) and 67(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced as the base member 434 is displaced. As a result, the rotating member 435 is rotated by displacing the base member 434 by a predetermined amount. It can be positioned so that it does not overlap with the united unit 600 in the front-rear direction.

That is, in front view, the area K2 surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower combined unit 600 (see FIG. 65(b)) does not overlap the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. A partial lower displacement member 640 is positioned.

Since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is elongated in the vertical direction as described above, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the area K2 where the upper end tends to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, collision between the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be suppressed.

In the first state, the base member 434 is the upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) away from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting (rotational driving force) displacing the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500. 530 in the longitudinal direction. This can prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when displacing to the second state.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper combined unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), when the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435, the upper displacement member 530 By delaying the start time of the downward displacement from the start time of the left slide member 430, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the extended position is started when the base member 434 is positioned on the rear side of the upper displacement member 630 . Thereby, it is possible to suppress collision with the side surface of the base member 434 when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only at one end, the other end (upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 rotates downward and is displaced to protrude as it slides in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (center portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66(b)). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slid toward the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced toward the rear side of the base member 434 rather than the front side thereof. Then, when the base member 434 collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530. Collision with the side surface of the member 434 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 68(a), in a second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 moves further laterally than in the first state. It is slid to the right (right side in FIG. 66(a)). Accordingly, the rotating member 435, which is rotationally displaced (interlockingly) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. As a result, one end of the rotating member 435 positioned closer to the lower combined unit 600 (left side in FIG. 65(b)) than the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by sliding the base member 434, the width of the region K2 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilting in the front-rear direction.

Also, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the first state is displaced to the second state, the base member 434 can be placed on the back side of the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( The upper contact portion 533 side) can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 .

In other words, while the upper displacement member 530 is being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 434 in a front view, so that it is displaced to a position forming the second combined state. It is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 until the upper displacement member 530 is moved.

Furthermore, since the projecting position of the upper displacement member 530 is located between the opposing base member 434 and the rotating member 435, the rotating member 435 can be positioned closer to the front side to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the upper position. By associating (integrating) the displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435, it is possible to make the whole as a predetermined pattern (character) to be easily visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 66(b) and 68(b), in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is placed in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower combined unit 600 (left side in FIG. 68(b)).

As a result, the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged at close positions and viewed by the player as one pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stop states. The structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary accordingly. Therefore, when forming the second effect mode, if the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 abuts against the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600, the rotation member 435 If the arrangement position and orientation do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper combination unit 500 and the lower combination unit 600. On the other hand, if the arrangement position and orientation of the rotating member 435 exceed the target position, the upper combination will occur. The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 in the combined state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 rotates each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protruding unit 700) in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. , lifting unit 800) and the movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), lifting member 820) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit in front view. Therefore, even if there is a variation in the stop state (extended position or posture) in the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member You can easily maintain your sexuality. That is, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient due to the partial overlap in front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of gaps between the movable units and the movable members of the respective movable units, and the positions in the front-rear direction can be reduced. By being different, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent the movable members of the movable units from being pushed out and causing positional deviation. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member in the combined state.

Further, in the second rendering mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are arranged in contact with each other, and the rotary member 435 is arranged in front of them. By associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435, the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state can be easily recognized by the player.

That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (overhanging) state can be positioned at the same position. The pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode can be easily visually recognized by the player to the extent that the pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in its stopped state (arrangement position and posture), but the rotating member 435 is at the stop position when forming the second effect mode. 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position or attitude of the rotating member 435 does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, and the association (integration) ) is inhibited.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause positional deviation, which hinders association (integration). That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other. When the arrangement position or posture of 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced in the state of being in contact with each other, not only are the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (overhanging) position, there is a configuration in which the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

Also, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. , the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the rotating member 435 . Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized as one pattern by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second presentation mode and thus losing interest.

Next, a slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated and a state in which they are not rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. Configured.

The main body base member 2480 is formed of a horizontally long plate-like body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and a projecting plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge. Further, the body base member 2480 is formed with projecting portions 2481 projecting from the lower surface side of both ends in the longitudinal direction.

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 as the first member 431 slides.

The protrusions 2481 are formed at both ends of the body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction, as described above. The projecting portion 2481 is recessed with a circular bearing hole 2481a into which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmission member 2485, which will be described later, is inserted. In addition, a through hole 2481b is formed through the protrusion 2481 formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (on the right side of the gaming machine) in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the body base member 2480 toward the outside, and the axial centers formed at both ends are concentrically formed.

The rotation transmission member 2485 has a substantially rectangular cross section and is formed in a prism shape with a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction. At both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, rotating portions 2487 having a substantially circular shape in a side view and having a predetermined thickness are formed. is formed to protrude.

In addition, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on the one longitudinal direction side (the right side of the game board). is set.

Axial portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are concentrically formed with each other. Further, as described above, the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a formed in the projecting portion 2481, so that the diameter of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than that of the bearing hole 2481a.

Accordingly, when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2481 and arranged in the main body base member 2480, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of a rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. As shown in FIG. The rotation transmission member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one longitudinal side (right side in front view) of the main body base member 2480 .

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotation drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmission member 2485 , and its axis is fastened to the rotation drive motor 2489 . The rotation drive motor 2489 has its rotating shaft inserted through the through hole 2481 b of the projecting portion 2481 , and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the projecting portion 2481 .

Therefore, by applying a rotational driving force to the rotation driving motor 2489 , the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487 a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmission member 2485 . This allows the rotation transmission member 2485 to rotate around the shaft portion 2486 .

Left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with transmission gear 2437 a arranged on left slide member 2430 . The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a transmits driving force to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, the rotating member 435 can be driven to rotate as the left slide member 2430 slides.

Right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with transmission gear 2457 a arranged on right slide member 2450 . The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a transmits drive to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a is omitted.

FIG. 71(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71(b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed with a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 whose tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the rear side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension (lengthwise dimension) as the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The swollen portion 2437a2 is a swollen portion having a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the center portion of the tooth thickness toward the rear side. The distance dimension by which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 toward the rear side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension of the tooth portion 2437a1 in the front-rear direction or smaller than the distance dimension of the tooth portion 2437a1 in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in rigidity of the swelling portion 2437a2, and it is possible to suppress damage to the swelling portion 2437a2.

Next, operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

FIG. 72(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 24 is a schematic front view of the slide unit 2400 in a disengaged state. FIG. 73(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and FIG. 73(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

In addition, in FIG. 72, part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is illustrated with a dashed line for easy understanding. Also, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 73(a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is positioned downward (lower in FIGS. 72 and 73), the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and transmission A state of meshing with the gear 2437a is formed.

Therefore, the left slide member 2430 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 2410, so that the transmission gear 2437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when a rotational driving force is applied to the rotation drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotation transmission member 2485 upward on the back side, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. be.

72(b) and 73(b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 is displaced upward with the rotation of . As a result, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted from the transmission gears 437b to 437f to the rotating member 435, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be configured such that it does not rotate.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430; A second driving state in which the left slide member 2430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating without the displacement being converted into rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and a second drive state in which the left sliding member 2430 is slidably displaced while the left sliding member 2430 is stopped to rotate. A third drive state can be formed in which the rotation of member 435 continues due to its inertia.

As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to dispose a drive motor that imparts driving force to the left slide member 2430 to rotate the rotating member 435 . However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (slide displacing) the left slide member 2430 becomes large. there was a point

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the second driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435 can be formed by the rotation driving motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410. can. That is, since it is not necessary to provide the left slide member 2430 with a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be reduced accordingly. can.

In addition, the rotation transmission member 2485 having the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, thereby transmitting the left rotation. If the meshing between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, the gears cannot be meshed when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the gears are meshed. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not mesh due to collision.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, since the transmission gear 2437a is formed with the bulging portion 2437a2, the side surface area of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the disengaged second drive state to the engaged first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 can be easily inserted between the teeth of the transmission gear 2437a. can.

In addition, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed to gradually decrease toward the rear side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the gradually decreasing inclined surface. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 in the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to perform meshing smoothly when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is meshed.

In addition, it is preferable that the axial center of the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment is formed on the plane of the front surfaces of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first driving state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates to switch from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are prevented from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, a slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated and a state in which they are not rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480. As shown in FIG.

The main body base member 3480 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a projecting plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side of the game board) on the lower surface side, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on the one longitudinal direction side (the right side of the game board). is set. On the other hand, the projecting plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side is formed with an insertion hole 3481c penetrating therethrough in the vertical direction.

The housing member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed into a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge toward the front side of the game machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433 and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

In addition, the housing member 3490 is formed such that the outer shape in a front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 . Accordingly, the housing member 3490 can be arranged inside the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 .

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the projecting wall 3491 on the lower side of the housing member 3490 . On the other hand, a protruding wall 3491 on the upper side of the housing member 3490 is formed with a through hole 3491a penetrating vertically.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the housing member 3490 in order to fasten the housing member 3490 to the shaft of the telescopic cylinder 3495, which will be described later. formed to have a smaller diameter than the diameter of the

The cylinder 3495 is a member that causes the housing member 3490 to slide up and down when driven. is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of the .

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 in a state in which its shaft portion is inserted through the insertion hole 3481c formed in the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 . Also, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the projecting plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480 .

Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft of the cylinder 3495 is displaced up and down, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced up and down. That is, the housing member 3490 can be vertically displaced with respect to the main body base member 3480 .

Next, operation of the housing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 75(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 3400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. is displaced to disengage the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 from the transmission gear 437a. 76(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 76(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of slide unit 3400 along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, part of the housing member 3490 and part of the main body base member 3480 are shown with dashed lines for easy understanding. Also, transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the housing member 3490 is positioned upward, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the projecting plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a mesh with each other while being arranged in a sufficiently secured state.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides relative to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for rotating the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, when the housing member 3490 is positioned downward, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is smaller than the distance dimension L1, and the main body is arranged. A state is formed in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged (distance L1>L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides relative to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a does not rotate because the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, even if the left sliding member 430 is displaced, it is possible to form a configuration in which the rotating member 435 does not rotate.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430; is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; A third drive state can be formed in which the rotation of 435 continues due to its inertia. As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. It is possible to switch between the first driving state and the second driving state.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

That is, when the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 while being out of phase, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other, and the transmission gear 437a is engaged while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, so that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phase, and meshing can be performed smoothly.

Next, a slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 has been described. 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated and a state in which they are not rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge. . A left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that imparts rotational driving force to the rotating member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that imparts rotational driving force to the rotating member 455 are formed on the bottom side of the projecting plate portion 411 .

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is positioned on the left side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. In addition, notch portions 4413a are formed by notching the tooth flanks of left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 at both end portions and the central portion thereof. Further, the tooth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout 4413a has a small tooth portion 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the tooth not adjacent to the cutout 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is positioned on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Also, at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414, notch portions 4414a are formed by notching the tooth flanks. Further, the tooth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch 4414a is provided with a small tooth 4414b having a smaller profile than the non-adjacent tooth.

Next, referring to FIG. 78, the operation of slide unit 4400 will be described. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 78(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic front view of the slide unit 4400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and transmission gear 437a are disengaged. In addition, in FIG. 78, part of the base member 4410 is illustrated with a dashed line for easy understanding. Also, transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates leftward. A state of meshing with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a A state in which engagement with the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is released is formed.

That is, until the transmission gear 437a reaches the cutout portion 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 where the teeth are missing, the rotation member 435 can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430. . On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 where the teeth are missing, the left slide member 430 is stopped from sliding, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is controlled by its inertia force. can be continued by

Therefore, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the rotating member 435 rotates with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430. is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; A third drive state can be formed in which the rotation of 435 continues due to its inertia. As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is performed by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for releasing the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with a small tooth portion 4413b, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the cutout portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a collide with the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the notch 4413a, and are easily damaged.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a mesh smoothly when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 without the small tooth portion 4413b, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, if the phase of rotation with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a There is a possibility that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 will be meshed and cannot be meshed.

In this case, when the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase with each other, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are formed to have a smaller outer shape than the other teeth. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a abut against each other, it is possible to suppress the meshing of the teeth and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

Next, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of left slide member 5430. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. 5450 is switched between a state in which rotating members 5435 and 5455 are rotated and a state in which rotating members 5435 and 5455 are not rotated with the sliding displacement. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment has a one-way clutch 5439 arranged on a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5435. As shown in FIGS.

The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b connected to a circular shaft hole 5437f1 penetrating the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and cam surfaces of the inner ring 5439c. a plurality of rollers 5439d arranged in the roller 5439d, a holder 5439e holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the holder 5439e and switching the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface. .

The switching plate 5439a is formed with a sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating therethrough in the shape of an elongated hole, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding toward the front side of the displacement member 5436, which will be described later, is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. .

Next, referring to FIG. 81, the operation of one-way clutch 5439 will be described. FIG. 81(a) is a schematic front view of the left slide member 5430 before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81(b) is a left slide member 5430 after the switching plate 5439a is operated. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a slide member 5430 viewed from the front; In addition, in FIG. 81, the drawing is simplified for easy understanding, and part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 are illustrated by dashed lines.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), when the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. caught in a wedge formed between As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437 a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81(b), when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 5435, the position of the projecting portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 shifts to the position of the rotation member 5435 along with the displacement. is displaced with respect to This switches the switching plate 5439a.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is placed in a neutral position on the cam surface and away from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437 a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 .

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, the one-way clutch 5439 can form a state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left sliding member 5430, and a sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430. is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the left sliding member 5430 is slid while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating; By changing the state of 5439 from allowing the transmission of rotation to the state of blocking it, a third drive state is formed in which the rotation of rotating member 5435 is continued by its inertial force while left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

Therefore, a first drive state, a second drive state and a third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left sliding member 5430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition to the motion (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435, the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined, so the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can serve both the role of effecting by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of left slide member 6430. FIG. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. 6450 is switched between a state in which rotating members 5435 and 5455 are rotated and a state in which rotating members 5435 and 5455 are rotated as left slide member 6430 and right slide member 6450 are slid and displaced by one-way clutch 5439 switching. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. be.

A through-hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 of a transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5437, and a sliding groove 5439a1 of a switching plate 5439a connected to an operator 6438 described later. be.

The manipulator 6438 is formed in a vertically elongated rod-like body that is rectangular when viewed from the front. The manipulator 6438 has a connecting pin 6438a projecting forward at its lower end, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the central portion in the vertical direction.

The through-hole 6438b is a hole through which an insertion pin 6434a2 projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear side of the rear side base member 434a is inserted, and is formed with a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through-hole 6438b of the manipulator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the manipulator 6438 moves through the through-hole 6438b. is arranged on the rear surface of the rear side base member 434a in a rotatable state about the axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and has an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the connecting pin 6438a of the manipulator 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439 and the manipulator 6438 rotates about the through-hole 6438b, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes to change the position of the one-way clutch. A switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the rear side base member 434a, and the other end is locked to the manipulator 6438. As shown in FIG. As a result, the manipulator 6438 is always urged in the clockwise rotation direction about the through hole 6438b as viewed from the front. As a result, when no external force is applied to the manipulator 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in a driven state (a state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435).

Next, operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG.

FIG. 84(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 6400 in the state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84(b) is the slide unit in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. 6400 is a schematic diagram of the front view. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84(a), and FIG. 85(b) is a cross-sectional view of slide unit 6400 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In addition, in FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operating element 6438 are illustrated with broken lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the sliding end portion of the left slide member 6430. .

As shown in FIGS. 84( a ) and 85 ( a ), when no external force is applied to the manipulator 6438 , the longitudinal direction of the manipulator 6438 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434 . is placed in

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is located at the end of the cam surface and engages a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437 a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84(b) and 85(b), the left slide member 6430 is slid and the other end of the manipulator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 is pulled just before the end of the slide displacement. The right side surface of the side (upper side) in front view contacts the projection 6411a of the base member 6410 .

After the side surface of the manipulator 6438 abuts against the base member 6410, when the left slide member 6430 moves further to the terminal end, the manipulator 6438 is displaced in the front view left rotation direction about the through hole 6438b.

Accordingly, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the manipulator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is placed in a neutral position on the cam surface and away from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, a state can be created in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437 a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 .

Therefore, by applying an external force to the manipulator 6438 according to the amount of displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state in which transmission of rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is permitted and a state in which transmission of rotation is blocked. can.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left sliding member 6430, and a sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430. When the one-way clutch 5439 stops the transmission of rotation, the one-way clutch 5439 changes from the state of allowing the transmission of rotation to the state of blocking it, so that the rotation of the rotation member 5435 continues due to its inertia force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left sliding member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430, there is no need to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. Accordingly, the weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 86, a slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. 7450 is switched between a state in which rotating members 5435 and 5455 are rotated and a state in which rotating members 5435 and 5455 are rotated with the sliding displacement of left slide member 7430 and right slide member 7450 by switching one-way clutch 5439 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, the rear surface of the base member 7410 is formed with a groove 7417 in which a second slide member 7460, which will be described later, is arranged.

The second slide member 7460 includes a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged facing the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and held by being sandwiched between the two plate members 7462. a roller 7465 arranged with the shaft portion 7463 inserted therethrough; and a driving gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. be.

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a gear tooth surface 7461a formed on the upper surface side. In addition, a locking hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed into a vertically long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The plate member 7462 has a vertically elongated sliding groove 7462a located on the side of the rack gear 7461, and a through hole 7462b extending in the front-rear direction above the sliding groove 7462a.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening with the rack gear 7461 . The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) through the through-hole 7462b and fastening the screw to the stop hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461 .

The shaft portion 7463 is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the slide groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and has an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the slide groove 7462a. In addition, the axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461 .

As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is sandwiched and held between the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction because the sliding groove 7462a is elongated in the vertical direction. .

The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape, and a shaft hole extending through the roller in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the shaft. The roller 7465 is arranged between the two plate members 7462 with the shaft portion 7463 inserted through the shaft hole.

The drive gear 7464 is a member that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a drive force to slide the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466, which will be described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461 and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467 .

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can slide in the left-right direction.

In addition, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged in front is decorated (indicating a pattern or the like) on the plane arranged on the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 slides from a position overlapping the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to a position not overlapping the left slide member 7430, thereby making the decorative surface visible to the player.

Next, state transitions of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 to 89 are schematic diagrams of the slide unit 7400 viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the operator 6438 before displacement, the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. 6434a2 is different only in that no biasing spring is arranged between them, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation of one-way clutch 5439 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 87-89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(a), before the left slide member 7430 slides, the connecting pin 6438a of the manipulator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b in the left-right direction. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is located at the end of the cam surface and engages a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437 a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435 .

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced until the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 contacts the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87(b)), the left slide member 7430 is displaced. With the displacement of , the rotating member 5435 can be rotated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the manipulator 6438 contacts the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 contacts the side surface above the axial center of the roller 7465. abut. Therefore, since the other end (upper end) of the manipulator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displaces the roller 7465 downward while biasing the manipulator. 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b.

As shown in FIG. 88( a ), when the manipulator 6438 is rotated to a position where the longitudinal direction of the manipulator 6438 substantially coincides with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 moves to the roller 7465 . contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller 7465 .

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the operation element 6438 can be rotated about the through hole 6438b while urging the roller 7465 rightward by the slide displacement.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the manipulator 6438 is arranged in a state tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the manipulator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. be done.

Accordingly, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the manipulator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is placed at the neutral position of the cam surface and separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, a state can be created in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437 a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435 .

Further, when the other end (upper end) of the manipulator 6438 is rotated to the left tilted state, the other end (upper end) of the manipulator 6438 comes into contact with the side surface below the axial center of the roller 7465 . touch. Therefore, since the other end (upper end) of the manipulator 6438 is tilted to the left, further sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 can urge the roller 7465 upward.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, the roller 7465 is positioned above the manipulator 6438 , so that the manipulator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465 . Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89(b).

Further, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is positioned on the right side of the roller 7465 is in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 blocks rotation transmission as described above, so that the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is on the left side of the roller 7465. The rotational inertia force of the rotating member 5435 when slidingly displaced allows the rotation to continue.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the manipulator 6438 according to the amount of displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of rotation is interrupted. can.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left sliding member 7430, and a displacement of the left sliding member 7430 In the stopped state, a third drive state can be formed in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued due to its inertial force.

Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left sliding member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third drive state (for example, waiting until the inertial force stops acting), the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not applied to the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435. A second driving state can be formed in which the left sliding member 7430 is slid while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Therefore, a first drive state, a second drive state, and a third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left sliding member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. . As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430, there is no need to dispose a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. Accordingly, the weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the second slide member 7460 is arranged displaceably along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, so that the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is The position that is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the permitted state to the restricted state can be changed. As a result, the position at which the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and the position at which the rotating member 5435 is rotated while the left slide member 7430 is stopped from being slid can be determined. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition to the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430, the second sliding member 7460 can also be slidably displaced. Since the role of effecting and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are shared, there is no need to separately provide means for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 . Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the second slide member 7460 is arranged displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, so that the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from a state in which the second slide member 7460 is arranged in one of the left and right directions of the left slide member 7430, in a state where the left slide member 7430 is stopped, the second slide member 7460 is moved in one of the left and right directions. By displacing it, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without causing the left slide member 7430 to be slid, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435. A first driving state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates, and a second driving state in which the left sliding member 7430 slides while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating because the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is not applied to the rotating motion of the rotating member 5435 . Two driving states can be formed.

Next, a slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and a slide rod arranged on the base member 8410. Mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 8430 along the slide bar member 420. .

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. A protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410 , and a base-side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 .

The base-side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear that extends along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and meshes with the first-side pinion gear 432 and the second-side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430.

The left slide member 8430 includes a horizontally long rectangular first member 8431 when viewed from the front, a vertically long base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431 when viewed from the front, and a first slide member 8431 rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. A second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably disposed on the second member 8433, and a third side rack gear 8445a with which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed. , and a horizontally long base member 8446 that is rectangular in front view and hangs from the third member 8445 .

The first member 8431 has a slide hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. , the sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420 .

The first side pinion gear 432 meshes with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 . Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably disposed on the first member 8431, and is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 by inserting the sliding rod member 420 into the sliding hole at the upper end. , is slidable along the sliding bar member 420 .

In this case, the second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 8433 . Therefore, the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 .

Also, the second side pinion gear 8433 d meshes with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 . Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second pinion gear 8433d is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably disposed on the second member 8433, and is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433 by inserting the sliding rod member 420 into the sliding hole at the upper end. , is slidable along the sliding bar member 420 .

In this case, the third side rack gear 8445a is engraved on the lower surface of the third member 8445 . Also, the third side rack gear 8445a meshes with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is rotated by the action of the second side pinion gear 8433d. Relatively displaced with respect to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, A driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 8431. can be done.

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, A driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 can be slid with respect to the base member 8410 while being accelerated relative to the second member 8433. can be done.

Next, the operation of slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. 93(a) to 93(c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, and illustrate transition states when the left slide member 8430 is slidably displaced. 94(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 along the line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), and FIG. 94(b) is a cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93(b). FIG. 94(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 along line XCIVc-XCIVc of FIG. 93(c). Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93(a) and 94(a), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the retracted position, the second member 8433 is arranged inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 A third member 8445 is disposed inside the .

In this case, the base member 8434 hanging from the second member 8433 is positioned in front of the base member 8431b hanging from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is arranged in front of the base member 8434. be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 slide, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can slide without interference. . In addition, the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 can be suppressed and the size can be reduced.

Furthermore, the effect area K (the base member 8410 in FIG. and the left side of the base member 8446) can be secured.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left The left driving gear 471 meshing with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 433a are arranged facing each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 in a state of meshing with both of the rack gears 412 is interposed, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 are interposed. 433a, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the first member 8431 and the first side pinion gear 433a. A driving force associated with movement can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 8431. can be done.

As a result, the time required for sliding the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the rendering area K (covered state) or retreating from the rendering area K (open state) is shortened. Switching between state and open state can be done quickly.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412 have teeth. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d that is pivotally supported by the second member 8433 in a combined state is interposed, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 have Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. can be given. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 can be slid with respect to the base member 8410 while being accelerated relative to the second member 8433. can be done.

As a result, the second member 8433 can slide relative to the first member 8431 as shown in FIG. 93(b). Also, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433 .

As a result, the time required to slide the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the rendering area K (covered state) or retract from the rendering area K (open state) is shortened, Switching between state and open state can be done quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the overhang position, the second member 8433 partially overlaps with the inside of the first member 8431. and the third member 8445 protrudes from the inside of the second member 8433 while leaving a partial overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the left side surface of the base member 8431b hanging down from the first member 8431 and the right side surface of the base member 8434 hanging down from the second member 8433 are substantially aligned in the front-rear direction. placed in the same position. In addition, the left side surface of the base member 8434 hanging from the second member 8433 and the right side surface of the base member 8446 hanging from the third member 8445 are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. be.

That is, no gap is formed with the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged over the entire rendering area K. FIG.

Next, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of left slide member 9430. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 hangs down from the second member 433 has been described. A base member 9434 is provided that depends from. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 provided on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and a slide rod provided on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably connected to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 includes a horizontally long rectangular first member 8431 when viewed from the front, a base member 9431b which is vertically long when viewed from the front and suspended from the first member 8431, and a first slide member 8431 rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. A second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed. 9434, a slide rail 9443 disposed on the base member 9434, a vertically elongated base member 9446 connected to the slide rail 9443, and a filamentous wire 9444 that is freely deformable. consists of

The first member 8431 has a slide hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section, and the slide rod member 420 is inserted through the slide hole. , the sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420 .

The base member 9431b has a recessed groove recessed from the rear side on the left side surface of the upper end when viewed from the front. formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably disposed on the first member 8431, and is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 by inserting the sliding rod member 420 into the sliding hole at the upper end. , is slidable along the sliding bar member 420 .

In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433. , the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 can be slid with respect to the base member 8410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 8431. can be done.

A notch 9434c is formed in the base member 9434 by notching the right side of the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. In addition, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the upper end of the base member 9434 so that its expansion/contraction direction extends in the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444, which will be described later, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431. As shown in FIG.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed of two plates that are slidably displaceable from each other. In addition, the slide rail 9443 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) inside, and is biased in the direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The base member 9437 is arranged slidably with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back side thereof to the slide rail 9443 .

The base member 9437 has a recessed groove recessed from the back side on the right side surface of the upper end in front view, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a extending vertically is formed inside the recessed groove. be done. In addition, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431 in the vertical direction.

The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 as the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 are displaced, and is made of piano wire, fishing line, or the like. The wire 9444 has one end connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member and the other end connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533 . In addition, the wire 9444 has a connection path that connects one end and the other end thereof and is positioned between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. is arranged in a state in which a part thereof is in contact with the side surface of the (see FIG. 9).

Next, operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, illustrating transition states when the left slide member 9430 is slidably displaced. 98(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), and FIG. 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of slide unit 9400 along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97(b). FIG. 98(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97(c). Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 98(a), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are positioned at different positions in the front-rear direction. placed in Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced without interfering with each other. The space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, and miniaturization can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the retracted position, the base member 9446 is moved leftward with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 . Although a sliding force acts, the wire 9444 connects the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434. The leftward sliding displacement of the 9446 with respect to the base member 9434 can be suppressed.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is set to the sum of the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension in the thickness direction of the base members 9431b, 9434, and 9446. 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can maintain a state in which they overlap in the front-rear direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and the left pinion gear is rotated. The left driving gear 471 connected with 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is engaged with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. is provided, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433 . As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 can be slid with respect to the base member 8410 while being accelerated relative to the first member 8431. can be done.

As a result, the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 are slidably displaced to the rendering area K (covered state) or retracted from the rendering area K (open state). Switching between state and open state can be done quickly.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions shifted in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension in the longitudinal direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9(a) to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9(b).

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the length of overlap between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3>L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 by the looseness of the wire 9444 . As a result, when the base member 9431 b is slid relative to the base member 8410 , the base member 9446 can be slid relative to the base member 9434 while being accelerated relative to the base member 9434 .

As a result, the time required for sliding the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the rendering area K (covered state) or retracting from the rendering area K (open state) is shortened. The open state can be switched quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the extended position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b and the right side surface of the base member 9434 when viewed from the front. The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same positions in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left side surface of the base member 9434 and the right side surface of the base member 9446 in front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed with the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged over the entire rendering area K. FIG.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9446 can be slid by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, so the third member 8445 is arranged above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. you don't have to. Therefore, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be reduced to the extent that the third member 8445 is not arranged, and the space for arranging the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. can be planned.

Next, an elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the lifting unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99(a) is a front view of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 10800, and FIG. 99(c) is a side view of the lifting unit 10800. is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 10800. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the movable units (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 800) provided in the operation unit 200 are disconnected from each other at the combined (overhanging) position. , in the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and lifting unit 10800) provided in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, an elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed with an elevating member 10820 arranged on a base member 810 so as to be able to ascend and descend. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 protruding to the rear side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to protrude from the rear side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 when the operation unit 200 is displaced to the combined state. It is formed to protrude from the back side of 10820 . The engaging portion 10822 is set such that its horizontal dimension is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 . It is formed in a state of protruding to the rear side. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the engaging portion 10822 can be brought into contact (see FIG. 102(a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 has a rectangular through-hole 10822a that protrudes from the back side of the lifting member 10820 and penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through-hole 10822a is a member into which the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is inserted, and is formed as an opening larger than the tip of the protruding member 735 in top view. As a result, when the operation unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the distal end of the protruding member 735 can be inserted through the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102(b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is an operation unit 10200 in a combined state, FIG. 102(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 taken along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 taken along line CIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotation members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the sides of the engaging portion 10822 of the lift unit 10800 (lift member 10820) of the operation unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102(a)).

In addition, the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension decreases toward the lower side when viewed from the rear. That is, the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99(b)) of the engaging portion 10822 are inclined toward the center in the left and right direction as they go downward.

Further, as described above, the projecting member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 . In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the rear side of the protruding member 735 so that the projection distance increases downward, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to contact each other. .

Therefore, the lifting unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 can be brought into contact (connected) by the engaging portion 10822, so that each movable unit (lifting unit 10800, slide It is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

Also, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 .

More specifically, the driving motor 891 that drives the lifting member 10820 is repeatedly caused to reciprocate with a relatively small rotational drive, so that the lifting member 10820 is vertically displaced (vibrates) by a relatively small distance.

In this case, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are in contact with the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99(b)) of the engaging portion 10822, so that the left and right side surfaces are inclined. The side that abuts on the joining portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200 .

In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are in the united (overhanging) position, the center of gravity of the rotating members 435 and 455 imparts a rotational moment in a direction that displaces the side abutting against the engaging portion 10822 inward in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 . . Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can contact the engaging portion 10822 again due to the rotational moment. As a result, the lifting member 10820 is cyclically and repeatedly displaced, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be cyclically and repeatedly displaced.

On the other hand, the inclined portion 10735a of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 abuts against the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. Therefore, when the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, the inclined portion 10735 The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of . Therefore, the distance by which the projecting member 735 is pushed forward (to the left in FIG. 102(b)) is periodically displaced by the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is cyclically and repeatedly displaced, so that the projecting member 735 can be cyclically and repeatedly displaced. Therefore, since it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763, 475, 476, the driving energy can be suppressed.

That is, at the united (overhanging) position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are provided with an elevating member 10820 formed so as to be able to contact the rotating members 435 and 455. The elevating member 10820 is formed to be capable of periodic displacement, The cyclical displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be used to cyclically displace the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 . In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect. . Further, in this case, the cyclic displacement of the lifting member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing them into contact with each other. No need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are separated from each other (not in contact with each other), they can be periodically displaced by the elevating member 10820 without being affected by each other. can. That is, the periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 can be easily transmitted to the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, respectively.

Further, rotating member 730 and rotating members 435 and 455 may be unrelated and periodically displaced (oscillated) differently from one another. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the lifting member 10820, they vibrate in different manners. Therefore, the portion formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 of one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably disposed with respect to the base members 434 and 454, periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 causes rotation in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis. The rotating member 730 can be configured to periodically repeat the operation of being rotated forward and backward due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735 .

In addition, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the displaceable (vibrating) driving source, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the protruding member 735 is connected to the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force for displacing (vibrating) the protruding member 735 is transmitted through the rotating members 435 and 455. In the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the displacing (vibrating) driving source, so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Furthermore, the lifting member 10820 is arranged at a position in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the longitudinal direction at the combined (overhanging) position, so that it is arranged on the side closer to the player. The lifting member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated with the lifting member 10820 on the front side, which is easily visible to the player, as a vibration source, it is possible to perform an effect that easily conveys the force of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107. FIG.

First, the driver 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment when the driving body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the driver 761 in the positioned position;

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving body 761 is arranged such that the interposing member 733 descends as the driving body 761 rotates to displace the protruding member 735 to the overhanging position (the state of protruding from the rotating member 730). 761b is formed, but in the eleventh embodiment, the intervening member 733 is formed along with the rotation of the driving body 11761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the overhanging position (the state protruded from the rotating member 730). A cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to rise. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is moved to the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the contacting cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam contacts the sliding wall 733c when the driving body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) at the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and is formed such that the cam diameter increases continuously from position P1 toward position P2.

Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposing member 733) changes from the lowest position to the highest position when the drive member 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the bottom to the top.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b is increased to the maximum diameter position P2, and the intervening member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. As a result, the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, the displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and lifting unit 800) is displaced to the combined state will be described. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. FIGS. 104 to 107 sequentially illustrate displacement states when the movable units are displaced to the combined (extended) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710 . In the second action, the projecting unit 11700 continues its action from the first action, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated by about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swing member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the action unit 200 in the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the space formed in the central portion of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state. That is, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state and increase the amount of extension during the extension operation.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the first action is to displace the projecting unit 11700 . As shown in FIG. 105, the projection unit 11700 is displaced in the first operation by sliding the elevation base 720 with respect to the base member 710 . As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. A detailed description of the displacement of the lifting base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lift unit 800. FIG. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430, 450 (base members 434, 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 is elevated with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member 820 of the elevation unit 800 is moved to the base. It is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the member 810 . In addition, in the third state, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730 .

Also, in this case, the tip of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is at a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730 . Therefore, until the rotating member 11730 is arranged at the combined (overhanging position), the swinging member 732 is maintained in the vicinity of the rotating member 11730, so that the rotating member 11730 rotates during the displacement to the combined position. Interference of the members 435 and 455 with the swinging member 732 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (elevating member 820, rotating members 435, 455, and rotating member 11730) is formed, thereby enhancing the rendering effect.

Furthermore, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is in a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 can be increased. 455 can be made large. Therefore, each member (rotating members 435, 455, lifting base 11720 (rotating member 11730), and lifting member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and lifting unit 800) is combined to form a pattern (character ) can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operation unit (slide unit 400 and lifting unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 can displace the rocking member 732 as it is displaced.

Therefore, the distal end of the swinging member 732 can be raised in a direction away from the rotating member 11730 as the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 is displaced. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the united (extended) position, the leading end of the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730 so that the lifting member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730 The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment described above, in the slide unit 400, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) abuts (collides) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the left slide member 430 (first member 431 ) may be formed so as to abut on the base member 410 .

In this case, a contact portion is provided on the base member 410, and the contact portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left driving motor 475, variations in the control of the left drive motor 475, etc., the first member 431 The member is brought into contact (that is, the member to be contacted functions as a stopper that restricts the displacement of the left slide member 430). By bringing the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the member to be contacted, the impact at the time of contact is weakened and damage to both members is suppressed. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), which is the contact target (the member with which the first member 431 contacts) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), Although the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), it is not necessarily limited to this. The contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) should have at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact target may be rotational motion or motion along a curve.

In this way, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is displaced. , the parallel displacement component described above can cause the abutting object to retreat (releasing), and the cushioning effect can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displacing the abutment target in the direction opposite to the abutment, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the above-described parallel displacement component, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( operation to start sliding displacement from a stopped state).

Note that the abutment target need not be driven by the drive means. Instead of being driven by the driving means, or in addition to being driven by the driving means, it is formed so as to be biased by a biasing means (elastic material such as rubber or urethane, springs such as coil springs or torsion springs, etc.). Also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with the left slide member 430 (the first member 431), by elastically deforming the biasing means, the above-described cushioning action can be exhibited, and the elastic recovery force can By pushing back the left slide member 430 (the first member 431), the initial movement of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are arranged substantially at the same time in the overhanging position, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first placed at the extended position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is placed at the extended position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 contacts the stopped upper contact portion 533). contact). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the change (decrease) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the abutment target weakens the impact at the time of abutment (collision), so that the rebound is reduced. can be suppressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the upper displacement member that is the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (the target with which the lower displacement member 640 contacts (combines) at the overhang position). Although the case where 530 is displaceable has been described, this is not necessarily the case, and the contact target may be stopped (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the change (decrease) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the abutment target weakens the impact at the time of abutment (collision), so that the rebound is reduced. can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, in the lower combined unit 600, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhang position is the overhang rotation position. It is not limited.

For example, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position may be the vertical rotational position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is defined as the overhanging position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed so as to abut against the upper displacement member 530 at the overhanging position. can be

Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position may be set to a rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 may rotate 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). rotated position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to a rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the overhanging position of the lower displacement member 640. It may be formed so as to abut against 530 .

In any of these configurations, the change (decrease) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the abutment target weakens the impact at the time of abutment (collision), thereby suppressing rebound.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower combined unit 600 has been described. good. As another structure, for example, a cylindrical guide pin is protruded from the rear surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the rear surface of the position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin can slide is formed. A structure that displaces the lower displacement member 640 between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove is exemplified.

In the case of such a structure, of the displacement (velocity) components of the lower displacement member 640, at least the component in the direction toward the abutment target (the target with which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (merges) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set so as to decrease at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the change (decrease) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the abutment target weakens the impact at the time of abutment (collision) and suppresses rebound. can do.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, only the lower combined unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed such that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead or in addition to this, the upper combined unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be. In this case, the upper combined unit 500 may be arranged by upside down the lower combined unit 600 .

In the above-described first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the driving state (supplied power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant). ) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. speed). For example, the electric power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the component in the direction toward the opponent among the speed components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the vicinity of the overhanging position is reduced. A form of reducing the displacement speed of rack member 520 and the rotational speed of drive arm 630 is exemplified. It should be noted that either one of the drive motors 543 and 672 or both of them may be the target for which the power supply is reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposing member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 contact each other is the rotation of the driving body 761 when viewed from the front. Although the case of being positioned on a vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), it is not necessarily limited to this. It may be set at a position spaced apart from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 are arranged so that the driving body 761 is rotated in the direction of rotation for raising the protruding member 735 . When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the protruding member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the direction of rotation that raises the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733. It is preferable that the weight of the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 . This is because the load on the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weight of the swinging member 732 , the interposing member 733 and the protruding member 735 .

In the first embodiment described above, in the projecting unit 700, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of this predetermined range is preferably set corresponding to the angle required for the slide pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 of the slide hole 735b of the protruding member 735. As shown in FIG. The timing at which the swinging member 732 starts to be displaced can be matched with the timing at which the protruding member 735 starts to be displaced, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projection unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 and the projection member 735 has an upward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravitational) direction, the other It has a displacement (velocity) component in the downward direction, and while one of the rocking member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (gravitational force) component. ) direction upward displacement (velocity) component to equalize the load on the drive motor 763, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , and the shape of the protrusion member 735 at the slide hole 735b (the distance from the center of rotation of the driving body 761) may be combined to make the load of the drive motor 763 uniform.

That is, in a region where the load required for the cam portion 761b to act on the slide wall 733c is relatively large, the load required for the slide pin 761c to act on the slide hole 735b is relatively large. The shape of the slide hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small. The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to act on the moving wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively small.

In the first embodiment described above, in the projecting unit 700, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (downwardly slidingly displacing) the projecting member 735, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may act as a biasing force in the direction of raising (upward sliding displacement) the protruding member 735 . In this case, due to the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 of the slide hole 735b described above, the initial speed of the protruding member 735 when it is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment, the transmission gear 2437a in the slide unit 2400 has the toothed portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with bulging portions with gradually reduced tooth thickness. Also in this case, similarly to the second embodiment, it is possible to perform meshing smoothly when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is meshed.

Further, the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with bulging portions on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction. In this case, since the gears that mesh when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state are formed with bulging portions, the first drive state that meshes from the disengaged second drive state is formed. The state can be switched more smoothly.

In this case, by forming bulging portions with gradually decreasing tooth thickness on both sides of the meshing gear, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments, in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400, when the left slide members 430, 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the game machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the game machine) , the case of shifting from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The second drive state may be changed to the first drive state when displaced to the central position of the game machine.

In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the cutouts 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small tooth portions formed in a small size to increase the rigidity. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the width of the teeth adjacent to the cutouts 4413a and 4414a may be increased to increase the rigidity.

Also in this case, similarly to the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment described above, in the slide unit 6400, the projection 6411a that displaces the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411. However, the projection 6411a is not necessarily limited to this. may be formed so as to be in contact with the manipulator 6438 . That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on any member on the displacement trajectory of the manipulator 6438. FIG.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the game machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the game machine) 2, the case of shifting from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The second drive state may be displaced to the first drive state when displaced from the second drive state to the extended position (position in the center of the game machine).

In the seventh embodiment described above, in the slide unit 7400, the roller 7465 that displaces the operator 6438 is arranged on the second slide member 7640. However, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. A roller 7645 is disposed on the base member 7410 to displace the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410, so that the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430. It can be.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the second member 8433 is positioned relative to the first member 8431. Although the distance of relative displacement and the distance of relative displacement of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, this is not necessarily the case. The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is formed smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, and the distance by which the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. They may be formed with different distances.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide units 8400 and 9400, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432 and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slid to the rendering area K, the rendering area Although the case where K is invisible has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. , it may be made of a light-transmissive material so that part or all of the rendering area K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the left side surfaces of the base members 8431b and 9431b in front view and the right side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 in front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. , and the left side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 and the right side surfaces of the base members 8446 and 9446 are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. The left side surfaces of the members 8431b and 9431b in front view and the right side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 may overlap in the front-rear direction. The right side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 in the front view may overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment described above, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 abut against each other is controlled and sized. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both are closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the united position, they may constantly collide with each other.

In this case, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by causing the displacement to collide with the swinging member, so that the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotary members 435 and 455 are displaced along with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the drive transmission paths from the drive motors 475 and 476 are lengthened. Therefore, although it takes a long time to transmit the stopping motion of the drive motors 475 and 476, by bringing the rotating members 435 and 455 into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacement motion, the rotating members 435 and 455 quickly stop at the combined (overhanging) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used to Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436, 456 arranged on the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated in the opposite direction to the first embodiment. can be overhanging.

In this case, the second members 436, 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720) move up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the elevation unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (overhanging) position, the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (lifting base 720) are separated. Although the case where they are arranged in the state has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arranged in a state of being in contact with each other. . In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 11730 are arranged in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the united position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

In the first embodiment described above, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. , the case of absorbing the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the rocking member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elevation base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710 .

In this case, the rotary member 730 is connected to a transmission path for transmitting a driving force for rotating it with respect to the elevation base 720 . By rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with the same force, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when the rotating members 435 and 455 come into contact with the swinging member 732 .

In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, the rotating member 435 is at least part of the contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. Although it is arranged on the front side, the rotary member 435 is not necessarily limited to this. may be arranged in a manner to cover the front side of the Alternatively, it may be arranged on the front side of the area exceeding this.

In this case, the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be made invisible to the player by the rotation member 435, so that the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 can be combined into one pattern. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize it as. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second presentation mode and thus losing interest.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central region of the game board 13, and a first winning port 64 is provided below it. Further, in the area on the right side of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as the right side area) where the ball shot so as to jump over the variable display unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flows down, a through gate 66 is provided. A second prize winning port 140 and an open state associated with the second prize winning port 140 in which a ball can enter the second prize winning port 140 and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. an electric accessory 140a, a specific prize winning port 65a, an open state associated with the specific prize winning port 65a in which a ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state. A variable prize winning device 65 is provided which is variable between and.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example having the game board 13 configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, and based on the lottery result. The variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81 . Then, when the variably displayed third symbol is stop-displayed in a predetermined stop-display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (privilege game) advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). , is called a right-handed game), and the ball is entered into the specific winning hole 65 a of the variable winning device 65 . When one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so the player can win many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal game state, which is a game state in which the big win game is not executed, a game is performed in which the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64, and in the big win game state in which the big win game is executed, the variable is a right-handed game. The winning device 65 is aimed. Therefore, by varying the area from which the ball is shot according to the game state, the player can be made to feel that he/she is playing the game.

Further, the variable prize winning device 65, which is opened during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability variable switch 65e3 through which a ball entering the specific prize winning port 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, but the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which a ball can pass. It is configured to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Then, by passing the ball through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variable game state (hereinafter referred to as the probability variable state) is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends. ) is given.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right area unit (not shown) into which balls that are shot in a right-handed game and pass through a through gate 66 provided in the right area of the game board 13 flow in. there is The right area unit is provided with a cloon formed with three discharge holes through which the balls can pass as a distribution means for distributing the balls that have flowed into a plurality of paths. A ball that has passed through one of the three ejection holes formed in the croon flows down the first path and is led to the second winning opening 140 . Balls that do not enter the second winning hole 140 are guided to a specific general winning hole (not shown) provided downstream of the first path. On the other hand, balls that have passed through the other two discharge holes out of the three discharge holes formed in the croon flow down the second route and are guided to the variable winning device 65 . Balls that do not enter the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 are discharged from the second path as they are, pass through the first out hole 71, and are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, for example, a ball that can enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific general winning hole and a ball that can enter the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 are generated at the same time during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to complicate the flow of the balls during the jackpot game, which has the effect of improving the amusement of the game. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that prize balls are paid out for balls entering the second prize winning port 140 or the specific general prize winning port, it is possible to receive prize balls for balls entering a plurality of prize winning ports during the jackpot game. Since it is possible, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that the player can obtain during the big win, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Furthermore, an effect may be executed based on the balls that enter the specific general winning slot during the jackpot game. It is preferable to perform the production based on this. In this case, the number of balls entering the specific general winning opening can be increased in the case of a long winning jackpot (a jackpot with a large number of rounds, or a jackpot in which it is difficult to win the specific winning opening 65a). There is an effect that a privilege can be given to the player even if a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a occurs during the jackpot game.

In addition, during a period during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, that is, during a period in which the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state (opening period, interval period, or ending period), the ball enters the specific general winning opening. It may be configured such that an effect is executed based on the entry of the ball. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to continuously shoot balls during the jackpot game, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the operation of the gaming machine.

As described above, in addition to the effect based on the ball entering the specific general winning hole during the jackpot game, the effect (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning hole during the jackpot game. For example, by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot game, a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that can enter the specific general winning opening at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3 to 1) In the case where a distribution member for distributing balls is provided, if it is determined that the balls did not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game or one round game during the jackpot game, that fact may be notified. As a result, it is possible to quickly discover a case where a jackpot game is not executed by a normal right-handed game, or an abnormality in various devices (distribution member, etc.) provided on the game board 13 .

In addition, a sphere can pass through the path of the sphere that has flowed into the right area unit (not shown) until it reaches the kurun as falling position changing means for making the position where the sphere lands on the kurun indeterminate. A moving member having a path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate within a predetermined range (approximately 5 cm) in the left-right direction of the game board 13 (left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) by a motor (not shown). It is possible to vary the position to be discharged (the position to drop into the clone). Thus, by providing the moving member, which is the falling position changing means, above the cloon, which is the distribution means, it is possible to complicate the movement of the ball on the cloon. It should be noted that the moving speed of the moving member described above is preferably set to such a speed that, when the continuously shot balls fall on the Kroon, the falling positions are separated from each other by 10 mm or more. By setting in this way, it is possible to suppress damage to the apparatus due to collision and rebounding of the balls continuously falling on the Kroon. Furthermore, even if the distance between the cloon and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball that falls first and the ball that falls later interfere with each other and cause ball clogging. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a Krun-shaped mechanism is used as the distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as the ball can be distributed to a plurality of paths. It is also possible to use a channel switching member that switches the flow direction of the ball, or a switching member that electrically switches the channel of the ball. Furthermore, in this control example, the moving member is used as the drop position changing means so that the ball drops onto the krun does not stay at a fixed position. The configuration may be such that the crew itself is moved.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, when the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-described probability variable state is entered, and on the other hand, the variable prize winning device during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 at 65, the normal game state aiming at the first winning hole 64 is entered.

Here, in the variable probability state in this control example, as described above, the probability that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win is high, and the lottery that the normal symbol that the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 66 is a win. The probability is set to be high. Furthermore, the time until the lottery results of the special symbols and normal symbols are determined (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal game state. Further, the variable probability state in this control example is set so as to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times in a row after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times. It is set so as to shift from the probability variable state to the normal game state after consecutively hitting other than the jackpot. In this way, by setting a limit on the period in which the variable probability state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win a big win, and the interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the period during which the variable probability state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed. A shift lottery may be performed to shift the variable probability state to the normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period during which a probability change state continues with time.

Furthermore, in the probability variable state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a that is driven to open when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed by the ball passing through the through gate 66 is the normal game state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the variable probability state is more likely than the opening pattern set during the normal game state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which it is possible to enter the ball is long.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to execute a right-handed game in the variable probability state, and to efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning hole. It is Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the variable probability state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

<Regarding the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of this variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the variable winning device 65 is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. It has an arranged LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open/close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g protrude into the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear surface cover body 65j arranged on the rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a rear surface of the rear surface cover body 65j. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. there is

109 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 109(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 109(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 109(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110(b).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter due to an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism which can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning hole 65a.

By configuring in this way, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning port 140 side. is configured to Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately after the big hit game, the game method is changed to left-handed. It can reduce the time and effort required to make changes. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 109(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 109(b). As shown in FIG. 109(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 110, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 110(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 110(a), the game ball guided into the sorting channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by a variable probability switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a high probability game state (variable probability game state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing the variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h has a configuration for distributing the game state after the jackpot to a low-probability game state (normal game state) or a probability variable game state.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Also, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the winning game ball of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. there is Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variable grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantage and disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 110(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 110(b) shows a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player wins in the 13th round in a state in which the game ball that won before the 13th round is not discharged, and wins even if the jackpot B is the variable probability switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, 15 balls for each winning ball). prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 111(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 111(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big win B", a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. In addition, if it is a "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, a combination of predetermined main symbols indicating a small win (for example, on the activated line L1, the combination of the main symbols is "3", "4" in order from the left symbol row Z1). "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the first winning hole 64, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Further, in this control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to differ depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, when the same reference numerals are given in the description of each effect to be described later, it indicates that the display or area has the same function, and the place (display form) where the display or area is arranged is different. will be described with the same reference numerals.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the display mode of the effect executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the ready-to-navigation effect executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol. ) and FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect display mode of the reach-navi effect. This reach-navi effect enables the player to visually grasp the progress of the aspect of the effect (main effect) executed according to a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach), and notifies or suggests step by step. It is a production (sub-production). In this way, by displaying the contents of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (explanation of the effect of the main effect, fluctuation time, and the degree of expectation for the big win) using the sub-effect, the player can It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Next, referring to FIG. 112(a), the reach-navi effect will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 112(a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected on the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. It is reduced to the small area Dm5 and variably displayed, and the main effect based on the variability pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, a reach-navi effect, which is a secondary effect, is executed in a small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

In this small area Dm4, as images constituting the reach-navi effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, a character Dm4b as a movement display portion visually indicating the progress of the main effect, and the main effect A notification portion Dm4c for informing at least part of the effect result, and guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e for guiding at least part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is a moving display portion, advances from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint in FIG. A notification part Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a. appears stopped. In this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as the period display section for indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, but other displays may be used. The process of creating a product or dish) may be displayed.

The character Dm4b is a movement display portion that moves according to the progress of the main effect, and is displayed to move from the left side to the right side of the viewpoint in FIG. 112 on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed. In this way, by moving the character Dm4b on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed, the player can predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. In the diagram shown in FIG. 112(a), only an image imitating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b. The length of the time gauge Dm4a and the selected character are set based on the length of the selected main effect (length of variable time).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying the sub effects in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of variation patterns (main effects) with different variation times. The degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect executed by changing the display mode (for example, color) of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display part, and the effect associated with the character is a big hit. may be indicated, or the display mode of the selected character may be used to indicate where the main effect will proceed. As a result, it is possible to have both the function of notifying the progress of the main effect and the function of suggesting the result of the main effect, and it is possible to execute the effect display with high effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the effect result of the main effect, and a rotating display (see FIG. 112(b)) that rotates in the horizontal direction is performed on the small area Dm4. The notification part Dm4c is configured to be able to display an index indicating the effect result of the main effect on both sides thereof. is reported.

In the pachinko machine 10, as indicators for notifying the result of the main effect, the indicator "V" indicating the big hit, the index "x" indicating the failure, and the main effect "Development", which is an index indicating that the production will continue to be executed, and "?", which is an index indicating that the production result of the main production is not notified, are set. An indicator is selected, and the one indicator (for example, "V") is displayed on one side of the notification part Dm4c, and another indicator (eg, "?") is displayed on the other side.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the notification part Dm4c is rotated and displayed with the "V" indicator and the "X" indicator displayed on both sides of the notification part Dm4c, the character Dm4b is notified. When the part Dm4c is reached, it is notified in advance that there will be no further development, that is, to grasp in advance the production time of the main production this time (variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main production). Therefore, it is possible to display main effects that are easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the notification part Dm4c is rotated and displayed in a state where the indicator of "V" and the indicator of "development" are displayed on both sides of the notification part Dm4c, the jackpot is won when the character Dm4b reaches the notification part Dm4c. or the main effect will develop further from there. You can watch the main performance with peace of mind.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which a plurality of indicators are rotated and displayed so that the player can comprehend them. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of indicators are switched and displayed in the notification part Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indicators are displayed in the notification part Dm4c at the same time, and the indicator desired to be selected in the present effect is deleted over time is used. can be

The guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, a guide display suggesting the content of the current main performance is executed. When the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the characters "Chance" are displayed or rotated to indicate that the result of the current main effect is a big win. The indicator attached to the reporting unit Dm4c is switched. In this way, by providing the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle stage of the main effect, it is possible to notify the player of the information based on the result of the main effect step by step. In contrast, the display contents displayed by the third pattern display device 81 can be always observed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the guide display section, guide display suggesting the result of the main performance and guide display suggesting the period of the main performance can be notified at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the information notified to the player by the guide display section can be diversified. Although two guide display units are provided in the pachinko machine 10, one or three or more may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112(b) and FIGS. 113(a) to (c), a display mode at each timing of the above-described reach-navi effect will be described. FIG. 112(b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach-navi effect has started, and FIG. Fig. 113(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the reach-navi effect is further continued; is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of .

First, as shown in FIG. 112(b), when the reach-navi effect is executed, a moving display is executed in which the character Dm4b moves from left to right (from the start point to the end point) on the time gauge Dm4a. In addition, the notification unit Dm4c performs rotating display so that the player can visually recognize the indicators displayed on both sides thereof. By executing the reach-navi effect in this way, information on the effect period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the main effect is provided to the player in the middle of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance (before the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed).

Furthermore, in FIG. 112(b), the character Dm4b is displayed below the guidance display section Dm4d. ! ” is displayed. This is a display indicating the degree of expectation that the current special symbol lottery result will be a big win, and is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portion Dm4c as described above. In this way, by providing the guide display part Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to tell the player at what timing the display indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big win will be executed. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display contents of the index displayed on the notification section Dm4c at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e can be changed. As a result, for example, at the timing when the reach-navi effect was executed, two indicators of "V" and "X" were displayed in the notification unit Dm4c, but at the timing when the character Dm4b reached the guidance display unit Dm4d, It is possible to switch the indicator displayed in the notification part Dm4c to the display of two indicators of "V" and "development". In this way, by changing the display content of the notification unit Dm4c at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display unit Dm4d), it is possible to diversify the content of the reach-navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, and improve the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the case where the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach-navi effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 113(a), when the character Dm4b reaches the notification portion Dm4c, the rotating display of the notification portion Dm4c is stopped, and the indicator "?" Stop is displayed. When the "?" indicator is displayed, next, as shown in FIG. 113(b), an effect is executed in which the character Dm4b is flipped away and returned to the point where the guidance display section Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a is provided. be.

The indicator "?" displayed in the notification section Dm4c is an indicator that prevents the player from grasping whether the main effect ends at this timing or continues. After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b getting up. On the other hand, if the current main effect develops and continues, as shown in FIG. 113(c), the character Dm4b stands up and moves again on the time gauge Dm4a to execute the reach-navi effect. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (the display mode of the peripheral effects of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can understand that the reach-navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

Note that the position where the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113(b) is returned is determined based on the period of the main effect after development. Specifically, if the time required for the character Dm4b to move on the time gauge Dm4a and reach the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time for the main effect after development (the remaining period of the main effect is 10 seconds), the time It is returned to the middle position of the gauge Dm4a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the reach-navi effect corresponding to the main effect after development using the moving speed of the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b corresponding to the main effect before development, and the sub-effect It becomes possible to reduce the amount of data for executing a certain reach-navi effect.

Furthermore, it is possible for the player to predict the period of the main effect after development based on the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. Since this pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a long variable time is easily selected when a lottery of special symbols wins a big win, the more the character Dm4b is returned to a position closer to the starting point side of the time gauge Dm4a, the bigger the win. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won the prize, and that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the index displayed in the notification part Dm4c is "?", the player is not notified whether or not the main effect will develop this time, so the player is returned to the character Dm4b. After confirming the position (after predicting the duration of the effect when it develops), the player will pay attention to the effect of whether or not the character Dm4b will stand up. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the reach-navi production can be enhanced.

As described above, in the reach-navi effect used in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player in advance of information related to the main effect, which is the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. There is an effect that it is possible to make the main effect to be watched while predicting the progress destination of the main effect. In addition, by displaying the information about the main effect in stages, the player can continue to watch the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The reach-navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach-navigation effect used in this control example is one in which various other effects are displayed. For example, in the reach-navi effect described above, a rabbit-like character is used as the movement display unit, but other characters such as a turtle-like character and a human-like character can be displayed. When selecting a character to be used in this reach-navi effect from among a plurality of characters in this way, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content of the main effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the display contents of the main effect and the sub-effect related to each other, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the character is displayed in the reach-navi effect, which is the sub-effect, before the character is displayed in the main effect. As a result, the content of the main production can be grasped in advance by watching the reach-navi production, and there is an effect that the production effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, the movement speed of the character Dm4b in the reach-navi effect executed corresponding to the pre-development main effect may be different from the movement speed of the character Dm4b in the reach-navi effect executed corresponding to the post-development main effect. . As a result, the period of the main effect after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, so that the effect period of the main effect after development is easily grasped. has the effect of being able to suppress

Also, the degree of expectation for development of the main effect may be indicated by the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, an area with a high development expectation and a low development expectation area are provided on the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b is returned to the high development expectation area, the main effect is developed with a high probability. good. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position to which the character Dm4b is returned, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203 It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit. In addition, this first hit random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special symbols The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for the high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a high probability game state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9" It is determined whether there is any, and if it is one of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. Also, when the game state is the normal game state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "9".

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number that becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "0" is for low probability. is stored in the first hit random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are duplicate values. You may set a random value for each jackpot so that it does not become. If there is a value that is always used as a random number value for a big win regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be input from the outside, making it easier to illegally assign a big win. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), by changing the random number value to be a big win, a special symbol big win is achieved. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, in this first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is any one of "0 to 29" is "jackpot A". Also, when the random number is any one of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of types is not limited to two. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. ” (for example, the range of 90-99) and “Completely out of reach” (for example, the range of 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203. Stored in area 203a. When the ball wins the second winning hole 140, it is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time lag, long-time lag, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" are defined. As fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice ramp control device 113, and a more detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main controller 110 The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process in this control example, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol win is set by a normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If the winning random number value matches the winning random number set by the winning random number table, it is determined as a winning of the normal design. In addition, this random number table per normal design is for normal design low probability (normal state of normal design) and high probability of normal design hit than low probability (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. In this control example, the normal symbols are set to a high probability in accordance with the timing when the special symbols shift to the high probability state, and the normal symbols are also set to a low probability in accordance with the timing when the special symbols shift to the low probability state. It is stipulated that In other words, there is no game state in which special symbols have a low probability and normal symbols have a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24 among the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second prize winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the normal symbols are won, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time. " is opened, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high, there are 200 random numbers for normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. Thus, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of winning random numbers is 200 out of 240 random numbers, so the probability of winning normal symbols is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, compared with when the probability of the normal pattern is low, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore, the second winning opening 140 Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is activated only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. Although it is opened, the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 129).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

Next, contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG.

FIG. 115(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 115(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. there is

Here, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a). FIG. 116(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) is, as described above, a table in which values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

This first hit random number table 202a contains a jackpot determination value (jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot when the probability of a special symbol is low, and a special symbol when the probability of a special symbol is high. A jackpot determination value (high-probability jackpot determination value) for determining whether or not a jackpot is provided, and the number of jackpot determination values (random numbers) is different. In this way, by varying the number of determination values (random numbers) that result in a big hit, the probability of a big hit is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116(b), the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 116(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first win type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116(b)) is set so that the jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected in correspondence with the types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). It is Specifically, in the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 "0 to 49" is set as the judgment value of the big hit A, and "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the big hit B, and in the special pattern 2, the big hit As the determination value of A, the value (0 to 99) of the first winning type counter C2 is set.

Here, as described above, the "jackpot A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 (that is, it is determined whether or not it is in the variable probability state ), but in the “jackpot B”, it is configured to be impossible (or difficult) to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 (that is, it is not determined whether or not the variable probability state is reached).

Furthermore, the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 are stipulated so that the sorting of the jackpot types is different, and in the special pattern 1, the ratio of selecting the "jackpot A" among the jackpots is 50%, and in the special pattern 2, the jackpot. It is configured such that the "jackpot A" is selected 100%. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which a lottery is executed when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 as described above. A lottery is executed in a variable probability state in which the ball is likely to enter the prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加In this control example, when the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times without a big hit after shifting to the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the normal game state, so the state is shifted to the variable probability state. After that, it is possible to repeatedly execute the game in the variable probability state by continuing to win the jackpot again until the lottery of the special symbols is performed 100 times. Therefore, even after shifting to the variable probability state, the player will play the game enthusiastically to win the next big win as soon as possible, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 116(c). FIG. 116(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state of the normal design), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of , it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device (not shown) is completed, the symbol "○" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). Along with being displayed, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second prize winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, referring to FIG. 117, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117(b)), a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117(c)), At least a deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117(d)) is defined.

With reference to FIG. 117(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 117(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 117(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description continues. FIG. 115(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 115(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, variable probability It has at least a valid flag 203q, a variable probability valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a variable probability counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the winning is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special pattern 2 reserved first area to fourth area). These areas store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 ( The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning hole 140 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203e reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 122).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding fluctuation display in the first special design N1) or the value of the special design 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding fluctuation display in the first special design N2) is , is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122, and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. be.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the main control device It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 66. is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 126: No).

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability game state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, it is set to OFF based on the fact that the variable probability counter 203t is set to ON. The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

It should be noted that, when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h may be formally set to ON for recovery. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example) during the jackpot game. . In addition, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s, which will be described later. This probability variation passing counter 203i is updated by adding 1 each time the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 135). It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (see S1403 in FIG. 134) ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203j) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variable passage counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for timing (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round for the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round for the jackpot B. set. In the action counter 203k, for the jackpot A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds, and for the jackpot B, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this control example, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal"). In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S1302 of the notification processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 133). When the notification counter 203m becomes 0, the notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.

With this configuration, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can see the third pattern display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, details will be described later, but in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to urge the player to look at the third pattern display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the channel solenoid 65k is activated, and when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order for the player to continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (the flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 is controlled by the player. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the 12th round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to look at the third symbol display device 81 during the interval display. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by announcing that the third symbol display device 81 is shown. By notifying that the player's hand is held over the device 65, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, it is also possible to divert the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds to notify the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the maximum time (five seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the action of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distraction effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined depending on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed in one round, and the abnormality processing to be described later can be executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter of

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the winning game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged from the variable winning device 65 is 2 seconds. is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match ( S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to inform early that game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the 13th round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, resulting in a big hit B. Also, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3. Since this remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round starts, the next round game is executed and a new game is played before the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value. No winning will occur.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Probability variation effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON, based on the passage solenoid 65k being ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally entered the specific winning hole 65a to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. time has not elapsed. That is, it indicates that it is a period in which it is possible for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3.

The variable probability effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this control example, it takes 1 second for the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as erroneous detection of passage by a magnetic sensor using radio waves or the like.

The ejection number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. This ejection number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of winning game balls and the ejection number of the variable winning device 65 are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The variable probability counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the variable probability state. This probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is ON at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when performing the special symbol lottery. (S213 in FIG. 123), and 1 is subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (S221 in FIG. 122).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (decorating parts 29 to 33, decorative lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable production (fluctuation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, other devices 228, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for game control. .

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, reach out, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table for selecting effect information used in the reach-navi effect described with reference to FIGS. Details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table used for setting a reach navigation effect to be executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach-navi effect will be briefly explained. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach-navi effect is an effect that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (the effect executed in the center of the main display area Dm). See) is a secondary production that is executed. This reach-navi effect includes a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the effect period of the main effect, a moving display portion (character Dm4b) that indicates the degree of progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification portion Dm4c that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. This is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

The reach-navi effect described above is set so that the character Dm4b can move a plurality of times on the time gauge Dm4a. set as a performance. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured so that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b. By combining the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, It is configured so that various production patterns can be set.

The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119(b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected for the remaining variation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed after 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, so if super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol , When the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining time when selecting the first navigation effect The variation time is 60 seconds.

Then, if the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "100 to 199", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect. Further, if the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "70 to 199", the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect.

In this way, by making it possible to select production patterns of different times in the first navigation production, it is possible to change the remaining fluctuation time when selecting the second navigation production described later, so that the production pattern of the reach navigation production can be set more complex. Furthermore, when the special reach with high expectation that the lottery of the special design wins the big hit is set as the variation pattern of the special design (when the remaining variation time is 60 seconds), when the super reach is set Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the ratio of setting the variation pattern of 30 seconds as the first navigation effect is higher than (when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds), the player can By looking at the progress of the production navigation, will this change develop into a special reach? You can play the game while predicting that.

In the first navigation effect, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used, and by changing the movement speed of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display portion, a 20-second effect pattern and a 30-second effect pattern are set. making it possible. Specifically, in the production pattern for 30 seconds, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b, and in the production pattern for 20 seconds, a character imitating a rabbit is set. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the movement speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set a plurality of performance patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of the reach-navigation performance. be able to.

Further, in this control example, as described above, the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display section, is changed according to the movement speed on the time gauge Dm4a. Although it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big win can be predicted, the same character may be used with different moving speeds. By configuring in this way, only the player who has experienced the reach-navigation effect a plurality of times can understand that the movement speed of the character in the current reach-navigation effect is different from the movement speed of the character in the previous reach-navigation effect. , there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced for the player who has been playing the game for a long time.

Furthermore, in this control example, the movement speed of the character Dm4b is set so as not to be changed during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. Note that the movement speed of the character Dm4b may be changed during the first navigation effect without being limited to this. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining variation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and is the remaining time storage area 223h. The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected based on the residual variation time stored in , and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(c), when the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, that is, super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols, and furthermore, 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. When the effect pattern of seconds is selected, the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, so "2nd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. This second time means that the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c provided at the end point of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113(a)), and then the character Dm4b moves again on the time gauge Dm4a. This indicates that the effect will start (see FIG. 113(b)). In addition, in this control example, it is configured such that up to the third moving effect can be set.

Next, when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols, and further, the 30-second effect pattern is selected in the first navigation effect. , if the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, 3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect. "2nd time 20 seconds, 3rd time 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "7 to 9", "2nd time 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect.

Then, when the remaining variation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols, and further, when the 20-second effect pattern is selected in the first navigation effect, If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, 3rd time 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation effect is selected. "2nd time 20 seconds, 3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect, and if it is "7 to 9", "2nd time 30 seconds, 3rd time 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect.

As described above, when setting a production pattern for a reach-navi production, by dividing the production period into the first navigation production and the second navigation production and making it selectable, a complicated production pattern can be easily created. can be done. Further, in this control example, when selecting the effect pattern of the second navigation effect, only the value of the last digit of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. As a result, it is possible to independently select a plurality of performance patterns within one process using one performance counter, so that the processing load when setting the performance patterns can be reduced. has the effect of

Returning to FIG. 118, the description is continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). As shown in FIG. 118(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop At least a type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and other memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 138). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Detailed description is omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (see S1902 in FIG. 140). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1602) of the main processing (see FIG. 137), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 199 used for notice effects and various lotteries. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of rounds executed in the big winning game. This round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining fluctuation time referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the reach-navi effect. In the remaining time storage area 223h, when the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, a variable time based on the acquired variation pattern is set (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is displayed. It is updated to the remaining fluctuation time after setting (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when setting of the reach-navi effect is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using the remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol by dividing it into a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, first, information indicating that the remaining variation time is 60 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having a effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds as the first effect. Then, when the effect pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the effect pattern of the first effect, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining variation time. After that, it is possible to select the second effect using the remaining period based on the remaining fluctuation time. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing when selecting the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

The variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach-navi effect in which the variation pattern is selected step by step. In the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the variation pattern is set (S2101 in FIG. 141) and selected. An effect pattern for the first navigation effect is set (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then an effect pattern for the selected second navigation effect is set (S2106 in FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81, etc., and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third pattern display ( It controls the variable performance) and the notice performance.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113 , and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 via a bus line 240 . there is A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (not shown) transmitted from the MPU 231, and stores the frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variable image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player moves to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 with a fluctuation effect when a ball entry is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, back A corresponding to the "town stage", back B corresponding to the "sky stage", back C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third pattern display devices. 81 is horizontally longer than the display area displayed in 81, and the image controller 237 displays the image on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the rear image horizontally from left to right. is drawn. As a result, the rear images are scroll-displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a smooth manner.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 5) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140, the third symbol display device 81 fluctuates even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. A display data table corresponding to display related to commands, round effects, and demonstration effects is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the normal pattern starting port 66, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased, and the chances of winning the normal pattern are also increased. . Therefore, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 140, and the special symbol lottery can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second prize winning port 140 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the second prize winning port 140, a normal pattern jackpot is generated, and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. As it becomes easier to enter 140, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one each of display data tables corresponding to the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this example of control, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list, which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. is described. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list, which will be described later, is created, and the transfer data From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. , the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2911 in FIG. 111(b) S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 123(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 124) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list, which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list, which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list describing the contents of image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing of V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 111(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. , acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and creates the transfer data information. Add to list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 111(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting display areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) in which character designs and point designs are prohibited from being displayed during the period in which the character designs and point designs are displayed in the point effect. . In the point effect, the periods in which the character pattern and the point pattern are displayed are set a total of three times, so the first to third prohibited areas are set according to each period (first period to third period). A storage area 223m is provided. As a result, a different prohibited area can be set for each period, thereby increasing variations in presentation.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 135. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 399, 99, and 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is reserved) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LEDs are lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Also, if the jackpot is B, the red LED is lit, and if it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, set the opening scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the start of the jackpot (16 rounds, etc.) setting) is executed (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221). Then, when the processing of S218 or the processing of S221 described above is completed, a stop command is set (S219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S302).

If the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, if the current probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and a special value for high probability Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol hit is a jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers set in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)). As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but they may be different random numbers. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if the current probability variation state is not (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability gaming state), so based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116(a)), A lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big win indicating a big win is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A or jackpot B). Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined based on the current number of held balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command is generated for notifying the audio ramp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern. When this process ends, it returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing the holding process of the values when there is

When the starting winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first winning port 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as in the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 140, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S407: No), then the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 125, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role accompanying the second winning opening 140 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

In the normal symbol variation process (125, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is performed while the second symbol display device displays the winning. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 116(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 116(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614: Yes), the present time is during the special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second winning port 140 The opening period of the electric accessory 140a associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the opening period of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second prize winning port 140 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has passed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S620 or S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 125, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 128, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S913, S914) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 129), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) and the start winning process (see FIG. 124). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, ending command, notification command, and error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is executed (S905). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S525 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or S517 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) has ended, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B ends the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S306, S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 123), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal pattern variation processing (see FIG. 125). do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 127 has been executed, so the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S912), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S98 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Here, with reference to FIG. 131, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot action setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1101. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the process of S1102, the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and the operation of the open/close door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the round number command is set (S1105), and this process is terminated. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has started is set as the round number command. Each time a round number command is received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the current round number can be grasped by adding the round number command. This has the effect of reducing the amount of command data output from main controller 110 . The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information of a newly started round may be set. By doing so, even if a problem occurs in the data related to the number of rounds on the sound lamp control device 113 side (the stored data is erased due to a power failure or the like), the latest data is updated each time a new round is started. round information can be received, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 130, the description continues. In the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the variable probability solenoid 65k (S1006). When it is determined that it is time to operate the variable probability solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the variable probability solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1006, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this control example), which is the time for throwing the ball, elapses. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the variable probability solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability solenoid 65k is set to OFF just in case in the processing of S1009. In this control example, the timing of starting the ending effect is after the waiting time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the end of the game of the final round (the open/close door 65f1 is closed), but the end of the game of the final round is set. You may perform ending production immediately after doing. In this case, the abnormal process for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

Details of this ending process (S1010) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is on (S1202). In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1202: Yes), the probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 (S1203), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and this process ends.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON, and if it is ON, 100 is set to the variable probability counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set the probability variation by determining whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to the variable probability game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the variable probability game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

Returning to FIG. 130, the description continues. In the process of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), the notification process is executed (S1011). Details of the notification process (S1011) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the content of this notification process (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the 12th round (S1305). The end timing of the 12th round is determined by detecting that 10 balls have won a prize in the 12th round or determining that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the 12th round (S1305: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of 12 rounds, and the voice prompting to look at the liquid crystal is heard. output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is recognized, It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the 13th round from one second before the end of the interval time. May run continuously.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), the notification command is set. (S1304). After that, this process ends. With this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the audio output of "look at the liquid crystal".

In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 130, the description continues. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round valid period (S1401). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is issued. set. After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). After that, the process of S1408 is executed. Since the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411). The variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1414). The variable probability effective flag 203q is set to ON (S1415). After that, this process ends. Here, when the probability variable effective flag 203q is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, when the gaming balls remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 pass the probability variable switch 65e3, the probability variable You can control how the game is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203q is ON (S1416). When the variable probability effective flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203q is ON (S1416: Yes), the variable probability effective timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer is the upper limit (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the variable probability valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1418: Yes), the variable probability valid flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419). The variable probability effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball blowing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 130, the description continues. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, an abnormality process is executed (S1013). After that, this process ends. Here, details of this abnormality processing (S1013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the content of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality process (S1013), a process of monitoring whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the ejection number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (three seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variable passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegality such that the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65 and the game ball is passed through the probability variable switch 65e3 even if it is a big hit B.例文帳に追加

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1716 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), it executes power-off processing in S1716. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1714 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up process was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1714. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), it will transfer to S1604 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1716 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during execution of the power-off process in S1716, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1606). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the decoration lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1716 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), an interrupt Permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), interrupt permission is set Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1609 is skipped is that when the process of S1608 is reached from S1604 via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1702 to S1811 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1712 and the command determination process of S1711 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the decoration lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 . In addition, it also monitors the input whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third pattern display device 81 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1709, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set.

After completing the processing of S1710, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In the process of S1712, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 138, S1711), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1807). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1808). In addition, in the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1808. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the processing of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S1807, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the big win has been received (S1809). In the processing of S1809, when it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809: Yes), the jackpot-related processing is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the jackpot related process (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received, the process proceeds to S1811 as it is.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to

If it is determined by the processing of S1811 that the notification command output from the main controller 110 has been received, the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected. , set the display command for notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot-related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the jackpot related process (S1810). This jackpot-related process (S1810) is a process executed when it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 138).

In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1901). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S1902), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1702) of the main processing (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display opening command is received, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S1903). In the processing of S1903, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). After that, a round number command for display is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and this processing ends.

In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1906). In the process of S1906, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1906: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this process is executed. finish.

In the processing of S1906, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S1909). In the process of S1909, if it is determined that the V passing command is received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, and the probability variation gaming state is given. A V effect command for display is set (S1910), and the process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2001: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2007. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). In the processing of S2004, when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004: Yes), then reach navigation effect setting processing is executed (S2005). Details of this reach-navi effect setting process (S2005) will be described later with reference to FIG. It is a process for setting a reach-navi effect (secondary effect) that guides the main variable effect (main effect) executed in .

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the acquired variation pattern type is not a variation pattern type corresponding to Super Reach or Special Reach, that is, if the acquired variation pattern type is out or a variation pattern type corresponding to Normal Reach (S2004 : No), based on the obtained variation pattern type, generate a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114, and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S2006). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the above-described reach-navi effect setting process (S2005) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing this reach-navi effect setting process (S2005). In this reach-navi effect setting process (S2005), the player is guided to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the obtained variation pattern type and the effect contents (expectation level, effect period) of the main effect. A sub-effect to be performed is set.

When the reach-navi effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, It is set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2101). Here, the main effect is a effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 112 See) is a production that is executed in the central part.

After the processing of S2101 is completed, the remaining time storage area 223h is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S2102). In this reach-navi effect setting process (S2005), a process of setting the sub-effect in stages based on the variation time corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern acquired this time is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this process. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time of 90 seconds) corresponding to special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this process.

Although not shown, in this control example, the timing at which the reach-navi effect (secondary effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of the variation, so the variation pattern type with a variation time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds are set in the area 223h, a process of subtracting 30 seconds, which is the secondary effect non-executable period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. Based on the value, the first navigation effect period is set, and based on the set first navigation effect period, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. to update the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i. Specifically, when the first navigation effect is selected, if the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "80", the first "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the effect pattern information corresponding to the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i.

After completing the processing of S2103, the remaining variable time in the remaining time storage area 223h is then updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining variation time for which the reach-navi effect, which is the secondary effect, should be set is calculated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect period of "30 seconds" is selected in a state where "60 seconds" is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h, the remaining time storage area 223h is displayed in this process. is updated to "30 seconds".

Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variable time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105). The setting is completed, and the process proceeds to S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining variable time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period during which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach-navi effect is performed only with the first navigation effect. will be set. Specifically, the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time of 60 seconds) corresponding to super reach, and "30 seconds" is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h. This corresponds to the case where the first navigation effect period “30 seconds” is selected in .

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the remaining variable time in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation effect is selected from the second navigation effect selection table, and the variation pattern is determined. Update to temporary storage area. This second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119(c). Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the second navigation effect is selected, the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds, and the value of the last digit of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". If so, the effect pattern information of "2nd time 10 seconds" and "3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period "30 seconds", and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

Thus, the second navigation effect is configured to generate the effect pattern using the remaining variation time after setting the first navigation effect. Therefore, rather than collectively setting a production pattern for all periods in which the reach-navigation production can be set, the period in which the reach-navigation production can be set is divided into a first navigation production period and a second navigation production period, and each production pattern is set. By combining after setting , it is possible to diversify the production pattern of the reach-navi production, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored.

In this control example, the period in which the reach-navi effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and other periods, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not use the entire remaining variation period, and the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h after the process of S2016 is executed. is 0 (S2105). As a result, it is possible to set the reach-navigation effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time after setting the second navigation effect by the same process as the process of setting the second navigation effect, thereby simplifying the process.

Returning to FIG. 141, the description continues. If it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 in the process of S2105 (S2105: No) or if the process of S2106 is finished, then the variation pattern for display is displayed based on the information in the variation pattern temporary storage area. A command is set (S2107). Here, as the information stored in the variation pattern temporary storage area, the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the processing of S2101, the sub-effect The display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the processing of S2103 that constitutes the reach navigation effect, and the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the processing of S2106. It becomes a display variation pattern command.

When the process of S2107 is completed, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information on the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this process is completed. .

In this control example, the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 executed based on the acquired variation pattern and the sub-effect are set as one display variation pattern command and output. Although the configuration for reducing the number of commands is used, the main performance variation pattern command for display and the sub performance variation pattern command for display may be output as separate commands. As a result, for example, the display control device 114 can display the main effect on the layer on the back side of the third pattern display device 81, and display the sub-effect on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed. By controlling in this way and operating the frame button 22 by the player, it is possible to easily execute control such as displaying or erasing the sub performance.

Furthermore, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to easily perform control such as outputting an additional command for the sub-effect and switching the effect pattern of the sub-effect while the main effect is being variably displayed. Specifically, during the period (30 seconds in this control example) from when the main effect is executed until when the secondary effect is executed, based on the operation content of the frame button 22 executed, It is possible to change the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) to be displayed and to change the content of the index displayed in the notification section Dm4c, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 142, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 143, the boot processing (S2201) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2201) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 142) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2301 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S2301. and the processing of S2302 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 142 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2203, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 154(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)) during that time, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are the images when the power is turned on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(a). FIG. 144(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(b). FIG. 144(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 144(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501). If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2502) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2504). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2503) or the simple display setting processing (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2505), , generates a drawing list, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and rear reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the second) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2501: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and the Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, the details of the command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2602). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2603).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern command for display (S2604), and if there is a variation pattern command for display (S2604: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605) and returns to the processing of S2601.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2605) will now be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other variations The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2705, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2704 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 145 . In the process of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2606), If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

Details of the stop type command process (S2607) will now be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S2801), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S2803), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2802. In the above-described task processing (S2504), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2803, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2801, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2802.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 145 . In the process of S2606, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608). If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, referring to FIGS. 147 to 149, the command determination processing (S2502, see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is one of the above-described display jackpot-related command processing (S2609). Details will be explained. First, FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing this display jackpot-related command process.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command ( S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

Details of the opening command process (S2902) will now be described with reference to FIG. 148(a). FIG. 148(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3005), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2903), and the If there is a round number command for use (S2903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Details of the round number command process (S2904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3102).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing is terminated, and the display jackpot related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description continues. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2905). If there is an ending command for (S2905: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

Details of the ending command process (S2906) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149(a) is a flow chart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, time data representing the performance time is set in the timer counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3205), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 147 . In the process of S2905, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and the command is displayed. If there is a V effect command for use (S2907: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S2908), and the jackpot related command processing for display ends.

Details of the V effect command process (S2908) will now be described with reference to FIG. 149(b). FIG. 149(b) is a flow chart showing V effect command processing. In this V effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the V effect command processing, first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command processing is terminated, and the display jackpot related command processing is returned to.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 147 . In the processing of S2907, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the display jackpot-related command processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description is continued. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and a back image change command is issued. If there is (S2610: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, with reference to FIG. 150(a), details of the back image change command process (S2611) will be described. FIG. 150(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3903) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3401). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3402), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3401 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3402. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if any of the back faces A to C is specified to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S3402 is used to determine the back face image discrimination flag. The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 145 . In the process of S2610, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2612). Otherwise (S2612: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

Details of the error command processing (S2613) will now be described with reference to FIG. 150(b). FIG. 150(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3502). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the error frame command processing, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3501, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the processing of S3502, and the error type is determined. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the corresponding warning image.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3502, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

In the process of S2601, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes ), and the processing of S2602 to S2613 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2601 to S2613 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary to display a power-on image (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command, are extracted from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 146(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S2701, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the details of the display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S3602 to S3604 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3602), S3603-S3604 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S3603, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3603). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3604).

Here, with reference to FIG. 152, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3701).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 151 . After the warning image setting process (S3604), or if it is determined in the process of S3603 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3603: No), then the process proceeds to S3605.

In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 153 . FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3801, it is then checked whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3803). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3805), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 151 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3606 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display. (S3609).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. (S3610), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3611). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON (S3614), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2504), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S3615, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3609, if the fixed display flag 233z is not ON but OFF (S3609: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S3616). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the table buffer 233d (S3617), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3618). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3621), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S3616, if the demonstration display flag 233y is ON (S3616: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is performed as it is. End and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the details of the transfer setting process (S2505), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 154(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S3902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3901, that is, if it is turned off (S3901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S3902), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 154(b). FIG. 154(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4001). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4002). In the processing of S4002, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4002 that the transfer process has not ended (S4002: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4003. Also, as a result of the processing of S4001, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4003). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S4003, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the previously executed display setting process (S2503) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4103), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

Also, in the processing of S4102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S4102: No), the processing of S4103 and S4104 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4106).

In the process of S4106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4106 that the transfer process has not ended (S4106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to S4107. Also, as a result of the process of S4105, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4105: No), the process proceeds to S4107.

In the processing of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107). is turned off (S4108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S4107: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4109). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S4109: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag that is in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4111). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S4113, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S4113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The determination in the process of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4113 (S4113: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4114). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S4114, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2504) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), a drawing list is generated (S4201). That is, in the processing of S4201, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2504). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S4202, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4203). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 144(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. FIG. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine in which the reach-navi effect is executed as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect progresses by the operation of continuously pressing (hitting) the frame button 22 and the operation of pressing the frame button 22 with good timing. and a continuous slot effect for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this control example), in which the pseudo symbols displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 are stopped by pressing the frame button 22. A predetermined value (points) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a point performance is executed in which a specific performance (ready-to-win performance) is executed by accumulating a predetermined number of the points. As a result, it is possible to provide various effects to the player, prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game, and improve the interest of the player.

In this second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference is that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Here, among the effects executed in this control example, the composite pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the compound pressing effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of the time point reached, FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of the time point when the composite pressing effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1, and FIG. 158(b) FIG. 159(a) is a diagram showing another example at the point in time when the composite pressing effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1, and FIG. FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of a time when the composite pressing effect being executed reaches the second repeated hitting period Dc.

This composite pressing effect is a pressing effect in which three pressing effect periods are combined and displayed. An effect in which the meter of the meter display portion D1 displayed on the side is accumulated is executed. When a predetermined amount of meter is accumulated in the meter display portion D1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

When the compound pressing effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157(a), the pressing effect corresponding to the first repeated hitting period is executed. The third symbol display device 81 displays the above-described meter display portion D1, a button display D2 prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding the compound pressing effect. A comment field is displayed in the lower area of the main display area Dm to guide the contents of the effect by characters.

The meter display section D1 is a display section that finally displays the effect result of the compound pressing effect, and is controlled so that the meter accumulates based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each pressing effect (see FIG. 157(b)). . Then, the comment "fill up the meter" is displayed on the meter display portion D1 as a comment for prompting the player to participate in the game. This meter display part D1 displays "V" at the right end of the meter at the initial stage, and when the meter accumulates up to "V", the player wins a jackpot with a special symbol as a benefit that is advantageous to the player. is reported. Further, the meter area of the meter display portion D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the composite pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159(a)). As shown in FIG. 159(a), when the meter area is extended, "VV" is displayed at the right end of the meter area. It is notified that a prize (winning a jackpot) will be given.

Note that the privilege provided by the multiple pressing effect is not limited to the contents described above. Value information (points) may be given. Also, the display mode indicated by "V" and "VV" is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the conditions for awarding the privilege to the player are displayed so as to be visually recognizable. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage for the benefits granted when reaching "V" and the benefits granted when reaching "VV", and it is set so that different benefits are granted. Just do it.

The button display D2 is a display unit for notifying the player of the operation content of the frame button 22, and is a schematic display for making the frame button 22 repeatedly hit during the first repeated hit period shown in FIG. 157(a). A display and a comment of "Consecutive hits!!" are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the state of operation of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the button display blinks. When the player operates the frame button 22, the display is changed to a non-emphasized display by shrinking or erasing. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive display of the game guidance to the player. Furthermore, when the player does not operate the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the button display D2 may be changed to a non-emphasized display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button from being highlighted continuously, and to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

The effect gauge D3 is a display unit that shows the overall flow of the compound pressing effect. it's shown. This effect gauge D3 is divided into a first repeated hitting period Da, a timing pressing period Db1, and a second repeated hitting period Dc in the order in which the pressing effect is executed. is configured so that the player can grasp the situation. In this way, in the composite pressing effect in which the pressing effects with different operation methods of the frame buttons 22 are successively executed, the entirety of the combined pressing effect and the status of each pressing effect are displayed so that the player can grasp them. It is possible to execute a production that is easy for a person to understand.

Further, since the moving object D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the period of the entire compound pressing effect based on the movement status of the moving object D3a. .

Further, in the effect gauge D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first repeated hitting period Da. This effect notification timing D3b notifies in advance of the contents of the pressing effect to be executed during the timing pressing period Db1 which is executed after the first repeated hitting period Da has passed. When the moving body D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the multiple pressing effect, guidance of the pressing effect to be executed in the next pressing effect period is displayed in the comment column described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation caused by suddenly changing the state of the pressing effect (operation contents of the frame button operation 22) during the compound pressing effect. It should be noted that it is also possible to determine the state of operation of the frame button 22 by the player at the time when this effect notification timing D3b is reached, and set the effect mode for the next depression effect period.

In the comment column provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the composite pressing effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157(a), a comment is displayed that reads, "By pressing the button for a long time, automatic continuous tapping will be executed." Auto repeated hitting means that the frame button 22 is simulated to be repeatedly hit by the player performing a predetermined operation (long-pressing operation for two seconds or more) during the depression effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22. Control processing. By executing this automatic repeated hitting, even a player who has difficulty in pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times can enjoy the repeated hitting effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157(b), the case where the composite pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described. When the composite pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1, which is the next pressing effect period, is started while continuing the pressing effect of the first repeated hitting period Da. Specifically, a timing gauge Db2 is displayed in the main display area Dm by extending the area of the timing pressing period Db1, and the target to be aimed at by the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge. Then, in the comment column, "Aim at the center of the x mark and press the button..." is displayed as part of the game guidance for the timing pressing period Db1, which is the next pressing effect period.

The timing gauge Db2 displays the same period as the timing pressing period Db1 by extending it. Therefore, the moving body D3a is displayed to move on the timing gauge Db2 in the same time as the moving body D3a moves on the timing pressing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, it is possible to set the moving speed of the moving object D3a faster than the moving speed of the moving object D3a on the production gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying one of a plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, it is possible to vary the moving speed of the moving object D3a. By configuring in this way, when performing a display informing the player of the period of the compound pressing effect using the effect gauge D3 and the moving body D3a moving on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the performance of the timing display without giving a sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 at the time when the effect notification timing D3b is reached, it becomes possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing push effect to be executed this time, and it is possible to easily determine the timing. There is

In FIG. 157(b), the target Db3 for which the frame button is operated in the timing press effect is displayed in the center of the timing gauge Db2. You may enable it to set the difficulty level of production|presentation. Also, the target Db3 may move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of targets Db3 may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158(a) and 158(b), the case where the composite pressing effect reaches the timing pressing effect period will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the automatic continuous hitting is not executed when the timing pressing effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158(a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts to move rightward from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. As described above, the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the area of the timing push period Db1 is extended. The time required to do so is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158(a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length approximately eight times longer than the timing push period Db1, the speed of the moving object passing through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing push period Db1. The speed is approximately eight times the speed of the moving object D3a.

Also, the target Db3 indicating the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is blinking and highlighted in the timing pressing effect. Further, in the comment column, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed and a diagram schematically showing that the frame button 22 is pressed are displayed as a timing press effect.

On the other hand, FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic continuous hitting is being executed when the timing pressing effect period is reached. The difference from FIG. 158(a) described above is that the third symbol display device 81 displays a display indicating that the automatic continuous hitting is currently being performed, and a comment indicating the contents of the game displayed in the comment field is displayed. The only difference is that it has been changed to "talk". In other words, during the automatic repeated hits, the player cannot press the button in that state because the player has reached the timing press effect while pressing the button.

Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic repeated hits are being executed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing push effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment field is changed from "press". In addition to changing to "Let's go", the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing press effect is separated from the timing (timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) (the operation signal of the frame button 22). turn off). Thus, in the composite pressing effect, even if the timing pressing effect is executed in the state where the automatic repeated hitting operation is performed in the previous pressing effect (first repeated hitting effect Da), the effect is executed without hindering the player. can do.

158(a) or 158(b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving object D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158(a), 159(b), the moving object D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment column as shown in FIG. 159(a). A comment "Perfect!!" is displayed to notify that the frame button 22 has been well operated. Further, the meter display section D1 is extended and displayed as a privilege for successfully performing the timing pressing effect, and the fact is reported in the comment column.

Also at this timing, the moving object D3c on the production gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. As a result, while the timing gauge Db2 stops displaying the result of the timing pressing effect, the progress of the compound pressing effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3. Therefore, there is an effect that both the result of the timing pressing effect and the progress of the combined pressing effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159(b), the case where the timing pressing effect period Db1 has passed and the second consecutive hitting period Dc has been reached will be described. When the second repeated hitting period Dc is reached, a display for repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed in the same manner as in the first repeated hitting period. The difference from the display of the first repeated hit period is that the game result of the timing push effect is displayed in the area of the timing push period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the meter display section D1 shows the game result of the timing push effect. It is a point that it is in a state where the privilege based on is granted. Since other display contents are the same, description thereof is omitted.

Then, when the second repeated hitting period elapses, the composite pressing effect result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the present composite pressing effect is notified. As a result, the composite pressing effect ends. As described above, in the composite pressing effect of the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is operated by repeating the continuous pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 continuously, and the timing press is performed by operating the frame button 22 with good timing. It is set so that the operation timing and the pressing effect are continuously executed, and the result of the entire compound pressing effect is determined based on the result of each pressing effect. Therefore, since it is necessary to perform a plurality of types of frame button operations in order to obtain a satisfactory effect, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since it has an auto repeated hitting function for assisting the repeated hitting operation, it is possible for the player to easily operate the frame button. Here, if the player who is executing the automatic repeated hitting function during the repeated hitting effect enters the timing pressing effect while pressing the frame button 22, the frame button is automatically hit immediately after the timing pressing effect is started. A problem arises that a situation where 22 is pressed occurs. Therefore, a period during which the automatic repeated hitting function is effective and a period during which it is disabled are provided, and the automatic repeated hitting function is set to be disabled during the timing push presentation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed down by automatic repeated hits during the timing pressing effect, and it is possible to generate an effect not intended by the player.

Furthermore, with the above-described solution alone, it is possible to prevent erroneous pressing due to automatic repeated hitting for the player who enters the timing push effect while the auto repeated hitting function is being executed, that is, while the frame button 22 is being pressed. However, there was a problem that it could not be made to participate in the timing push production. Specifically, if the same timing press effect as usual is executed by merely disabling the auto-flicker function, a game with the content of "Press the button at the right time" is played to the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. There is a problem that the guidance is displayed, the player is confused by the displayed content, and cannot enjoy the timing pressing effect.

Therefore, in this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing at which the timing push effect is executed, and if the auto repeated hit function is set to ON, the contents of the timing push effect are displayed in a timely manner. Changed the production to release the button. As a result, the player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released in good timing, and can participate in the performance of executing the operation of the frame button 22 in time. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In this control example, the pressing effect is switched while the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is continued in the composite pressing effect. may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the content of the next pressing effect within the operation invalid period. As a result, it is possible to suppress simultaneous display of the information display regarding the pressing effect being executed and the information display regarding the pressing effect to be executed next, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. has the effect of

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, continuous slot effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous slot effects executed in this control example. The continuous slot effect is a effect in which a slot effect in which rotating pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 is executed multiple times within a predetermined period (30 seconds). , the result of the effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects executed a plurality of times. Specifically, it is an effect in which a privilege (jackpot game) is given to the player by stopping and displaying all predetermined symbol combinations (“AAA”, “BBB”, and “CCC”) during the continuous slot effect. .

As shown in FIG. 160, when the continuous slot effect is executed, slot effect 1 (initial slot effect) is first executed. This slot effect 1 (initial slot effect) is a effect whose effect period is 15 seconds, during which 11 seconds (between 2 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. is set as the frame button operation effective period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1- 2) When this is done, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) of slot effect 1 has passed (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (1 line of the effective line stops display), then shifts to slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), and the second slot effect is executed.

On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-1) When the continuous slot effect is executed, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed for 8 to 9 seconds (stop display of one row of the effective line), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect ) is executed. Then, when the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot performance 1 (initial slot performance), the pseudo symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the special slot performance is entered as it is. do.

This special slot effect is a effect in which the frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set, and an effect is executed in which the rotating pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed regardless of the player's operation. The display mode of any of the 1st to 3rd rows of activated lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect is completed.

The reason why the frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set in the above-mentioned special slot effect is that in the slot effect 1 (initial slot effect), the frame button operation effective period is set for 11 seconds. Since a player who does not operate the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, the performance for operating the frame button 22 again is not displayed during continuous slot performance. is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In this control example, a special slot effect is executed in which the rotating display of the pseudo symbols is automatically stopped as an effect in which the frame button operation effective period is not set. For example, the slot effect may be terminated and a different effect may be executed.

Next, slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) will be described. The slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is a effect whose effect period is 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 12 and 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) the frame button 22 is operated. It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is performed only when the frame button 22 is operated within a predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the slot effect 1 (initial slot effect). This is the slot effect to be executed.

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of this slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (after the continuous slot effect is executed) 18 to 20 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stopped display of one row of effective lines), and then the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is performed.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance), the extended slot performance is executed without stopping the pseudo symbols. This extended slot performance is a performance with a performance period of 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) frame button operation in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. It is set as a valid period (BT).

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) during this extended slot effect, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) Pseudo symbols are stop-displayed (stop-display of two effective lines), and the continuous slot effect is completed.

Next, the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) will be explained. The slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is an effect whose effect period is 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) the frame button 22 is operated. It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) in the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). be.

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of this slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (after the continuous slot effect is executed) 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbols are stop-displayed (stop-display of one row of valid lines), and the continuous slot effect is completed.

Also, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (continuous slot effect is executed) After 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped display of one effective line), and the continuous slot effect is completed. Note that in the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the combination of pseudo symbols stopped and displayed is a predetermined combination ( "AAA", "BBB", or "CCC") are set to differ, and the predetermined combination described above is more likely to stop and be displayed when the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

Finally, the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be explained. The slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 11 seconds (between 17 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as the frame button operation effective period (BT). This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is the latter half of the frame button operation valid period (BT) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). This is a slot effect that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the period.

When the frame button 22 is operated during the last 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot effect 4 (normal slot effect). , After the frame button operation effective period (BT) has passed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped (stopped display of one or two effective lines), and the continuous slot effect ends.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first two seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation effective period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after 19 seconds have elapsed from the start, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stopped display of one row of activated lines), and the process shifts to the above-described slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect).

Also, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (continuous slot effect is executed). 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped (stopped display of one row of valid lines), and the continuous slot effect is completed. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), when the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol is one row or two rows is determined. It is set to be decided by lottery, and either one is selected at a ratio of 1:1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the display mode of the above-described continuous slot effect will be described. FIGS. 161(a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the initial slot effect that is executed first among the continuous slot effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the initial slot effect, three rows of pseudo-symbols having a plurality of pseudo-symbols are rotated and displayed, and a frame button 22 for guiding the pressing of the frame button 22 is schematically displayed below it. A guide map and a time gauge that indicates the valid operation period of the frame button are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, a history display section is displayed for displaying a combination of predetermined pseudo symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, and “CCC”) stopped and displayed in the current continuous slot presentation.

When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) shows a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161(b), the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotated are stopped ("AAA"), and the guide map and time gauge are erased. Then, when the symbol stopped and displayed this time is a combination of the above-described predetermined pseudo symbols, "get" is displayed at the corresponding position in the history display section.

Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the initial slot effect is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process shifts to FIG. 161(c) and the normal slot effect is started. In this normal slot effect, three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed in the same manner as the first slot effect described above, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed. is. A different point from the first slot effect is that a stop display mode in which two activated lines are displayed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the left and right pattern rows out of the three pseudo pattern rows are stopped two seconds after the normal slot performance is started, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the middle pattern row.

Then, when the combination of pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols, "get" is displayed in the history display section. Here, when all of "A", "B", and "C" displayed in the history display section are obtained, a privilege (jackpot game) is provided after the continuous slot effect is completed.

Thus, when the continuous slot effect is executed by normal frame button operation, two slot effects (initial slot effect and normal slot effect) are performed, and three combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols are produced by the slot effect. The gameplay to be acquired is provided.

On the other hand, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the first slot effect is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process shifts to FIG. be. In this first shortened slot effect, three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed in the normal slot effect in the same way as the first slot effect described above, and the player operates the frame button 22 to display the three pseudo symbols rotated and displayed. This is an effect in which rows are stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed (“BBB”) on one active line. After that, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161(e) is executed.

Since this second shortened slot effect is the same effect as the above-described first shortened slot effect, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, the next It is configured such that an effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured to change the number of slot effects executed during continuous slot effects. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and furthermore, the effect is executed during the continuous slot effect. The effect result of the continuous slot effect is more advantageous to the player as the number of slot effect is increased. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 more enthusiastically, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early in the first slot effect (initial slot effect) in the continuous slot effect, the slot effect can be executed three times. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game up to. Furthermore, even if the number of slot effects executed during continuous slot effects is small, a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be stopped and displayed in one slot effect. You can have hope until the end.

For a player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the first slot effect is completed, so that the player may be dissatisfied. do not have.

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, the point effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the "normal mode" is selected, and FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing the "dice mode" being selected. It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the 3rd design display apparatus 81 in a case.

The pachinko machine 10 of this control example omits a detailed description, but in this control example, when a predetermined condition is established (when a frame button operation for shifting the game mode is performed, the game mode is changed by the voice lamp control device 113). When the transition lottery is won), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to transition between two different game modes ("normal mode" and "dice mode").

"Normal mode" is a game mode in which the variation of the third pattern is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third pattern becomes ready-to-win, a predetermined character ("rabbit", "turtle", "brave man") ) is a game mode in which an effect is executed in which any or all of the above appear. In the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) for accumulating and displaying the points acquired by the point effects executed in this control example are displayed. P1, P2, or P3), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a privilege (ready-to-win effect) is given to the player.

On the other hand, in the "dice mode", the variable display of the third symbol is reduced in the small area Dm5, and in the main display area the player is informed of the lottery result of the special symbol according to the progress of the game (not shown) using the dice. This is a game mode in which an effect to be executed is executed. Two indicators (P4 to P5) that are displayed by accumulating the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed in the same manner as in the above-described "normal mode". In P4 or P5), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points), the player is provided with a privilege (ready-to-win effect).

First, with reference to FIG. 162(a), the point effect performed in the "normal mode" will be described. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example in the "normal mode". As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the "normal mode", three indicators are displayed, and "rabbit", "tortoise", and "hero" are associated with the respective indicators. This is because the points (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) that are awarded to the player in the point effect (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are set with types corresponding to the respective characters, and the types of points that are awarded to the player are set. Points are given to each indicator (P1 to P3) according to the .

The characters "Rabbit", "Tortoise", and "Hero" associated with each indicator (P1 to P3) are the third symbol variation effect and reserved symbol display (not shown) executed in the "normal mode". ), and based on the character being displayed in the third symbol variation effect, the point type corresponding to the character is set to be easily displayed. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect with the situation in which points are accumulated in the point effect. Note that it is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be determined at random. As a result, the points associated with the characters other than the characters displayed in the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), making it possible to provide the player with surprise.

Furthermore, in this control example, one of a plurality of characters ("Rabbit", "Tortoise", "Hero") appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as a point effect, and the displayed character is displayed at that point. It is set so that a high point is given when it matches with the character displayed as the subject of the third symbol variation display.

Also, the character is displayed as the point effect three times during one point effect, and points are given at each timing. As a result, the progress of the third symbol variation effect (presence or absence of the main character or the type of the character) can be more associated with the point effect, and the complex effect can be easily understood by the player. has the effect of

In addition, in this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third pattern variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, the character associated with the character displayed in the third pattern variation effect is displayed. Indications (eg, "sword" associated with "brave", etc.) may also be used. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can play the game while anticipating the presence or absence of relevance by comparing the displayed object displayed in the point effect and the content of the third symbol variation effect.

In addition, the point effect may be associated with anything other than the third pattern variation effect, for example, when the pending pattern display is changed to the character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or output from the voice output device It may be associated with the character's voice. By associating some effect provided to the player with the point effect in this way, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, in this control example, points are accumulated in the indicator at various timings during the variable display of the special symbol (during the third symbol variation), and the number of points is the maximum value (7th stage in FIG. 162) ) is reached, a performance with a higher expectation for a big hit than at least the variation performance of the third symbol being executed at that time is executed.

Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not one of the indicators reaches the maximum value by the point effect, and can execute the game while anticipating the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

Incidentally, the manner in which the points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the "normal mode" and the "dice mode" are set by the sound lamp control device 114, which is the effect mode setting means, as the plurality of effect modes. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process (to be described later) executed by the sound lamp control device 114 . By operating the frame button 22, it may be configured such that a plurality of presentation modes can be set.

Indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as step information of a plurality of steps, and the step information is variably displayed by displaying points, which are variable information, on the third pattern display device 81. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the point effect performed in the "dice mode" will be described. FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing a display example in the "dice mode". As shown in FIG. 162(b), in the "dice mode", two dice-like indicators are displayed, and the number of dice rolls is configured to display the accumulated points. The two dice associated with each indicator are configured in the same manner as the dice used in the "dice effect" executed in the "dice mode".

As described above, in the point effect of this control example, the indicator is displayed in a display mode related to the game mode being executed, so display that gives the player a sense of discomfort is suppressed in each effect. be able to.

Also, in each game mode, since the type of points accumulated by the point effect and the upper limit value are set differently, different point effects can be enjoyed for each game mode. Regarding the points to be given in the point production, the point reference value to be given is determined in advance, the point reference value is converted so as to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode currently being executed, and the converted points are converted. It may be configured to be given to the player. This makes it possible to simplify control for giving points.

Furthermore, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, it is preferable to convert the points already stored in the indicator into points corresponding to the game mode of the shift destination and display them. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already given during the point presentation is stored in a storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 114, which is the step information storage means, and the game mode is performed. It is preferable to convert the point reference value stored at the timing of transition to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the transition destination, and perform control to display. As a result, indicator display corresponding to the game mode can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm, and FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example of effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (the points displayed in the main display area Dm) given to the player by the point effect is determined based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect being executed in the main display area Dm. have decided. This prevents the points displayed in the main display area Dm and the third symbol variation effect from overlapping and causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. It is Locations where points are displayed are determined in units of these divided small areas. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying the points for each small area is stored in advance, when the small area where the point display is executed this time is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect, , point display images stored in advance corresponding to the small areas are displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the processing for determining the display location when performing the point display, and there is an effect that the processing can be simplified.

It should be noted that a method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. good.

Also, in this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into 9 areas, but it may be divided into more than 9 areas. may be used to perform point display.

Next, a specific example of point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). As the third symbol variation effect, when displaying points while the effect shown in FIG. 163(b) is being executed, As a result of the determination, small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, allowable areas for allowing point display are set.

Then, an image related to "brave man" is displayed as a character indicating an indicator to which points are given this time in the small area Dm12 selected from the small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) set as the allowable area. Then, 2-point display is performed in the small region Dm11 selected from the remaining allowable regions (small regions Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the main image of the third symbol variation effect, two points are accumulated for the indicator corresponding to the hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162(a).

In this control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the subject of the third symbol variation effect, the points that the player can acquire are higher than when other images are displayed. is set. Therefore, before the points are displayed, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect with the character image that is the subject of the third symbol variation effect, and determines whether the points that can be obtained in this point effect are high. can be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to watch the game while anticipating the continuation of the performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this control example, a character image is displayed in the point effect, and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image. , points may be accumulated in the indicator corresponding to the character that is the subject of the third symbol variation effect.

Furthermore, for example, the pending image displayed in the pending display section may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, by making it difficult for the player to grasp whether the factor of the change of the reserved image is the point performance or whether the lottery result of the special pattern corresponding to the changed reserved image indicates the degree of expectation for the big win. can be made to pay attention to the production that will be executed later.

As described above, according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, the point display location is set, and furthermore, the points are distributed based on the characters displayed in the third symbol variation effect, so the game It is possible to execute a point production that is easy for a person to understand.

In addition, if there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, even if it is possible to select the location where points are displayed based on the number of points given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols) good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points, Points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy "Monster" as the subject of the third pattern variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special pattern wins. In the case of , it is preferable to display the points in the small area Dm11, which is in the vicinity of the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which the points can be displayed. As a result, the player can predict in advance whether or not the lottery for the special symbol this time will be a big hit by grasping the position where the points are displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the small area used in the third pattern variation effect is set as an area in which the points are not displayed. A ratio occupied by each image may be calculated, and if the ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as a point displayable area. As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described.

FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a press scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e are added. Other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Details of the press scenario table 222c will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the press scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165(a), a normal press scenario 222c1, a long press scenario 222c2, and a compound press scenario 222c3 are set in the press scenario table 222c.

FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the normal press scenario 222c1. In the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the period during which normal button pressing is effective (normal pressing period) is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time after the start of the variable display). It's a scenario. The information of the normal pressing scenario 222c1 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the normal pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and the normal pressing period is determined based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. is determined.

Also, the timing type is set for each period during which the button press is valid. By executing (displaying) an effect corresponding to the timing type, an effect corresponding to the pressing timing of the frame button 22 can be executed (displayed).

Specifically, in the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the normal pressing period is set as the pressing period type for the value "5001 to 9000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. "OK" is set as the timing type. Although the details will be described later, the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the variable display is started, and is incremented by 1 every 1 ms thereafter, so the period from 5001 ms to 9000 ms after the start of the variable display is determined as the normal press period. will be

Information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the pressing effect is executed.

When the values of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k are "0 to 5000" and "9001 to 15000", there is no setting of the pressing period type, and button pressing becomes an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press scenario 222c2. In the long-press scenario 222c2, the period during which the long-press button is valid (long-press press period) is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time after the start of the variable display). This is the scenario in which The information of the long press scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the long press effect is selected as the variation pattern. is determined to be

Specifically, in the long-press scenario 222c2, the long-press pressing period is set as the pressing period type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type. there is That is, the period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the long press period. The long pressing period is a period for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (long pressed) for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the long-press effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which characters "long-press successful!" is displayed) is executed based on the fact that a long-press operation has been performed during the long-press period.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the pressing effect is executed.

When the values of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k are "0 to 5000" and "9001 to 15000", there is no setting of the pressing period type, and button pressing becomes an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165(d) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the composite pressing scenario 222c3. The composite pressing scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which multiple types of button pressing are valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time after the start of the variable display). The information of the compound press scenario 222c3 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the compound press effect is selected as the variation pattern, and various press periods are set based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m. is determined. In the present embodiment, only one type of composite press scenario is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the composite pressing scenario 222c3, the pressing period type is set to auto-pressing period and the timing type is set to "OK" for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, the period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the auto-press period. The auto-press period is a period during which auto-press is performed based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (two seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-press effect, based on the fact that a long-press operation has been performed during the auto-press period, an effect is produced as if the frame button 22 were pressed every second while the long-press operation continues (for example, 22 repeated hits increase the gauge) is executed.

For the value "12001 to 13200" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type in the case of auto pressing, and the normal pressing effect is set in the case of non-auto pressing. "NG" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13201 to 13800" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type in the case of auto pressing, and the normal pressing effect is set in the case of non-auto pressing. "OK" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13801 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type in the case of auto pressing, and the normal pressing effect is set in the case of non-auto pressing. "NG" is set as the timing type.

That is, when the auto-pressing is in progress, a release effect, which is the effect of releasing the frame button 22, is displayed. For example, the characters "Good timing!") are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms and 13200 ms or between 13801 ms and 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, characters "Bad timing!") is displayed.

During non-auto-pressing, the normal pressing effect, which is the effect of pressing the frame button 22, is displayed. An effect (for example, the characters "Good timing!") is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed between 12001 ms and 13200 ms or between 13801 ms and 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the characters "Bad timing!") is displayed.

An auto press effect is set for the values "15001 to 18000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "20001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 20001 ms has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the composite pressing effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a winning character selection table 222d1 and a losing character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166(b). FIG. 166(b) is a table for determining characters to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect when the judgment result of the big win is a big win. is a table in which

Although not shown, the effect counter 223f has three independent counters, and different counters are used to select a character in each period. As a result, it is possible to increase the variations of the characters displayed in the first to third periods, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the values "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the values "50 to 100" of the effect counter 223f. A "rabbit" is defined as a character, and a "tortoise" is defined as a character corresponding to the values "101 to 149" of the effect counter 223f. As characters corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the effect counter 223f, "the same character as the type of the point effect" is specified, and the characters (brave, rabbit, turtle) that perform the main effects in the point effect are defined. The same character will be selected.

That is, in the point effect executed when the determination result of the big win is a big win, the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is likely to be displayed in the first to third periods. Since the player expects to display the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect during the first to third periods, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166(c), the contents of the outlier character selection table will be described. FIG. 166(c) is a table for determining the characters to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect when the judgment result of the big win is a loss. is a table in which

Specifically, in the out character selection table 222d2, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the values "0 to 65" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the values "66 to 132" of the effect counter 223f. A "rabbit" is specified as a character, and a "tortoise" is specified as a character corresponding to the values "133 to 199" of the effect counter 223f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a winning point selection table 222e1 and a losing point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167(b). FIG. 167(b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect when the judgment result of the big win is a big win. is a table in which When points are selected in each period, different counters are used for selection in the same manner as character selection. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the points displayed in the first period to the third period, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Specifically, in the winning point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the value "0 to 2" of the last digit of the effect counter 223f. "2" is defined as the point corresponding to "3-6", and "3" is defined as the point corresponding to the last digit value "7-9" of the effect counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the out-of-range point selection table 222e1 defines "1" as a point corresponding to the value "0 to 4" of the last digit of the effect counter 223f. "2" is defined as the point corresponding to the last digit value "5-7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as the point corresponding to the last digit value "8-9" of the effect counter 223f. stipulated.

Therefore, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured such that higher points are more likely to be selected than the losing point selection table 222e2. That is, when the determination result of the big win is a big win, it is easier to display high points in the first to third periods of the point presentation. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that high points will be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 164, the description continues. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example has a press-down effect flag 223j, a press-down effect scenario counter 223k, a press-down scenario storage area 223m, a slot effect-in-progress flag 223n, and a slot effect counter 223p as compared with the RAM 223 in the first control example. , slot effect state 223q is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pressing effect flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the pressing effect is being executed (displayed). When it is ON, it indicates that the pressing effect is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the effect is not being executed (displayed). This pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is the pressing effect (S2031 of FIG. 170: Yes) in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) (FIG. 170). (see S2031 of ). Then, in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172), it is referred to determine whether or not the pressing effect is being performed (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to OFF when the pressing effect ends (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the pressing effect is set. This press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by one (see S4402 in FIG. 172) each time it is determined that the press effect is being performed in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 when the press effect ends. (see S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the pressing effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Based on the value of this press effect scenario counter 223k (elapsed time since the start of the variable display) and a press scenario stored in a press scenario storage area 223m, which will be described later, it is determined whether the button press is valid for a period. It is determined whether or not

The press scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the press scenarios stored in the press scenario table 222c described above. In the press scenario storage area 223m, when a variation pattern in which a press effect is set is obtained in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), a press scenario corresponding to the set press effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m and the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid.

The slot effect in-progress flag 223n is a flag for determining whether a slot effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that a slot effect is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the effect is not being executed (displayed). In the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the slot effect in progress flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined that the obtained variation pattern is the slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 172: Yes) (FIG. 170). (see S2305 of ). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to determine whether or not the slot effect is in progress (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to OFF when the slot effect is terminated ( See S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the slot effect is set. This slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4603 in FIG. 174) when it is determined that the slot effect is being performed (S4601 in FIG. 174: Yes) in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The value of the slot effect counter 223p is the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), the initial slot effect process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect process (see FIG. 176), and the first shortened slot effect process (see FIG. 177). ), second shortening slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178), and extended slot effect in-process (see FIG. 179).

The slot effect state 223q is an area for storing information indicating the state of the slot effect, during the initial slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect. Corresponding values are stored. In this slot effect state 223q, the initial slot effect is set when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the slot effect is set in the acquired variation pattern (S2034 in FIG. 170: Yes). (see S2036 in FIG. 170). In the initial slot effect processing (see FIG. 175), when the normal slot effect is selected, the normal slot effect is set (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and when the first shortened slot effect is selected, the first shortened slot Effects are set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and special slot effects are set when special slot effects are selected (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot effect processing (see FIG. 176), when the display slot stop command of the stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second shortened slot effect When the display slot effect command corresponding to is set, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the process during the first shortened slot effect (see FIG. 177), the second shortened slot effect is set when the second shortened slot effect is selected (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when the extended slot effect is selected An extended slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the process during the second shortened slot effect (see FIG. 178), when the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the extended slot effect processing (see FIG. 179), when setting the display slot stop effect command of the stop mode in which two symbols are aligned, the end waiting state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to determine which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and is cleared when the slot effect ends (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. The display control device 114 in this control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, the work RAM 233 in this control example has a prohibited area storage area 233m added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area of the display area composed of a total of 9 areas (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163) where the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is divided vertically into 3 parts and left and right into 3 parts. is stored, and the display area corresponding to the stored information is controlled so that the character pattern and the point pattern are not displayed. Specifically, for example, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as information indicating display areas in the prohibited area storage area 233m, they do not correspond to the display areas stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, A character pattern and a point pattern (which are not displayed in Dm12 and Dm13) are selected, and a point effect is executed. Also, after the character design is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area where the selected character design is displayed, and then the point design is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character design and the point design from being displayed in the same display area. When selecting a point design, if all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, the image data of the character design and the point design are combined (or reduced) to prevent overlapping display. Either the character design or the point design may be prevented from being displayed.

The character ROM 234 in this control example has a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 added to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table that stores image data for displaying character designs in the point effect described above. This character data table 234a3 stores the display information of the character pattern displayed in the first period to the third period in the point effect. Display information of the corresponding character pattern is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The character pattern display information includes information about the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so as not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent character designs from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. You can prevent it from happening.

The point data table 234a4 is a table that stores image data for displaying point symbols in the point effect described above. This point data table 234a4 stores the display information of the point symbols displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect. Display information of the corresponding point pattern is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The display information of the point pattern includes information about the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed in the third pattern display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so as not to be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point designs from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. You can prevent it from happening.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. In this control example, the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) is changed from the above-described first control example so that the pressing effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732) are executed. The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1710 is completed, the pressing effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to S1711. Then, command determination processing is executed (S1711), variable display setting processing 2 is executed (S1712), and the process proceeds to S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will now be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S1712) adds a process for executing a press effect, a slot effect, and a point effect instead of the reach-navi effect to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the variation display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and then the variation pattern command for display is set (S2006).

When the processing of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether or not the set variation pattern command is for executing a pressing effect (S2031). In the processing of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. (S2033), and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the process of S2033, for example, if the acquired variation pattern is for executing a normal press effect, the normal press scenario is acquired from the press scenario table 222c and set in the press scenario storage area 223m. As a result, the button effective period can be matched with the display of the effect based on the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the pressing effect scenario counter 223k.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2031 that the pressing effect is not to be executed (S2031: No), it is then determined whether or not the slot effect is to be executed (S2034).

In the processing of S2034, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is for executing the slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effecting flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q is set as the initial slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2034 that the slot effect is not to be executed (S2034: No), it is then determined whether or not the point effect is to be executed (S2037).

In the process of S2037, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is for executing the point effect (S2037: Yes), the point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to the process of S2007. . On the other hand, in the process of S2037, when it is determined that the point effect is not executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2007.

As for the transition to S2007, the processing from S2007 to S2011 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting to the display control device 114 a display point effect command for executing the point effect in the determined display mode. be.

In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result is a jackpot (S4301). Then, the first to third character information is determined based on the type of point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). The first to third character information are, as described above, information for displaying character designs in three periods during which the character designs set for the point effect and the point designs are displayed. The first character information is the information of the character pattern displayed in the first period, which is the earliest of the three periods (the shortest elapsed time since the start of the variable display), and the second character information is the first period. The third character information is information on the character design to be displayed in the third period following the second period.

As described above, the winning character selection table 222d1 is configured so that the same character pattern as the predetermined character can be easily selected in the point effect. As a result, when the character mainly displayed in the point performance and the character pattern displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, the player expects a big win thereafter. can be done.

After completing the processing of S4302, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the winning point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the processing proceeds to S4306. The first to third point information, like the first to third character information described above, is information for displaying point symbols during the first to third periods set for the point effect.

As described above, the win point selection table 222e1 is configured so that point symbols with higher points are more likely to be selected than the losing point selection table 222e2. As a result, many point symbols with high points are displayed in the point effect, so that the player can expect a big win after that.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if the result of the win/loss determination is determined to be a loss (S4301: No), the first to third characters are selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the loss character selection table 222d2. Information is determined (S4304). Then, based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the point selection table 222e2 for failure, the first to third point information is determined (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

After the processing of S4303 or S4305 is completed, a display point effect command is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output processing (S1702) of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169). , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . By receiving the display point effect command, the display control device 114 generates a point effect based on the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information. is set, and the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

Next, details of the pressing effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. This pressing effect setting process (S1731) detects pressing (normal pressing, long pressing, etc.) of the frame button 22 according to the pressing effect being executed (displayed), and displays and controls the command corresponding to the pressing. This is processing for transmission to the device 114 .

In the pressing effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing effect in-progress flag 223j is ON (that is, whether or not the pressing effect is being performed) (S4401). In the process of S4401, if it is determined that the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is OFF (S4401: No), it is not necessary to set the pressing effect, so this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is ON (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to S4402 in order to execute the process related to the pressing effect.

In the process of S4402, 1 is added to the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4403. Since the pressing effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), while the pressing effect is being executed, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k It is incremented by 1.

In the process of S4403, based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 during the current period is performed. It is determined whether or not it is the detection period (normal pressing period) (S4403).

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404). In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display pressing command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal pressing period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4404 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4404: No), the processing of S4405 is skipped and this processing ends.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k, and the display press command is set according to the timing type. As a result, when different performances are executed depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed can be discriminated, and the performance corresponding to the pressing timing can be executed.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the period for detecting long pressing of the frame button 22 (long pressing period). (S4406). In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that the current period is the long pressing period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been long pressed (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is two seconds or longer, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time (S4407), a display long press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been long pressed during the long press period is set ( S4408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 has not been long-pressed (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the current period is not the long press period (S4406: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the auto press period (S4409). In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is the auto press period (S4409: Yes), the auto press effect setting process is executed (S4410), and this process ends. Details of the auto press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not the auto-press period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the release period (S4411). In the process of S4410. If it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been released (whether or not the pressed state has changed to the non-pressed state) (S4412). .

In the process of S4412, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released during the release period is set, and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4412 that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the processing of S4413 is skipped and this processing ends.

In the process of S4411, if it is determined that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (acquired based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k). (S4414).

In the process of S4414, if it is determined that it is time to end the pressing effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to OFF. (S4416), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4414, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: No), the processing of S4415 and S4416 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 173, the details of the auto press effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined that it is the auto press period in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) will be described. . This auto-press effect setting process (S4410) is based on the fact that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed during the auto-press period. 22 is pressed to the display control device 114 . That is, in the automatic pressing effect, pressing the frame button 22 for a long time automatically (automatically) presses the frame button 22 .

In the auto press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for two seconds or more, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has started. In the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for auto pressing ( S4502). Then, an auto press start command indicating that the long press of the frame button 22 has started (auto press has started) during the auto press period is set (S4503), and this processing ends. In the process of S4502, the pressing scenario is changed to the pressing scenario for auto-pressing, so that the rendering mode to be displayed after that is changed to the rendering mode assuming that the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed. (For example, you can change the effect of pressing the button to the effect of releasing the button).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has not started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the long pressing of the frame button 22 is in progress (S4504). In the processing of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4504: Yes), during the period in which the auto-press started by the long-press of the frame button 22 is being executed, is executed (S4505).

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period of time (one second) has passed since the last auto-press was performed (S4504: Yes), the display auto-press command is set (S4506), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, if it is determined that the certain period of time (1 second) has not passed since the previous auto-press was executed (S4504: No), the processing of S4506 is skipped and the present processing is executed. finish.

If it is determined in the processing of S4504 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed long (S4504: No), then it is determined whether or not the long pressing of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is not pressed continuously for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 is pressed long, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is finished. This prevents erroneous determination that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has ended when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like. can.

In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to a pressing scenario for non-automatic pressing. (S4508). Then, a display auto-press end command indicating that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (auto-press has started) during the auto-press period is set (S4509), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4507 that the long pressing of the frame button 22 has not ended (S4507: No), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed normally (S4510).

In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the frame button 22 was pressed normally (S4510: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is manually pressed (hit repeatedly) during the auto repeated hitting period. A display press command is set (S4511), and this processing ends.

In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this process ends.

Next, details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. FIG. This slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

In the slot effect setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect in progress flag 223n is ON (whether or not the slot effect is in progress) (S4601). In the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effect in progress flag 223n is off (S4601: No), it means that the slot effect is not being executed (displayed), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effecting flag 223n is ON (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, 1 is added to the value of the slot effect counter 223p (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during execution (display) of the slot effect. be.

In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether or not the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the initial slot effect (S4603). In the processing of S4603, when it is determined that the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), it means that the first slot effect (initial slot effect) is being executed in the slot effect. In order to execute the process in the initial slot effect, the process during the initial slot effect is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the initial slot effect processing (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing during the initial slot effect (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the initial slot effect of the slot effect. be.

In the initial slot effect processing (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is valid during the button pressing valid period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 2000 and 13000 (that is, between 2 seconds and 13 seconds after the start of the slot effect), it is determined that it is the button pressing valid period. do.

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that it is the valid period for pressing the button (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702). If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4702: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). . In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button pressing effective period (between 2 seconds and 13 seconds) is early (from 2 seconds to Since the frame button 22 is pressed during 8 seconds and the remaining effect time of the slot pressing effect is large, the process proceeds to S4706 in order to execute the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first shortened slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not between 2000 and 8000 (that is, the value is 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 for executing a normal slot effect. Transition.

In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4708.

In the processing of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4709), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button pressing valid period is not reached (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 13000 (S4710).

In the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 13000 (S4701: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has not been pressed during the button pressing valid period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 13000 or less (S4710: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description continues. In the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the initial slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the normal slot effect process (S4606).

This normal slot effect process is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 or the like during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect processing (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is valid during the button pressing valid period (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 17000 and 28000 (that is, between 17 seconds and 28 seconds after the start of the slot effect), it is determined that it is the button pressing valid period. discriminate.

In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the valid period for pressing the button is not reached (S4801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the valid period for pressing the button has expired (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802).

In the process of S4802, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4802: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4802, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803).

In the processing of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during the execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then the effect This is the case where it is possible to execute the second shortened slot effect of 10 seconds. In this case, a slot stop effect command for display of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809), and a display corresponding to the second shortened slot effect is set (S4809). A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process proceeds to S4804 to end the slot effect.

In the process of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined to be an even number (S4804: Yes), the slot for display of the stop mode in which two symbols are aligned A stop effect command is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one pattern is aligned is set, and the process proceeds to S4807. Transition.

In the processing of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4807), and this processing ends.

Thus, in the normal slot effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is stop-displayed, and thereafter, one symbol is stop-displayed in the second shortened slot effect. Together with the stop display in the slot effect, the three symbols are stop-displayed. On the other hand, when the depression of the frame button 22 is delayed, it is determined whether 2 symbols or 1 symbol is stop-displayed depending on the value of the performance counter. Therefore, pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage increases the possibility that the two symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the player can actively participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description continues. If it is determined in the processing of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the first shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4607).

In the process of S4607, when it is determined that the first shortened slot effect is set (S4607: Yes), the first shortened slot effect process is executed (S4608), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Now, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 177, the details of the processing during the first shortening slot effect will be described. The processing during the first shortened slot effect (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot effect of the slot effect. This process is for

In the process during the first shortened slot effect (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 12000 to 18000, it is determined that it is the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4901, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect is valid (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902).

In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect. (S4904). Then, a display slot stop effect command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not reached (S4901: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 18000 (S4906).

In the process of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18000 or less (S4906: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4906, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 18000 (S4906: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect. be. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

After completing the processing of S4905 or S4908, the display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4909), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description continues. In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then whether or not the second shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609).

In the process of S4609, when it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is set (S4609: Yes), the second shortened slot effect process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Now, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178, the details of the process during the second shortened slot effect (S4610) will be described. The process during the second shortened slot effect (S4610) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and corresponds to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the second shortened slot effect. It is a process for processing.

In the process during the second shortened slot effect (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing valid period in the second shortened slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 22000 and 28000, it is determined that it is the button pressing effective period.

In the processing of S5001, if it is determined that the valid period for pressing the button is not reached (S5001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that it is the valid period for pressing the button (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002).

If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5002: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is set. The end waiting state is set (S5004), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description continues. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then it is determined whether or not the extended slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. Determine (S4611).

In the process of S4611, when it is determined that the extension slot effect is set (S4611: Yes), the extension slot effect process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Now, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 179, the details of the process during extended slot effect (S4612) will be described. The extension slot effect in progress process (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during execution (display) of the extension slot effect. is the processing of

In the extended slot effect processing (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing valid period in the extended slot effect (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 22000 and 28000, it is determined that it is the button pressing effective period.

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the valid period for pressing the button is not reached (S5101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that it is the valid period for pressing the button (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102).

If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5102: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is set. The end waiting state is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description continues. In the process of S4611, when it is determined that the extended slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to S4613.

In the processing of S4613, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 28000 in order to determine whether or not it is time to end the slot effect (S4613). In the process of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28000 or less (S4613: No), it is not the end timing of the slot effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S4614).

In the process of S4614, if the slot effect state 223q is waiting for completion (S4614: Yes), the slot effect has already been stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. This is a case where a special slot effect is being executed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), it means that the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped. In this case, in order to end the slot effect after stop-displaying the effect mode in the slot effect, a display slot effect forced end command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

In the process of S4617, the slot effect in progress flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186. FIG. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that in command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 180), pressing effect related command processing, slot effect command processing, and point effect command processing are added. The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the command determination process 2, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

Then, if it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the pressing effect has been received (S2631).

In the process of S2631, if it is determined that a command related to the pressing effect has been received (S2631: Yes), the command process related to the pressing effect is executed (S2632), and the process returns to the process of S2601. Details of the pressing effect related command process (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2631 that the command related to the pressing effect has not been received (S2631: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect command has been received (S2633).

In the process of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command has been received (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the slot effect command process (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2633, if it is determined that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect command has been received (S2635).

In the process of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command has been received (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the point effect command process (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2635, if it is determined that the point effect command has not been received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed as in the first control example (S2614), and the processing of S2601 is executed. back to

Next, details of the pressing effect related command process (S2632) will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. The pressing effect related command process (S2632) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) a pressing effect.

In the press effect related command process (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S5201). In the process of S5201, if it is determined that the display press command has been received (S5201: Yes), the press command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

Details of the press command process (S5202) will now be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flow chart showing the press command process. This press-down command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display press-down command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the press command process, first, the press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set (S5301). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5302).

Then, based on the press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5301, time data representing the performance time is set in the timer counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5305), the press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description is continued. In the processing of S5201, if it is determined that the display press-down command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the display long-press command has been received (S5203).

In the process of S5203, if it is determined that the long press command for display has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to the process of S5205.

Details of the long press command process (S5204) will be described below with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing long press command processing. This long-press command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display long-press command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the long-press command processing, first, the long-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long-press command is determined, and the determined long-press display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5402).

Then, based on the long-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, time data representing the rendering time is set in the timer counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5405), the long press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description is continued. In the process of S5203, if it is determined that the display long-press command has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press start command has been received (S5205).

In the process of S5205, if it is determined that the display auto-press start command has been received (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

Here, with reference to FIG. 183(a), the details of the auto press start command processing (S5206) will be described. FIG. 183(a) is a flow chart showing auto press start command processing. This auto-press start command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the auto-press start command processing, first, the auto-press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press start command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5502).

Then, based on the auto-press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5501, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timer counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5505), the auto press start command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description is continued. In the process of S5205, if it is determined that the display auto-press start command has not been received (S5205: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press command has been received (S5207).

In the process of S5207, if it is determined that the display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

Here, with reference to FIG. 183(b), the details of the auto press command process (S5208) will be described. FIG. 183(b) is a flowchart showing auto press command processing. This auto-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the auto-press command processing, first, an auto-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press command is determined, and the determined auto-press display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to store the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5602).

Then, based on the auto-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5601, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5605), the auto press command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S5207 that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

In the process of S5209, if it is determined that the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the details of the auto press end command process (S5210) will be described. FIG. 184(a) is a flow chart showing auto press end command processing. This auto-press end command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display auto-press end command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the auto-press end command processing, first, an auto-press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press end command is determined, and the determined auto-press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5702).

Then, based on the auto press end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5705), the auto press end command processing is terminated, and the press effect related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description is continued. In the processing of S5209, if it is determined that the display auto-press end command has not been received (S5209: No), then it is determined whether or not the display release command has been received (S5211).

In the processing of S5211, if it is determined that the release command for display has been received (S5211: Yes), release command processing is executed (S5212), and this processing ends.

Details of the release command process (S5212) will now be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing release command processing. This release command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display release command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the release command process, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set (S5801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5805), the release command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S5211 that the release command for display has not been received (S5211: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, details of the slot effect command process (S2634) will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing slot effect command processing. In this slot effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the slot effect command process, first, the slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the slot effect command for display is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5902).

Based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5905), the slot effect command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing 2 is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, details of the point effect command process (S2636) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing point effect command processing. In this point effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display point effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the point effect command processing, first, the point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, the prohibited area information corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m (S6002).

Based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the process of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command, the character data of the character design to be displayed in the first to third periods. The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the prohibited area information corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Based on the information in the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the process of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command, the point data of the point symbols to be displayed in the first to third periods. A table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

By writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6005).

Based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6008), the point effect command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing 2 is returned to.

As described above, the compound pressing effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player continuously executes different operation modes (continuous pressing, timing pressing) on the frame button 22. It is possible to increase the willingness to participate in Further, when it is determined that the player has executed the auto-pressing function during the compound pressing effect, the pressing effect mode of the compound pressing effect to be executed is switched, so that the player can be provided with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

In this control example, if it is normal as a composite pressing effect, it is set so that the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at good timing (timing pressing effect) is executed after the pressing effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 (continuous hitting effect). When the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the continuous hitting effect is switched to the timing pressing effect, the above timing pressing effect is switched to the release effect of releasing the button with good timing. Other configurations may be used.

For example, when the auto press function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the repeated hitting effect to the timing pressing effect, the timing of the pressing operation during the timing pressing effect may be automatically determined, or the repeated pressing effect may be performed. You may make it continue and perform production|presentation. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player who is executing the auto press function feel uncomfortable.

Further, in the second control example, the normal pressing effect, the timing pressing effect, and the release effect can be displayed as the compound pressing effect, but other structures may be used. For example, a long press period during which a long press effect is executed may be provided as part of the compound press effect.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the timing at which each pressing effect mode of the compound pressing effect is changed is the timing at which the pressing effect is switched. may be determined. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the composite pressing effect.

In addition, while the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously accepted during the effect period of the composite pressing effect executed in the second control example, an invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted is provided in the middle. can be With such a configuration, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the composite pressing effect using the invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is disabled among the periods in which the composite pressing effect is being executed, so that the player can easily understand. performance can be provided.

In the compound pressing effect described above in the second control example, the result of the compound pressing effect is displayed based on all the operation results for each pressing effect executed during the compound pressing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play with respect to each pressing effect. Note that the method of displaying the effect result of the compound pressing effect is not limited to this, and the effect result may be displayed independently for each pressing effect executed during the compound pressing effect.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, the next It is configured such that an effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured to change the number of slot effects executed during continuous slot effects. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and furthermore, the effect is executed during the continuous slot effect. The effect result of the continuous slot effect is more advantageous to the player as the number of slot effect is increased. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 more enthusiastically, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early in the first slot effect (initial slot effect) in the continuous slot effect, the slot effect can be executed three times. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game up to. Furthermore, even if the number of slot effects executed during continuous slot effects is small, a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be stopped and displayed in one slot effect. You can have hope until the end.

Furthermore, for a player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the end of the first slot effect, so that the player may feel dissatisfied. do not have.

In addition, in the second control example, slot effects are used as a plurality of operation effects that are executed during the continuous effect that is executed during the specific period. In addition, effects other than those using slots may be used as long as the effect mode and the number of times of other operation effects executed during the continuous effect can be changed.

As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the point display location is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and furthermore, the point is displayed in the third symbol change effect. Since the points are distributed based on the character that is playing, it is possible to execute a point presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, if there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, even if it is possible to select the location where points are displayed based on the number of points given and the result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols) good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points, Points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy "Monster" as the subject of the third pattern variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special pattern wins. In the case of , it is preferable to display the points in the small area Dm11, which is in the vicinity of the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which the points can be displayed. As a result, the player can predict in advance whether or not the lottery for the special symbol this time will be a big hit by grasping the position where the points are displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed in Dm12 in FIG. 163(b)) may be changed to a display mode that guides the location (small area) of the point display to be executed later. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display mode in which the location (small area) of the point display is guided by the line of sight of the character.

In addition, in this control example, the small area used in the third pattern variation effect is set as an area in which the points are not displayed. A ratio occupied by each image may be calculated, and if the ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as a point displayable area. As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

The following configuration may be used as a configuration for setting the display location of the point presentation based on the location where the third symbol variation presentation is displayed. In other words, when the display control device 114 receives a command for displaying points, it controls all the small areas to display the points, and displays small areas other than the small areas where the points are actually displayed visually by the player. Control may be performed to mask the point display displayed in the area so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player. By configuring in this way, for example, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect during the third symbol variation effect moves to various small areas, and the prohibited area and the permitted area are exchanged. can facilitate handling of cases.

In addition, as a similar process, the point display image layer for displaying the points is made to display the points in all the small areas, and the effect display image layer for displaying the third pattern variation effect in front of the point display image layer. is provided, and a process of transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect to the effect display image layer may be executed.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the small area where the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as the prohibited area where the point display is prohibited. For example, it is provided in a small area where game information such as display of the number of reservations is displayed, or in the pachinko machine 10, and is driven when a predetermined condition (predetermined variation pattern selection) is established. In a gaming machine having a decorative accessory that covers a part (a specific small area) of the front surface of the three-symbol display device 81, the above-described specific small area when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an abnormality when an abnormality is detected. In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area for displaying information, the predetermined small area may be set as a prohibited area when an abnormality is detected.

Furthermore, in the second control example, a control example using the display area of one display device (the third pattern display device 81) is described, but similar control may be performed using a plurality of display devices. For example, if a movable (rotatable) sub-display device is placed at a predetermined position, it may be set as a prohibited area, and if it is placed at any other position, it may be set as a permitted area.

<First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. FIG. In the first modification of the second control example, the contents of the ROM 203 and RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed from the above-described second control example, and slot effect setting processing (see FIG. 174) is replaced with The difference is that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed at the second step, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the first modification of the second control example, three types of auto-press periods (A, B, and C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are different in each auto-press period. As a result, for example, effects such as pressing the frame button 22 multiple times during the button pressing period (continuous hit effect), pressing the frame button 22 only once during the button pressing period (timing pressing effect), etc. Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

In addition, in the first modified example, an effect mode is displayed in which a rotation effect in which the slot is rotated and stopped is executed three times as the slot effect, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the pressing of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加When the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation performance, the rotation speed of the next rotation performance becomes slow, and as the pressing of the frame button 22 becomes slower, the rotation speed of the next rotation performance becomes faster. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect will be slowed down, making it easier to align the target symbols. The rotation speed in the rotation effect of 2 becomes faster, and it becomes difficult to align the target patterns. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a privilege that by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, it becomes easier to arrange the target pattern, and the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the second control example>
First, referring to FIG. 187, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first modified example differs from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the press scenario table 222c are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the press scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187(a), the press scenario table 222c in the first modified example has a first compound press scenario 222c4 and a first compound press scenario 222c4 and The difference is that the second compound press scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 187(b), the contents of the first compound press scenario 222c4 will be described. FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the first compound press scenario 222c4. The first compound press scenario 222c4 is different from the compound press scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the press intervals during the auto press period are different, but other points are the same. Description of the same points will be omitted.

In the first compound press scenario 222c4, as shown in FIG. 187(b), the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k is set to the auto press period A (1 second press interval) as the press period type. , and the value "15001 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, an automatic pressing period B (0.5 second pressing interval) is set.

In this way, by varying the pressing interval with respect to the auto-pressing period set to a different period depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the player who is executing the auto-pressing function can execute the auto-pressing function. It is possible to suppress early boredom with the performance based on what is being done.

In this modified example, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto-pressing period, but other configurations may be used. reaches the auto-press period, one auto-press pattern is selected from an auto-press pattern selection table storing a plurality of auto-press patterns with different press intervals, and the press interval is based on the selected auto-press pattern. may be set. By configuring in this way, even if the multiple pressing effect based on the same multiple pressing scenario is executed, the automatic pressing function with different pressing intervals is executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, a predetermined auto-pressing pattern may be selected from the above-described auto-pressing pattern selection table based on the determination result of the special symbol. Specifically, in the case where an effect is executed in which the degree of progress increases according to the number of times of pressing, when it is determined that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is stored in the auto pressing pattern selection table. It is preferable to select the auto press pattern with the shortest press interval among the available auto press patterns. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of progress of the performance when the determination result of the special symbol is a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is executing the auto-pressing function predict the determination result of the special symbol according to the degree of progress of the performance.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure so that the pressing interval is notified to the third symbol display device 81 while the automatic pressing function is being executed. As a result, the player can visually grasp the pressing interval of the auto-pressing function currently being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187(c), the contents of the second compound press scenario 222c5 will be described. FIG. 187(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second compound press scenario 222c5. The second compound press scenario 222c5 has a value of "12001" to " 15000" is different in that the auto-press period is set, and other points are the same. Description of the same points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 187(c), the second compound press scenario 222c5 has an auto press period C (press interval of 2 seconds) set for the values "12001" to "15000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. . In this way, by executing the auto-pressing function with a pressing interval of 2 seconds during the period of 3 seconds set as the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)), a predetermined It is possible to realize a situation in which the button is pressed at the right timing.

Specifically, for example, when the press effect scenario counter 223k during the auto press period A is "14000" and the press effect is executed by the auto press function, the press effect during the auto press period C is executed. The next pressing effect is executed at the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is "16000", that is, at the timing two seconds after the previous pressing effect. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at the timing one second after the start of the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)).

In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during auto-pressing, it is possible to suitably execute button-pressing effects with different game characteristics while the auto-pressing function is being executed (while the frame button 22 is kept pressed for a long time). becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first modified example differs from the above-described second control example in that a depression number counter 223r is provided, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pressing number counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution (display) of the slot effect. The number-of-presses counter 223r is incremented by 1 when the frame button 22 is pressed in slot effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 189) and when the end timing of the valid period for pressing the button comes (see FIG. 189). (see S6108). Then, when the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 2 or less, setting of the next rotation effect is executed, and when the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Also, the effective period of button pressing is set based on the value of the pressing number counter 223r.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 189, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modified example differs from the above-described second control example in that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , are otherwise the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732). This slot effect setting process 2 (S1732) displays an effect mode in which a rotation effect in which the slot is rotated and stopped is executed three times as a slot effect, and rotation of the slot is stopped based on pressing of the frame button 22. process. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is performed early, processing is performed so as to slow down the rotation speed in the next rotation performance so that the number of rotations in each rotation performance is the same. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation performance will be slowed down, making it easier to align the target symbols.

In the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect in progress flag 223n is ON, thereby determining whether or not the slot effect is being executed (displayed) (S6101).

In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect in progress flag 223n is off (S6101: No), it means that the slot effect is not being executed (displayed), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect in progress flag 223n is ON (S6101: Yes), since the slot effect is being executed (displayed), the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 ( S6102), the process proceeds to S6103.

In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is the valid period for pressing the button (S6103). Specifically, the button pressing valid period is set by the processing of S6115 described later. For example, when the pressing number counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is If the value is between 2001 and 8000 (that is, 2001 ms after the start of the slot effect and until 8000 ms has passed), the button depression valid period is.

In the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button valid period has not expired (S6103: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6103 that the button valid period has expired (S6103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104). In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for stopping the rotating pattern in the rotation effect is set (S6105). , S6108.

In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the valid period for pressing the button (S6106). Specifically, when the number-of-presses counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000 or not.

In the process of S6106, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period for pressing the button (S6106: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6106, if it is determined that it is time to end the effective period of pressing the button (S6106: Yes), a display slot stop effect command is issued to forcibly stop the rotating symbol in the rotation effect. is set (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the processing of S6108, 1 is added to the number-of-presses counter 223r (S6108), and it is determined whether or not the added value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

In the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), it means that the rotation effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times, so the next rotation effect is executed. The process proceeds to S6113 for setting.

In the process of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the pressing number counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the pressing number counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is slot The value of the effect counter 223p is 28000, and the remaining time is obtained by subtracting the current value of the slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p, which is the upper limit time.

A slot effect command for display is set (S6114), and a button press effective period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is set. (S6115), this processing ends.

Specifically, in the process of S6115, when the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 1, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 12001 and 18000 is set as the button-pressing valid period. is 2, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 22001 and 18000 is set as the button pressing effective period.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6109, if it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 was pressed in the final rotation effect of the slot effect (or the button-press valid period has passed). In this case, a display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112), End this process.

As described above, in the first modification, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the slot effect in which the rotating effect is performed three times, the rotation speed in the next rotating effect slows down, and the desired pattern is displayed. On the other hand, if the depression of the frame button 22 is delayed, the rotation speed in the next rotation performance will increase, making it difficult to align the target symbols. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a privilege that by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, it becomes easier to arrange the target pattern, and the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to vary the length of the button-press valid period to be set next according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during the button-press valid period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period is lengthened in the next rotation effect. As a result, the button pressing period is set longer in the next rotation effect, so even if the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, the timing of stopping the target symbol comes frequently (that is, the chance increases). can be given, the desire to participate in the game can be improved.

<Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG. In the second modification, in contrast to the above-described second control example, when the pressing state of the frame button 22 is auto pressing, a pressing signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, and the frame The difference is that a frame button control device 290 is provided for outputting a pressing signal based on the pressing of the frame button 22 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the pressed state of the button 22 is non-auto pressing. are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second modified example, the frame button control device 290 enters an auto-pressing state based on a predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for two seconds). During auto-pressing, even if the frame button 22 is not operated, a pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at regular intervals. Therefore, even when the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, thereby reducing the operation burden of the player. can be done.

<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the second control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, the electrical configuration of the second modification will be described. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the second modified example.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second modified example via a frame button control device 290. As shown in FIG. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown). By the processing of this MPU 291, pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the detection result.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293 in which information for determining the pressing state of the frame button 22 is stored. Details of the RAM 293 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modification.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an auto-pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (a state in which a pressing signal is output at regular intervals regardless of whether the frame button 22 is pressed). If it is, it is determined that it is in an auto-pressing state (during auto-pressing), and if it is OFF, it is determined that it is in a state in which auto-pressing is not performed (non-auto-pressing).

The auto-depressed flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 has been pressed for two seconds or more. The auto-pressing flag 293a is referred to in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) when it is determined whether or not the button is in the auto-pressing state.

The pressed time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. The pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is being pressed. Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, when the frame button 22 is being pressed, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Then, when the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modified example), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the auto pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during auto pressing. The period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is ON (that is, when the auto-pressing is in progress). Since the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) is executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms while the auto button is pressed. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c counts, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button depression signal is controlled by the sound lamp. It is sent to device 113 . Since the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches the predetermined value (1000), every time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, each time one second elapses), will be sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

By changing the above-described predetermined value, it is possible to vary the interval at which the button depression signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during auto depression. For example, the predetermined value may be 500 or 2000, and the timing of the change may be the timing at which a predetermined operation (again long press, repeated presses, other button presses, etc.) is executed. is the timing of switching. The timing at which the presentation is switched may be notified from the sound lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. FIG.

<Regarding control processing by the frame button control device in the second modification of the second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 192, control processing executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing that is periodically (every 1 ms in this modification) executed by the MPU 291 . This timer interrupt processing is processing for detecting pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating pressing of the frame button 22 to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. Further, when a long press of the frame button 22 is detected, an auto press function is executed, and a pressing signal of the frame button 22 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (one second in this modified example). It is a process to

In the timer interrupt processing, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). In the processing of S6201, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressed time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and the added value of the pressed time counter 293b is It is determined whether or not it is 2000 (S6203).

In the process of S6203, if it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), it means that two seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed, so the auto pressing flag 293a is displayed. is on (S6204).

In the process of S6204, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), it means that the auto-pressing function is not being executed. The auto-pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating pressing of the frame button 22 is output to the sound lamp controller 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. A push signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S6206, and an effect is executed based on the reception of the push signal by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the player is informed that the auto push is set. can be easily recognized. In addition, it is not limited to outputting the press signal, but it is also possible to notify that the auto press has been set, and to execute an effect indicating that the auto press has been set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the notification. may

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6204 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is ON (S6204: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed. Then, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to OFF (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the process of S6204 to S6207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the process of S6201, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208).

In the process of S6208, if it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has been pressed. To output, the process proceeds to S6209. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms) by the process of S6208, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Even if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a period of time (for example, 1 ms), it is possible to accurately detect the pressing of the frame button 22 .

In the processing of S6209, it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the processing of S6209, if it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has been pressed normally. (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6209 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), the processing of S6210 is skipped because the frame button 22 has been long pressed. , S6211.

In the process of S6211, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the processing of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto pressing flag 293a is ON (S6212). In the process of S6212, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is ON (S6212: Yes), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so the value of the period counter 293c is increased by one. (S6213), it is determined whether or not the added value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) (S6214).

In the process of S6214, if it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a press signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the sound lamp controller 113 ( S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processing of S6215 and S6216 is skipped and the processing ends.

In the processing of S6212, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6212: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is not being executed. End the process.

As described above, in the second modified example of the second control example, by performing a predetermined operation (long pressing of the frame button 22), it is possible to switch between ON and OFF of the auto press function. Therefore, since it is not necessary to keep pressing the frame button 22 for a long time in order to execute the auto pressing function, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

The second modified example is configured to transmit a push-down signal to the audio lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the auto push-down function is started. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic pressing has been set. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to outputting the press signal, but may notify that the auto press has been set, and based on the notification, the sound lamp control device 113 may execute an effect indicating that the auto press has been set. may

The second modification is configured to detect normal depression of the frame button 22 and output a depression signal to the sound lamp control device 113 even when the auto depression function is being executed. As a result, even when the auto press function is executed, the player can arbitrarily operate the frame button 22 to change the performance mode, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected when the auto pressing function is being executed. Further, when the auto-pressing function is being executed, the execution of the auto-pressing function may be terminated based on the normal pressing of the frame button 22 . As a result, the execution of the auto press function can be easily terminated, and a gaming machine that is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

In addition, in the second modified example, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the processing of the MPU, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the voltage of the capacitor exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 5 V), it is determined that the button has been pressed long. may

<Other production examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each control example described above will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same points as those of the configuration used in each control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Mission production>
In each control example described above, when a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the sound ramp control device 113, the mission effect is executed. This mission production is a production in which a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a privilege (for example, a jackpot) is awarded when the content of the production executed after that satisfies the command.

In each control example described above, the command display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is composed of command content (first command information) and commander (second command information). And it is configured to be able to store past command displays as a command history. With this configuration, when the mission effect is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display are displayed at the same time. Here, based on the relationship between the current command display and the past (previous) command display, it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not the current mission effect will be successful.

Specifically, if the current and previous command display (first command information and second command information) are the same, it suggests that the mission production this time is likely to succeed. Suggests that the mission production is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, if part of the command display matches (for example, the commander, which is the second command information, matches), it is set to suggest that the probability of success increases if the mission production progresses to the second half. be.

In this way, since the contents of the past mission effects and the current mission effects are set to increase the expectation of a big win, similar effects are repeatedly executed, and the player gets bored with the game. It is possible to turn an easy situation into a situation where one can expect a big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in this mission production, if a command such as "Gather people" is displayed as the command content, the command will fail if the result of the production is "0 people", and "1 person" to "100 people" will be displayed. When the command is successful, the command achievement rate is set (for example, "1 person" means the command achievement rate is 1%, and "100 people" means the command achievement rate is 100%). By setting the command achievement rate, it becomes possible to set the degree of expectation for the big win in more detail. In addition, when the current command display and the previous command display have the same command content as the first command information but the commander as the second command information is different, the effect is executed while the command achievement rate is inherited. It is This makes it possible to change the content of the presentation even if the presentation of the same command content is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the above explanation, the effect is executed based on the previous command display history and the current command display. A selection means is provided for the player to select an arbitrary instruction display from among them. The instruction display selected by the selection means may be displayed on the display screen (third pattern display device 81), and an effect may be executed based on the instruction display selected by the selection means and the current instruction display. good. Further, information corresponding to the past instruction display is displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 as a two-dimensional code so that the player can acquire the information, and the acquired information can be used by the pachinko machine when the next game is executed. 10, the command instructions executed in the past (for example, the previous day) may be handed over and displayed.

<Chance up performance>
In each of the control examples described above, in order to show the degree of expectation that the fluctuating special symbol is winning the jackpot, a partial display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display and reach title name display, background color, etc.) is changed to a different color pattern. As a result, when a similar performance is executed, the player watches the performance while expecting in which color pattern the partial display mode of the performance will be displayed, and soon gets bored with the game. It is restrained.

However, since the above-described partial display mode is displayed at various timings in one effect (for example, 60 seconds), the player may not notice the change in the partial display mode, or may expect to see the effect. As a result, there is a problem that the player feels dissatisfied when the color pattern is not displayed with a high degree of expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, each of the control examples described above has a color pattern advance notification means capable of notifying the player in advance of the color pattern to be displayed in the current effect when the effect is executed. As a result, the player can grasp in advance the colors and patterns to be provided in this production.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, as the color pattern advance notification means, a specific color pattern is automatically selected from among the plurality of color patterns displayed. As a result, a color pattern having a high degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed among the plurality of color patterns once displayed, and the color pattern is selected by the color pattern advance notification means in anticipation that the color pattern will be selected. It is possible to pay attention to the performance to do.

Further, in the color/pattern advance notification means, it is possible to notify a plurality of color/patterns based on the number of partial display mode changes described above. As a result, when a plurality of color patterns with a high degree of expectation for a big hit are notified in advance, the player only needs to pay attention to the performance, suppressing distrust of the game caused by having excessive expectations for each performance. be able to.

In addition, since the plurality of partial display modes described above differ in the degree of expectation for a big hit when the color pattern is changed to the same color pattern, the color pattern pre-announced by the color pattern pre-notification means is the partial display mode. You can watch the production while enjoying whether it will be used for.

<Holding change effect>
In each of the control examples described above, information indicating the number of rights in which the variation of the special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as pending number information) is displayed area (hereinafter, pending display area ) and an area (hereinafter referred to as an execution display area) in which information (hereinafter referred to as execution information) corresponding to the special symbols currently being varied are displayed. Then, the display mode of the reserved pattern representing the reserved number information displayed in the reserved display area by the number of symbols is changed based on the information obtained by prefetching the lottery result of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern, so-called reserved prefetch effect. is configured to be executable.

This pending look-ahead effect has conventionally been configured to change the display mode of the pending symbol when a new variation of the special symbol is started. In this case, it was possible to entertain the player with the pending read-ahead performance when the reserved number information of a predetermined number or more was displayed, but when the pending number is small, the performance should be sufficiently enjoyed. There was a problem that it was not possible to

On the other hand, in the pending change effect of each control example described above, based on the information obtained by prefetching the lottery results of the special symbols corresponding to the pending design, the time required for the pending design to move to the execution display area is used. He is trying to change the display mode of the reserved pattern. As a result, even if the reserved number is small, at least the performance of changing the reserved pattern can be executed by using the time until the variation of the currently executed special pattern is finished.

Specifically, the pending pattern subject to the pending change (for example, the pending pattern displayed in the pending 3) is changed to a character, and the pending pattern changed to the character is a predetermined pending display area (for example, the pending 2 is displayed. A pending change effect is started when displayed (shifted) to the area where the area is displayed (for example, a battle effect). The longer the time until the end of the pending change effect, the more the pending change progresses.

In other words, when the reserved pattern to be subjected to the reserved change shifts to the reserved 2, the length of the reserved change production is based on the fluctuation time of the special pattern being executed and the fluctuation time of the reserved pattern displayed in the reservation 1 is determined. As a result, even if the holding change performance is started in the state of holding 1, the holding change performance can sufficiently proceed with the holding change performance if the fluctuation time of the special symbol currently fluctuating is long.

Also, the end of this pending change effect may be at the timing when the pending symbol targeted for the pending change effect moves to the execution display area, or may be ended before that.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described control examples, when the pending symbol to be subjected to the pending change effect moves to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for the look-ahead effect of the pending pattern displayed in the pending display area in a state where the pending pattern to be subjected to the pending change effect is displayed in the execution display area.

Specifically, the character whose pending pattern has changed and the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area execute the above-described battle effect. By configuring in this way, when the reserved pattern changes to a character in a state where the reserved number is small, the character is used for the pending change effect of the subsequent reserved pattern, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, in the above-described battle presentation, the expectation level may be suggested by a combination of characters to be confronted. Further, it is preferable to set the frequency of the reserved look-ahead effect and the degree of expectation for the big win to be different depending on the type of character displayed near the execution display area.

<Button effect settings>
In each of the control examples described above, as the variation pattern set by the sound lamp control device 114, a plurality of frame button operation presentations in which the frame button 22 can be operated are configured to be executable. Furthermore, although detailed explanation is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set in each of the above-described control examples (for example, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing, , an effect of informing the player of the degree of expectation of the special pattern corresponding to the third pattern which is currently fluctuating by changing the color of light emitted from a plurality of light emitting parts provided in the pachinko machine 10, and a voice lamp. Effects such as changing the decoration mode by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the variation pattern set by the control operation 114). In this way, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executable, the frame button effects are frequently executed, and the player's act of operating the frame button 22 becomes complicated.

On the other hand, means for determining whether or not a plurality of various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set; An interval discriminating means for discriminating intervals of frame button operation performances, and when the intervals of a plurality of frame button operation performances become predetermined intervals by the interval discriminating means, the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled even in the predetermined intervals. A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. Thus, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid so as to straddle the plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

As the above-described interval determining means, specifically, a period during which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and the intervals between the plurality of frame button operation effects are determined based on the set period. A storage means is provided for storing a combination of frame button operation performances in which an interval at which a plurality of frame button operation performances are executed is less than a predetermined amount, and a combination of the frame button operation performances stored in the storage means is provided. is set or not.

Further, as the above-described frame button operation effect setting means, specifically, there are cases where setting is performed such that the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is extended, and where frame button operation effect executed later is set. There are cases in which the effect operation effective period is set to be brought forward, and cases in which a new frame button operation effect is set.

When setting so that the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is extended, the frame button operation effect executed earlier is displayed as the third pattern in a mode in which the operation effective period is extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation valid period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation valid period is specified. When the period (remaining 2 seconds or remaining 0 seconds) is reached, the operation effective period may be displayed to be extended. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not a new frame button operation effect is set until immediately before the previously executed frame button operation effect ends. The button 22 can be continuously operated, and the complicated operation of the frame button 22 by the player can be suppressed.

Further, at the timing when the normal operation effective period is completed, the effect result of the previously executed frame button operation effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and by operating the frame button 22 during the extended operation effective period, You may make it change the display mode of the production|presentation result of the frame button operation production|presentation performed previously displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81. FIG.

When the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later is set to be advanced, the frame button operation effect itself to be executed later may be moved forward, or the frame button operation effect to be executed later may be advanced. may be left as it is, and an operation valid period that is set forward may be used as a preparation period until the start of the frame button operation effect that will be executed later. For example, when a frame button operation effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as a frame button operation effect to be executed later, by executing the repeated hitting operation during the preparation period, the degree of the repeated hitting operation is displayed, During the preparation period, it is possible to turn on the automatic continuous hitting function.

Further, when a new frame button operation effect is set, the frame button operation effect is executed which is unrelated to the frame button operation effect to be executed first and the frame button operation effect to be executed later.

As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation effective period set for the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. By doing so, since the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

As a method of setting the frame button operation effects, it is possible to set a plurality of frame button operation effects when setting one effect, or to set each effect for each effect that may be close to each other. A frame button operation presentation may be set. For example, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during the period until the variation of the third symbol based on the variation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach), the special symbol of this time is expected to be a big hit. degree is displayed in the luminescent color of the decorative lamp provided in the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, in the case of setting a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach), the third pattern is a predetermined dynamic A display mode (for example, SP reach) is configured to be selectable from a plurality (for example, three), and when a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set is selected from among the predetermined dynamic display modes, two The interval at which one frame button operation effect is executed may be a predetermined interval.

In addition, in each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate. means, operation means that reacts when the player touches (detects changes in pressure sensitivity and capacitance), operation means that the player can tilt back and forth, left and right, and rotation operations, etc. Any configuration that allows operation is acceptable. Furthermore, in the above description, the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operation means, but a plurality of devices may be used to constitute the operation means.

Furthermore, in each control described above, a setting method in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period or longer is used as a setting method for setting the state in which the operation means is automatically operated. may be set when the operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operation means is operated in a predetermined procedure. Also, a dedicated device may be provided for automatically switching to a state in which the operating means is being operated.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 218. FIG. In the second control example described above, indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81. A point effect in which a specific effect (e.g., SP reach) is executed when the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (e.g., a display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX), and the display mode of each indicator is changed in the point effect. The point display control for displaying the predetermined value (for example, points) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the second control example will be described. In this third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the second control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference is that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Here, regarding the point effect executed in this control example, differences from the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, there were two types of modes ("normal mode" and "dice mode") used for the point effect. reference).

Furthermore, in the second control example described above, points are evenly allocated to the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the "normal mode", whereas in the present control example, the points are allocated in the "normal mode A". The difference is that points are assigned differently according to the lottery result of special symbols for the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in . Further, in this control example, a detailed description is added of the processing related to the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram for explaining each mode used for the point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of this control example is a effect that is performed while the variation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the display mode of the indicator is the same as the point effect that is executed in the second control example described above. It is an effect that notifies the player that a privilege (a highly expected effect or a big hit) will be given to the player according to.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example consists of four types of modes: "Normal Mode A", "Normal Mode B", "Dice Mode", and "Bingo Mode". A different indicator is displayed in each of these modes, and when the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the indicator is displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator that was displayed in the mode before the transition. It is configured as follows. Specifically, a display mode in which it is confirmed that the privilege 2 (for example, a production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit) will be given before the transition to the point production mode (for example, in the "normal mode A", the rabbit corresponding to When the indicator P1 is in a display mode indicating the maximum value (MAX)), the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is also a display mode in which it is determined that the privilege 2 (a highly expected jackpot effect) is given (for example, In the "dice mode", a display mode showing a double roll) is displayed.

Specifically, the display mode displayed on the indicator is changed to multiple levels (Benefit 1 display mode (big hit confirmation display mode), Benefit 2 display mode (it is confirmed that a production with a high degree of expectation for a big win is given) (display mode) and high standard display mode (display mode indicating a high standard state in which some privilege is almost awarded)), and configured to be distinguishable and memorizable, and when mode transition is made, the discriminative and memorized display is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stage of the mode is set as the initial display mode after the mode shift.

By configuring in this way, when a mode shift occurs during the point production, the player can easily grasp that the benefits obtained in the previous point production are not lost, and the point production is possible. It is possible to diversify the performance by shifting to a different indicator during the game, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

Here, details of each mode used for the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the "normal mode A" used for the point effect in the third control example. This "normal mode A" has the same display mode as the "normal mode" of the point effect explained in the above-described second control example, and only the points different from the above-mentioned "normal mode" will be explained here. , and other explanations are omitted.

In the "normal mode A", three indicators P1 to P3 are used in the same manner as in the "normal mode" used in the point effect of the second control example. In this control example, unlike the above-described second control example, the value of indicator P3 corresponding to "brave man" is set to be higher than indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "rabbit" and "turtle". . Specifically, the benefits given to the player when the indicator value reaches the maximum (MAX) are different. When the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to the "brave man" reaches the maximum (MAX), as a privilege 2, it is notified that the performance (main performance) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit will be shifted. , is configured to notify that the changing special symbol wins the jackpot.

Further, as a display mode (high standard display mode) indicating a high standard state in which a privilege is almost awarded, a display mode is set in which any one of the indicators P1 to P3 indicates the sixth level. As a result, when the mode is shifted when any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is in the display state indicating the sixth level, the display state of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display state indicating the high reference state. It will be.

When "normal mode A" is set as the point effect, the effect of displaying "rabbit", "tortoise", and "brave man" is executed as the third pattern variation effect (main effect). As a result, the effect content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect are related to each other, and the main effect (third symbol variation effect) and the sub effect (point effect) can be combined without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can be displayed (executed).

Next, the "dice mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "dice mode" used for the point effect in the third control example. This "dice mode" has the same display form as the "dice mode" of the point effect explained in the above-described second control example. Other descriptions are omitted.

In the "dice mode", two dice-like indicators P4 and P5 are used as in the "dice mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, it is set so that the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2) is given to the player when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, double eyes). . Specifically, when the indicator P4 and the indicator P5 display the same number (that is, the double display mode), an effect with a high expectation of a big win is given as the privilege 2, and the double display mode is displayed. Among them, in the case of "6.6", as the privilege 1, it is reported that the jackpot has been won.

In the "dice mode", the indicators P4 and P5 imitating the dice are rotated and displayed, and when the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotation display. It does not change to the display mode for showing numbers (that is, the non-double eyes display mode), and a rotating display is performed to suggest whether or not the numbers stopped and displayed in the double eyes display mode will increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the non-double eyes display mode from being stopped and displayed after the double eyes display mode is stopped and displayed once, so that the privilege given to the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

In addition, in the "dice mode", a case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as the high standard display mode. For example, when shifting to the "dice mode" in a state in which the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", the indicator P4 The display mode is fixed to "5", and an effect is executed in which only the indicator P5 is rotated and displayed. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high standard state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the display state of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Furthermore, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is statically displayed at "5", "5.5" is statically displayed when the doublet display mode is displayed. Therefore, after the double roll display mode is stop-displayed, it can be predicted that the double roll display mode "6.6" for notifying that the jackpot is won is near, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Incidentally, when the "dice mode" is set as the point effect, the effect using the dice is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the effect content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect are related to each other, and the main effect (third symbol variation effect) and the sub effect (point effect) can be combined without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can be displayed (executed).

Next, "normal mode B" will be described with reference to FIG. 197(a). FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram showing the "normal mode B" used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "normal mode B", one indicator P6 representing 100% of the whole is used, and the display mode of the indicator P6 is a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode indicating 50% or 100%). It is set so that the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2) is given to the player in the case. Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 50% is displayed, an effect with a high expectation of a big win is provided as the benefit 2, and a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 100% is displayed. At the same time, as a privilege 1, it is notified that the player has won a jackpot.

Further, in the "normal mode B", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to "normal mode B" in a state in which a high-standard display mode (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in "normal mode A", The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to the display mode showing 40%. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high standard state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the display state of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Next, the "bingo mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 197(b). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "bingo mode" used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "bingo mode", an indicator P7 of 9 squares with numbers 1 to 9 is used. A series of performances are executed. Then, it is set so that the privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2) is given to the player when the display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are arranged in a straight line is displayed.

Specifically, when a display mode indicating that two lines of the indicators P7 are aligned is displayed, an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is provided as the privilege 2, indicating that three or more lines of the indicators P7 are aligned. When the display mode is displayed, as a benefit 1, it is reported that the player has won a jackpot.

Further, in the "bingo mode", a display mode is set as a high standard display mode to indicate that one line of indicators P7 has been completed. For example, when shifting to the "bingo mode" in a state in which a high-standard display mode (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to the high standard display mode indicating that one line is aligned. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high standard state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the display state of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

As described above, indicators with different display forms (appearance, number) and display forms (display forms for informing the player that a privilege is given) are used for the plurality of modes used for the point effect in this control example. (P1 to P7) are used, and by switching the mode during execution of the point effect, the effect of the monotonous point effect can be enhanced.

Also, even when the mode is shifted during the point performance, the point performance after the mode shift is executed in a display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode shift, so that the player can easily understand the point performance. can be done.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in a predetermined mode (for example, "normal mode A"), a display mode indicating a low reference value with a low degree of expectation that a privilege will be granted (for example, indicators P1 to P3 are "4. 4.4”), but by shifting to a different mode (for example, “dice mode”) while the display mode is displayed, the player can change the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift. is set to display a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4") indicating that a privilege (for example, privilege 2) is given.

In this way, by shifting to a mode in which the display mode of the indicator indicating that the privilege is to be granted to the player is different, the privilege is granted from the display mode indicating the low reference value with the low expectation that the privilege is granted. (or a high-standard display mode in which the degree of expectation that a privilege is given is high) can be changed without discomfort.

Furthermore, in the final stage of the point production (for example, the state where the special symbol fluctuates three times during the point production), the current mode is in a state where there is a low expectation that the privilege will be given (for example, "normal mode A" In the display mode in which each indicator P1 to P3 indicates a low numerical value), the display mode in which the privilege is granted from the display mode indicating a low reference value with a low expectation for the privilege to be granted (or Since there is a possibility that the mode shifts to a high-standard display mode in which a privilege is given with a high degree of expectation, the player can be entertained with the performance until the end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, mode transition of the point effect in this control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to start from "normal mode A", and the mode change is executed when it is determined that the mode will change as a result of the mode change lottery executed during the point effect. (hereinafter referred to as first mode transition). In addition to the mode transition determination described above, the mode transition is executed based on the result of the suitability determination and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter referred to as second mode transition).

Furthermore, restrictions (i.e., prohibition processing) are set for mode transition destinations based on the result of judgment and display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the point presentation is reduced by executing the mode transition. Prevents incidents from occurring.

First, in "normal mode A", "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode" are set as transition destinations of the first mode transition as shown in FIG. to the mode set as the transition destination. That is, the "normal mode A", which is set as the first mode when the point effect is executed, is set so as to be able to shift to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

Here, the above-described first mode shift is executed, and if the display mode before the mode shift is the display mode for notifying that the privilege 2 is given, the display mode after the mode shift also informs that the privilege 2 is given. If the display mode is displayed in the display mode and the display mode before the mode shift is the display mode indicating the high standard (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in the display mode indicating the high standard (high standard display mode). be done. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the status (display mode) of the indicator in an easy-to-understand manner even when the mode transition is executed in the middle of the point presentation.

Further, this "normal mode A" is a second mode transition, in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, "4.4.4") in which all of the indicators P1 to P3 are in the same display mode, the "dice mode ” is configured so that it can be migrated to In this case, in the "dice mode" after the mode shift, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same display mode (eg, "3.3") with the same result (that is, double rolls). In this way, by executing both the first mode transition executed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition executed based on the display mode, the mode transition is executed in various situations in the point effect. This makes it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the "normal mode A", when the transition condition for the first mode transition and the transition condition for the second mode transition are satisfied at the same time, the second mode transition is preferentially executed. This is because the mode transition based on the judgment result of the special symbol is likely to be set as the second mode transition, in contrast to the first mode transition for enhancing the effect. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the "normal mode A", if the lottery result of the special symbol (result of winning or not judging) wins a jackpot, the transition condition for transitioning to the second mode is likely to be established. is configured to In other words, when the second mode transition condition is established, a big win can be expected. It becomes possible to execute a mode transition that gives hope.

In this way, in the point effect capable of switching between a plurality of modes, the establishment conditions of the plurality of mode transition conditions are set so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is different, and furthermore, when a plurality of mode transition conditions are satisfied at the same time, the jackpot is awarded. By executing the mode transition based on the establishment of the mode transition condition with the higher winning expectation, the mode transition during the point performance can be executed as a performance in which the player expects a big win, and the performance effect is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

Next, when the mode set during the point effect is the "dice mode", the "normal mode A" or the "bingo mode" is set as the transition to the first mode. That is, the "dice mode" is set so as not to shift to the "normal mode B". This is a preset prohibition processing, and for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to associate the display state of the indicator before the mode transition with the display state of the indicator after the mode transition, the first mode is used. It is set so that mode transition is not performed even when the transition condition for transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won). As a result, even if the mode transition is executed during the point presentation, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Also, when shifting from "dice mode" to "normal mode A", in this point effect, "normal mode A" that was displayed when shifting from "normal mode A" to "dice mode" The display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 is set so as not to be lower than the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 (so that the numerical value of each indicator does not decrease). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the display mode of the mode transition destination can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode transition is executed a plurality of times during one point presentation and the mode is transitioned again to the initially set mode. A limit (for example, one time) may be set on the number of mode transitions executed during one point presentation so that the mode transition to the already displayed mode is not performed during one point presentation.

If "Normal Mode B" is set, only "Normal Mode A" is set as the transition destination when the transition conditions for the first mode transition are satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), and " When "Bingo Mode" is set, only "Normal Mode B" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for transition to the first mode is satisfied.

As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in this control example is an effect that is easy for the player to understand due to a plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and also gives the player expectations.

In addition, in this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the judgment result of the special symbol and the display mode of the indicator) is set only to "normal mode A", but even if it is set in other modes good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, and an upper limit (for example, once) may be set for the number of mode transitions executed in one point presentation. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the presentation effect of the mode transition during the point presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the display mode of the indicator in the point effect will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a point display method. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of layers are superimposed to create the image (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer for displaying a character image of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) among a plurality of layers, and FIG. Among them, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer that displays a point image (secondary effect), and FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image that has been obtained.

As shown in FIG. 198(a), the layer for displaying character images is divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small areas where the characters are displayed are (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) and a small area (Dm11) where no character is displayed are discriminated, and image processing is performed so that the small area (Dm11) where no character is displayed is transparent.

Further, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the layer displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, similarly to the layer displaying the character image. A point display process is executed to display points for all the small areas. In this point display process, a command indicating the number of points output from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, and point images indicating the corresponding number of points are displayed in all the small areas.

Then, by creating an image for each layer, only a small area (Dm11) in which no character is displayed in the character image is synthesized behind the layer displaying the character image, as shown in FIG. 198(c). The layer displaying the point image becomes visible, and the point can be displayed at a position that does not interfere with the character image.

By executing the image creation process described above, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when executing the point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, there is only one small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, the allowable area where point display is possible. is executed, but if there are a plurality of small areas in which the character is not displayed, a process of selecting one small area from among them should be executed. For example, the type of the character image (main image) displayed as the third pattern variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character imitating a hero as a character associated with the point effect indicator) Dc1) is displayed (small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, Dm32 in the case of FIG. 198(a)) adjacent to the allowable area. This makes it possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player watching the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

Also, the point display is made visible to the player by making one of the allowable areas, which are small areas in which the character image is not displayed, transparent among the layers displaying the character image, but other control methods may be used. . For example, in the image to be created this time, a small area in which a character is displayed but will not be displayed later may be discriminated, and transparency processing may be performed at the timing when the character is not displayed in that small area. By configuring in this way, a time lag can be provided between the reception of a command for point display and the actual display of points, and the presentation effect of point display can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the points are displayed based on the movement of the moving character in the third symbol variation effect, the display ( production) can be executed, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

In the case of using such a control method, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters face each other is executed, and a friendly character (for example, character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. Points are displayed when the attack is performed, and points are not displayed when the enemy character (for example, character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, or the value is lower than the points displayed when an ally attacks (the numerical value less) points should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect as the main effect and the point effect as the sub-effect are more related, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

In the control example described above, the number of points having the same value is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. Also, the point display method described in the second control example may be used.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208. FIG. First, referring to FIGS. 199 to 205, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described.

FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 in this control example includes an internal level selection table 222aa, an internal score selection table 222ab, a number of times selection table 222ac, a use score selection table 222ad, and a final score selection table 222ad. The difference is that a display mode selection table 222ae, a character selection table 222af, a mode selection table 222ag, and a display mode selection table 222ae are added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Details of the internal level selection table 222aa will now be described with reference to FIG. 200(a). FIG. 200(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the result of determination of the current special figure variation, the result of determination of the winning information currently retained and stored, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Table for selecting inner levels. In addition, the success/failure determination result in the special figure variation this time is determined based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the success/failure determination result of the winning information currently retained and stored is output from the main controller 110. It is determined based on the winning command.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referenced in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the later-described point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the current success/failure determination result is "hit", the success/failure determination result in the pending state is "hit", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level is "3". ' is selected, and if '150 to 198', the internal level '2' is selected, the result of the hit/fail judgment this time is 'hit', and the result of the hit/fail judgment in the hold is 'miss', and the production If the value of the counter 223f is "0-149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if it is "150-198", the internal level "1" is selected. In addition, if the current success/failure determination result is "miss", the success/failure determination result in the pending state is "hit", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, the current success/failure determination result is "miss", and the success/failure determination result in the hold is "miss", and the production counter 223f If the value is '0-149', the internal level '1' is selected, and if the value is '150-198', the internal level '2' is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected by the internal level selection table 222aa is such that a high numerical value is selected according to an advantageous state (for example, a state in which a jackpot has been won) in which the game state is advantageous to the game. is configured to By thus providing an index (internal level) corresponding to the game state and executing the performance based on the index, the degree of expectation that the game state will be in an advantageous state for each performance to be executed can be easily set. be able to.

Next, details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 200(b). FIG. 200(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table referred to when selecting an internal score to be used when executing a point effect based on the internal level and the value of the effect counter 223f. is.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level is "2" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0-99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and when it is "100-198", "6" is selected as the internal score. . When the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal score is "4", and when it is "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". is selected.

As described above, in this control example, the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the value of the internal level set corresponding to the game state. It is possible to execute a point production that gives

Next, the frequency selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 201(a). FIG. 201(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the frequency selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201(a), in the number of times selection table 222ac, a number of times selection table for win 222ac1 and a number of times for loss selection table 222ac2 are set. This frequency selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in which the point effect is continuously executed). Different selection tables are referred to depending on the result of the win/fail determination or the result of the win/fail determination for the winning information that has been reserved and stored.

FIG. 201(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-wins selection table 222ac1. The number-of-wins selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of times of the point production to be executed when the result of the win/fail judgment is a win, and the point production ends when the special symbol changes as the result of the win/fail judgment. The number of point effects is selected. Specifically, if the result of the determination of whether or not this special symbol variation is a win, the number of point effects is "1 time", and the special symbol variation after one rotation (that is, after the end of this special symbol variation). When the result of the judgment of whether the game is a win, "twice" is selected as the number of point effects, and when the result of the judgment of the special symbol variation after two rotations is a win, "three times" is selected.

In this way, by setting the number of times of the point performance based on the timing at which the special pattern variation to be the winning is executed, it is possible to suppress the start of the winning game in the middle of the point performance, thereby reducing the point performance. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

FIG. 201(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-outliers selection table 222ac2. This loss frequency selection table 222ac2 is executed when the result of winning/failure determination is a failure (that is, when the result of winning/failing determination corresponding to the winning information that is stored withholding the winning/failure determination result of this special symbol variation is not hit). A table for selecting the number of times of point effects, wherein the number of times of point effects is selected based on the number of winning prize information retained and stored (hereinafter referred to as the number of retained balls).

Specifically, when the number of pending balls is "0", "-" is set as the number of point effects. This is for preventing the execution of the point effect even if the set variation pattern command is a command for executing the point effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the point performance that can be executed across multiple special symbol variations in a state where the result of the judgment is wrong and the number of reserved balls is "0". Therefore, the performance effect of the point performance to be executed can be enhanced. In addition, in this control example, the winning/failure determination result is out, and furthermore, the point effect is not executed in the state where the number of pending balls is "0", but other configurations may be used, for example. , the point effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (10%).

When the number of pending balls is "1", the number of point effects is "2", and when the number of pending balls is "2", the number of point effects is "3" and the number of pending balls is "3". , "4" is set as the number of point effects. In this way, by selecting the number of point effects using the number of pending balls when the point effect is executed, the point effect when the result of the hit/fail judgment is wrong and the point effect when the result of the hit/fail decision is hit. can be suppressed from being judged by the player based on the number of point presentations.

In addition, in this control example, if the success/failure determination result is hit, the number of point effects is selected based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that the success/failure determination result is hit is executed. Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of pending balls when the point effect is executed, another configuration may be used. For example, in the point effect when the success/failure determination result is out, the number of pending balls may be set as the maximum number of point effects, and the number of times may be selected by lottery within that range. By configuring in this way, the number of point presentations can be set more complicatedly.

Next, the used score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. 202(a). FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the used score selection table 222ad. This use score selection table 222ad is for selecting the score to be used in each round of the point presentation, and as shown in FIG. and the remaining internal score.

Specifically, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", the used score is "1", and when the remaining score is "5", the used score is When the remaining score is "6", "3" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the used score. In addition, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "3" and the remaining score is "3", the used score is "1", and when the remaining score is "4", the used score is "2". , if the remaining score is "5", "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "6", "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", , "-" is selected as the use score.

Furthermore, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the used score is "1", and when the remaining score is "3", the used score is "2". , if the remaining score is "4", the used score is "3"; if the remaining score is "5", the used score is "4"; if the remaining score is "6", use When the score is "5" and the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the used score. In addition, when the counter value of the effect number counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the used score is "1", and when the remaining score is "2", the used score is "2". , if the remaining score is "3", "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "4", "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "5", , when the used score is "5" and the remaining score is "6", "6" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "7" is selected as the used score.

In this way, based on the remaining number of point effects and the remaining score, the number of times the point effect continues (the number of times the special symbol changes ) is suppressed from being grasped in advance by the player.

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. 202(b). FIG. 202(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202(b), the final display mode selection table 222ae includes a final first display mode selection table 222ae1, a final second display mode selection table 222ae2, a final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and a final fourth display mode. A mode selection table 222ae4 is set.

This final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point effect, and is a table that selects the final display mode of each mode when the point effect is executed. It is configured to display the final display mode corresponding to the mode selected in advance and set in the final stage of the point production (fluctuation of the final special symbol in which the point production is executed).

FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. This final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode A", and the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f Based on this, the final display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. , in the case of "50 to 99", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.7" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4 4” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”, a display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate “7.7.7” is selected. In other words, when the internal score "7" selected only when the special symbol variation of this time wins a jackpot is selected, the final display mode has a higher value than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2). It is set so that the final display mode in which the scored indicator (indicator P3) has the maximum value is selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.6.5" is selected, and " 50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.4" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.4.7 " is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the effect When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "6.3.1" is selected. When the display mode indicating "5.5.3" is selected and "100 to 149" is selected, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.2" is selected and "150 to 198" is selected. In the case of , a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected, and "50 99", the indicator P1-P3 is selected to indicate "5.5.1", and in the case of "100-149", the indicator P1-P3 is "5.4.3". is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the change in the display mode of each indicator in the "normal mode A" is differentiated. By changing the display mode so that the specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a higher value, the expectation of winning can be increased.

In addition, in the point effect of this control example, the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage includes the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, and the Since the indicator is selected based on the score, the value of the indicator with the higher numerical value of the final display mode (the closer the display mode is to the maximum value), the easier the value increases in the middle stage. Therefore, by grasping the degree of rise of the indicator in the middle stage of the point presentation, the final display mode can be predicted, so that the point presentation can be continuously observed.

FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "dice mode", and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Then, the final display mode of each indicator P4 and P5 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected. In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4" is selected. If the mode is selected and the value is "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. In other words, when the internal score "7" selected only when the special symbol variation of this time wins a jackpot, the final display mode is the indicator display mode in which a high value score is given. "6.6" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.3" is selected, and "50 to In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the indicator P4 and P5 indicate "2.2", the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198". 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.2" is selected. In the case of "100 to 149", a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1". is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and "50 to 99 , the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149," the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected. , and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the combination of the display modes of the indicators in the "dice mode" is determined according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference as to whether or not it becomes an eye.

FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. This final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode B", and the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f Based on this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "100%" is selected, and "150 to 198 , the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected. In other words, when the internal score "7" selected only when the special symbol variation of this time wins a jackpot, the final display mode is the indicator display mode in which a high value score is given. "100%" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0-49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and the display mode of "50-149" is selected. , a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected, and the internal score is "5". When the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected. %” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “70%” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”, the indicator P6 indicates “80%”. %” is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the indicator P6 selects the display mode indicating "40%", and when the value is "50 to 99". , a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "60%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", , a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of the indicator in "normal mode B" is finally changed according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference in how far it rises.

Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. This character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point effect is being executed in the "normal mode A", and it appears to suggest which of the indicators P1 to P3 changes the display mode. This is a table for selecting characters (mini-characters for sub-effect (see FIG. 163)).

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "Hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", "Tortoise" is selected as the character. In other words, when the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, is selected, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes, so the character "hero" ” is set to be easily selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 149", the character is If "Rabbit" is selected and the value is "150-198", then "Tortoise" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0-49". selects "brave" as the character, "50-99" selects "rabbit" as the character, and "100-198" selects "tortoise" as the character.

Furthermore, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the character "rabbit" is selected, and when the value is "100 to 198", the character " tortoise” is selected.

In this way, by selecting a character that suggests an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the character displayed this time is selected. It is possible to predict whether or not the point effect of is the point effect to be executed when the result of winning/failure determination is a win, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage of the point effect in which the "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. there is As a result, it is possible to associate the display of the character with the change in the display mode of the indicator, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 199, the description continues. The mode selection table 222ag is a table referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during the point effect. This mode selection table 222ag is referred to (S6406 in FIG. 212) when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is on (S6406 in FIG. 212: Yes) in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212).

In this mode selection table 222ag, destination modes are set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode is set so as not to be selected if the mode is prohibited as a mode transition destination. As a result, it is possible to prevent mode transitions between modes in which it is difficult to find out the relationship between the display modes of the indicators displayed corresponding to the respective modes.

The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator to be displayed at the mode transition destination. The display mode selection table 222ah is referred to when determining the display mode in the display mode selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 in FIG. 213).

In this display mode selection table 222ah, it is selected whether or not to change the display mode to the "high expectation mode" based on the internal score set in the current point presentation and the value of the presentation counter. This "high expectation form" is a display form for informing the player that the current point effect is a point effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win.

Specifically, it is a display form in which the outer shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)". . It should be noted that it is preferable to set common contents for each indicator (P1 to P7) for this "high expectation mode". As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the "high expectation mode" is displayed regardless of which mode the game is shifted to in which point presentation.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display form of only the indicator that is displayed when the mode transition is executed, the player expects that the mode transition will be executed during the point presentation. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Returning to FIG. 199, the description continues. FIG. 199(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199(b), the RAM 223 in this control example has an internal level storage area 223aa, a continuous effect start flag 223ab, a effect count counter 223ac, a score information storage area 223ad, a remaining score, and an internal level storage area 223aa. The difference is that an information storage area 223ae, a display information storage area 223af, a score presentation temporary storage area 223ag, a mode information storage area 223ah, a mode transition flag 223ai, and a character information storage area 223aj are added, but other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In this control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter updates its value independently. do. Therefore, even if a process that refers to the value of the effect counter 223f is executed in a plurality of places in one control process routine, actually different counter values are acquired in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In the internal level storage area 223aa, the internal level determined based on the win/loss determination result and the internal level selection table 222aa in the initial point effect setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211). Then, the set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210), when the point effect ends If so (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information about the internal level is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not the point effect, which is a continuous effect, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point effect is being executed. Indicates that it is not running. This continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) after the next time, it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed when starting the continuous effect. (S6301 in FIG. 210), when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), it is set to OFF (S6313 in FIG. 210).

The number-of-effects counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of consecutive effects (point effects) to be executed this time. This number-of-effects counter 223ac is set to a value corresponding to the determined number of times of effect in the initial point effect setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211). 1 is subtracted each time the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) is executed (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the number-of-effects counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when it is determined whether point effects, which are continuous effects, are being performed (S2051 in FIG. 209), and the point effect setting process ( 210), it is referenced when determining whether or not the continuous effect ends (S6307 in FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the use score to be used in this change is determined It is referred to when doing so (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing internal scores selected in the internal score selection table 222ab and used scores selected in the used score selection table 222ad. This score information storage area 223ad is set with the internal score determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). A use score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when determining the final display mode (S6355 in FIG. 211) in the initial point effect setting process (see FIG. 211), and the character is displayed. It is referred to when determining (S6356 in FIG. 211), and is referred to when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). Also, the use score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when the remaining score information is updated in the point presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214). When the value of the number-of-effects counter 223ac is greater than 1 (S6503 in FIG. 214: No), it is referred to when determining the display mode (S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the used score already used from the internal score set for the continuous effect (point effect) currently being executed. This remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the use score (S6501 in FIG. 214) in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point effect, which is a continuous effect, and the display mode to be displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). This display information storage area 223af is configured so that a display mode for a mode other than the currently set mode can be set. configured to be displayed.

The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect in order to output them to the display control device 114 with one display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag temporarily stores information about the display mode (color, pattern, etc. of the indicator) determined in the display mode change process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information about the display mode (display mode displayed after mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and information about the determined display mode is stored in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). is temporarily stored (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214), referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information on various effects is initialized ( S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. This mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the information corresponding to the mode after the transition (S6409 in FIG. 212) when the mode transition is performed in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212), and the background command for display is set. (S6410 in FIG. 212), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), it is referred to when determining the display mode (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point effect is preset to start from "normal mode A", when the point effect is executed, information corresponding to "normal mode A" is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is stored.

The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether or not a mode transition condition (a condition for establishing a first mode transition) is established during point production, which is a continuous production. If it is OFF, it indicates that the mode transition condition is not met. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is a mode transition in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes). In the processing (see FIG. 212), it is referred to determine whether the mode transition condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and when the processing related to mode transition (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed, the switch is turned off. set.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in this special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). After that, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the mode transition is to be executed (S6509 in FIG. 214). The transition flag 223ai is set to ON. Then, in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212) executed in the variation display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. (S6406 in FIG. 212), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406 in FIG. 212: Yes), processing related to mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

That is, in the point effect in this control example, since it is configured so that the mode shift is performed when the next special symbol variation is executed, for example, the lottery of whether to execute the mode transition is selected for this special symbol variation. By constructing a lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by, the player is made to recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol variation, and the mode shifts at the next special symbol variation. can be expected to be executed.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information about the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in the character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to suggest which of the indicators P1 to P3 changes its display mode when the "normal mode A" is set. is. This character information storage area 223aj is set with information related to the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211), and is used when setting the display point effect command in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). In this control example, a character is displayed to indicate whether the display mode of the indicator changes only in "normal mode A". Alternatively, character information may be used to suggest whether or not to switch modes. In this case, for example, if a mode other than "normal mode A" is set, the characters stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect will shift to the "normal mode A".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described with respect to the differences from the control examples described above. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those of the control examples described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example writes detailed information corresponding to the point behind the character in the image for one frame when generating the drawing list as shown in FIG. The difference is that they are set as follows. By generating the drawing list in this way, it is possible to create the point display image described above with reference to FIG.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), but other points are the same. is. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 209, variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 3 in the third control example. In this variable display setting process 3, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above.

When the processing of S2006 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2051: No), the set It is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command is for executing a point effect (S2052). Here, when it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and after the process of S2053 is completed, the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2051, if it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, if the point effect is already being executed, the process of S2052 is not performed and S2053 is performed. to process. This prevents a new point effect from being executed while the point effect is being executed.

Also, in the process of S2052, if it is determined that the variation pattern command does not execute the point effect (S2052: No), and if the process of S2053 is finished, the variation in the second control example described above As in the display setting process 2, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) determines the display mode of the point effect, and transmits to the display control device 114 a display point effect command for executing the point effect in the determined display mode. processing.

In the point effect setting process 2 (S2053), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect start flag 223ab is ON (S6301). When it is determined to be OFF (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6302), and the point effect initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), since the point effect which is the continuous effect is already executed, the point effect The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6304.

Here, with reference to FIG. 211, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) is for executing the point effect, and various This is a process for executing initial setting.

When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined by referring to the internal level selection table 222aa and set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). As a result, it is determined whether or not the point effect to be executed this time is the point effect leading to the winning of the special symbol.

Next, at S6351, the internal score selection table 222ab is referenced based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa and the value of the effect counter 223f to determine the internal score to be used in the point effect to be executed this time. , is set in the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting the final display mode in the point effect and character setting as described above. In addition, it is also used to set the used score and the remaining score to be used each time the special symbol changes while the point effect is continuing.

When the processing of S6352 is completed, the number of times of effect of the present point effect is determined based on the number of times selection table 222ac (S6353), and the value corresponding to the determined number of times of effect is set in the number of times of effect counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number-of-times selection table 222ac refers to different tables depending on whether the result of the win/loss determination is a win or a loss.

Specifically, when the winning prize information corresponding to the pending storage executed after three rotations is a win, the number-of-wins selection table 222ac1 is referred to, and "4" is determined as the number of effects. Then, as a value corresponding to the number of times of effect "4", 4 is set in the number of times of effect counter 223ac. The value of this number-of-effects counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is executed, and is decremented until the value of the counter becomes "0".

Next, based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, the display mode of each indicator to be finally displayed in this point presentation is determined, and the display information storage area 223af Set (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to four modes ("normal mode A", "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode") to be shifted during the point presentation. In this process, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. As a result, an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score can be displayed regardless of which mode the point presentation ends.

After the processing of S6355 is finished, the character to be used when the point presentation mode is set to "normal mode A" is determined based on the internal score set by the processing of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and the character information is displayed. It is set in the storage area 223aj (S6356), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most aspects including the final display aspect of the point effect to be executed this time are set. By setting the mode of the point performance in advance in this way, it is possible to proceed with the mode of the point performance in the middle stage in accordance with the final display mode, thereby suppressing the sense of incompatibility given to the player. can be executed.

In this control example, the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode. However, the display mode of other indicators may be set randomly. As a result, the display mode of each indicator in the point effect can be made more diverse, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In this case, it is preferable to execute a prohibition process so as not to notify that a privilege that is not actually given in a randomly set display mode is given. As a result, it is possible to execute a point effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, the internal level is set based on the result of winning/failure determination when the point effect is executed. can be By configuring in this way, the internal level can be used even when setting the effect mode of the effect other than the point effect, and the effect that the effect corresponding to the game state of the special symbol can be easily set. be.

Furthermore, in this control example, the success/failure determination result is determined by referring not only to the special symbol to be executed this time but also to the winning information retained and stored. A decision result may be determined and an internal level may be set.

Returning to FIG. 210, the description continues. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is finished, then mode transition process (S6304) is executed. In this mode transition process (S6304), a process of determining whether the mode is to be transitioned during the point effect and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode is transitioned are executed.

Here, the mode transition processing (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing mode transition processing (S6304). In the point effect in this control example, as a result of a predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214) to be described later), when it is determined that the mode will be changed (the mode change flag 223ai is turned on) , and mode transition based on the set mode, current display mode, or internal score.

In this way, the mode transition that is randomly performed by lottery and the mode transition that is performed when the mode transition condition (for example, the display mode) is satisfied are performed in combination, so that the mode that is performed during the point effect It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the probability of winning is high (the internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is displayed in the "normal mode A". It is configured to shift to the "dice mode" when it becomes a die ("2.2.2" or "4.4.4"). This is a situation in which benefits that are advantageous to the player in the "normal mode A" (for example, notification that a performance with high expectations for a big win will be executed, notification that a big win has been won) are difficult to be given. Even if the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 have not reached the maximum value, when a predetermined display mode (double display mode) is achieved, benefits that are advantageous to the player are likely to be given. This is to make the state. As a result, even when the display state of the indicator is not good in the point effect (for example, in the case of "normal mode A", the points do not increase), the mode transition provides benefits that are advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to raise the given degree of expectation, the player can be entertained with the performance until the end.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 is double in the "normal mode A", the player is given a privilege that the display mode of the double is advantageous to the player. , it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation without making the player feel uncomfortable with the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the description continues. When the mode transition processing (S6304) is executed, first, the currently set mode information is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is "normal mode A". (S6402). If it is determined that the currently set mode is "normal mode A" (S6402: Yes), then the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is "2.2. 2” or “4.4.4” (S6403).

In the process of S6403, if it is determined that the current display mode is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is "6" or higher. It is determined (S6404), and if it is determined to be "6" or more (S6404: Yes), the "dice mode" is set (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, in the process of S6404, if it is determined that the number is not "6" or more ("5" or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to OFF (S6411), and this process ends. do.

If it is determined in the process of S6402 that the currently set mode is not "normal mode A" (S6402: No), or in the process of S6403, if the current display mode is "2.2.2 or "4.4.4" (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

This mode transition flag 223ai is a flag that is set in the point effect mode setting process (S6305), which will be described later. ) in the mode transition processing (S6304 in FIG. 212), and the mode transition is executed.

In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S6409: No), this process ends.

Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the process of S6407 will be described. This mode selection table 222ag selects a destination mode based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. Note that this mode transition is provided with a rule to limit the mode transition (see FIG. 195). It is set so that the mode is not changed to the "dice mode" while the "bingo mode" is set.

This prohibition process is intended to prevent the display state of the indicator from being changed due to the mode transition during the point presentation, resulting in an presentation that is difficult for the player to understand. By configuring in this way, the advantage of mode transition in the point production (the point that the player can have expectations until the end of the production by changing the display mode of the indicator according to the mode transition) is utilized. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the demerit (the effect that the player cannot understand due to the change in the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition).

Returning to FIG. 212, the description continues. After the process of S6405 or the process of S6407 is finished, the display mode change process (S6408) is executed. This display mode change processing (S6408) is processing for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition.

Next, this display mode change processing (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing display mode change processing (S6408). This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator to be displayed after mode transition based on the display mode of the indicator before mode transition. display mode (display mode for informing the player that a privilege is granted or a display mode similar to the display mode for informing the player that a privilege is granted), and the determination result The display mode after mode transition is set based on.

When the display mode change process (S6408) is executed, first, the display mode is determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). This display form selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after mode transition based on the value of the internal score set in the current point effect and the effect counter 223f. As a result, when the mode is shifted in the point production, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift but also to the display form (color, pattern), and the production effect can be further enhanced. .

In addition, even if the mode transition is executed in the early stage of the point production, that is, in a state where the display mode of the indicator is significantly different from the final display mode, the indicator is displayed based on the internal score set in the point production. Since the display form is set, it is possible to execute an effect that raises the expectation of a big win.

After the processing of S6451 is finished, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is compatible with SP reach (S6453). This SP reach correspondence is a display mode for notifying that an effect (SP reach) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit will be executed. If the display mode is the maximum value (MAX) and if it is "dice mode", if the display mode is "normal mode B" if the indicators P4 and P5 are "double (excluding 6.6)" In the display mode, the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", and if the "bingo mode", the indicator P7 is the display mode "2 lines established".

In the processing of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is compatible with SP reach (S6453: Yes), the display mode corresponding to SP reach is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454), End this process. That is, if the display mode before the mode shift is the display mode corresponding to the SP reach, the display mode after the mode shift is also set to the display mode corresponding to the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the benefit (announcement that SP reach is executed) displayed before the mode shift disappears after the mode shift (a display mode that does not support SP reach is displayed). It is possible to execute a suitable production that does not dissatisfy the customer.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6453, if it is determined that the current display mode is not compatible with SP reach (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode that corresponds to the high standard. (S6455). As described above, the high standard is set as a display mode similar to the display mode of the indicator, which is not a display mode that gives a privilege to the player.

Specifically, if the "normal mode A", the display mode of any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is "6", and if the "dice mode", the number of the indicator P4 is "5". In this display mode, the indicator P6 is "40%" in the "normal mode B".

With this configuration, even if the mode shift occurs during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is greatly different from the display mode of the indicator displayed in the previous point effect. It is possible to suppress the storage.

For example, in the "normal mode A", when the mode shift is executed in a state where the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates "6" is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard, and the mode is shifted to the "bingo mode" , the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode shift becomes a display mode indicating "1 line established". Therefore, it is possible to execute the point effect after the mode transition while maintaining the player's expectation that the privilege will be given before the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 213, the description continues. In the process of S6455, when it is determined that the current display mode is the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode shift is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is determined. (S6456), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the current display mode does not indicate a high standard (S6455: No), a display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the point effect in this control example, when the mode transition is executed, the display manner of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display manner of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. Then, when the mode transition is executed while the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, a display mode similar to a display mode for notifying that a privilege is given to the player is discriminated and stored as a high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In this case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high standard value, the player will be notified that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode shift is executed in a state of paying attention to the point performance with anticipation, since the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in a display mode showing the high reference value, the sense of expectation can be maintained.

In this control example, the display mode is stored so that the display mode is not a display mode for notifying that the privilege is given, and the display mode is stored in two stages, high standard and other, but it is divided into three stages or more. may be configured to store the display mode. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the difference between the display state of the indicator before the mode transition and the display state of the indicator after the mode transition.

In addition, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the meaning is equivalent to the display mode before the mode transition. Although the display mode of the indicator after mode transition is displayed in the display mode with A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode shift. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the description continues. When the display mode change processing (S6408 in FIG. 213) is completed, then the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is changed. is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to OFF (S6411), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 210, the description continues. When the mode transition processing (S6304) is finished, next point effect mode setting processing (S6305) is executed. This point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator to be changed in the variable display to be executed this time.

Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the point effect mode setting process (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the use score selection table 222ad is referred to using the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the effect count counter 223ac, and this time is determined (S6501).

Then, based on the determined used score, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated (S6502). Specifically, a value obtained by subtracting the used score to be used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new remaining score information.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and if it is determined to be 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, if the point effect is the last, the display information storage area 223af and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, the final display mode is determined and set in the score presentation temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, the point effect command for display is set (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S6503, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the use score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set. Based on the final display mode and the current display mode, the current display mode is determined and set in the score presentation temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), next it is determined whether or not the mode transition is to be executed (S6509), and if it is determined that there is a mode transition (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no mode transition (S6509: No), the above-described S6505 and S6506 are executed without setting the mode transition flag 223ai to ON, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 210, the description continues. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) ends, the value of the effect number counter 223ac is decremented by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223ac after the subtraction is "0" or less. (S6307). If it is determined that the value is not less than "0" (is greater than or equal to 1) (S6307: No), the point effect is to be continued, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6307 that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), the point effect will end at this time, so the score information storage area 223ad clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa. Then (S6312), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this processing ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Display Control 114 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. FIG. This control example is different from the above-described second control example in that point effect related command processing is added in command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 215), and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3. FIG. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

Then, if it is determined in the processing of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not a display point effect related command has been received (S2637).

In the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point effect-related command has not been received (S2637: No), various processes described in the control examples described above are executed as other command processes (S2614), End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2637 that the point effect related command for display has been received (S2637: Yes), the point effect related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 216(a), point effect related command processing will be described. FIG. 216(a) is a flow chart showing the point effect related command process (S2638). This point effect-related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands relating to point effects are output from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the point effect-related command process (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display point command (S6601). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command Execute the process (S6602) and move to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command processing (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603), and if it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), indicator command processing (S6604) is executed to If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this processing ends.

Next, the point command processing (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. 216(b). FIG. 216(b) is a flow chart showing the point command processing (S6602). This point command process (S6602) is to execute the process corresponding to the point command received from the sound lamp control device 113. During the point effect, a point suggesting change in the display mode of each indicator (see FIG. 198) is executed. ) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the point command process (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is transferred from the data table storage area 233b. It is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the point command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing 3 is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, indicator command processing (S6604) executed in the point effect related command processing (see FIG. 216(a)) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). This indicator command processing (S6604) executes processing corresponding to the indicator command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and is processing for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, an effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to indicator display mode information (for example, display mode and set mode) indicated by the display indicator command is determined, The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6751, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. (S6754). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6755), the point command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing 3 is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a modification of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 will be described. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of point display in the third control example. FIG. 218(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (secondary effect) among the plurality of layers in this modification, and FIG. FIG. 218(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image in which layers are combined, and FIG. 218(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218(b) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), in a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) displaying character images, points are placed at different display positions (display positions within each small area). Data that can be displayed is stored. Among them, a point display process is executed to set a small area corresponding to the main effect to be executed this time and to display the points of the set small area. An image obtained by synthesizing the layer displaying the point image and the layer displaying the character image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 218(b)).

As shown in FIG. 218(b), in the image in which the two characters (Dc1 and Dc2) are facing each other when the main effect is started, the point executed in the point display process (displayed in the small area Dm31) Display processing is performed so that the points received) overlap with the character Dc1 and the player cannot visually recognize the display of the points.

After that, the main effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218(c), when the character Dc1 moves, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player. In this case, as the main effect, a plurality of action patterns such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) are set from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured such that whether or not points are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the content of progress. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect as the main effect and the point effect as the sub-effect are more related, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

In this control example, the small area where the point display is performed is specified based on the effect pattern of the main effect. pattern) can be set, points may be displayed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 218(b), display processing is performed so that points are displayed in advance in both the small area Dm31 overlapping with the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping with the character Dc2. You may make it display the point corresponding to the operation pattern set as. In this case, the point value (number) displayed when the friendly character Dc1 moves is different from the point value (number) displayed when the enemy character Dc2 moves. It is recommended that you set the display settings to

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to associate the action pattern in the main effect with the value of the points to be displayed, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

As described above, in this control example, when each display content of the point effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 has been executed, when performing point display on the third pattern display device 81 or changing the display mode of the indicator, each command is executed. It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

Therefore, a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output every time, and when a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output, Since there is no need to cause the display control device 114 to perform processing such as rewriting display data, the control load can be reduced.

In this control example, the point command for display and the indicator command for display are output separately from the fluctuation pattern command for display. , may be configured to output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 .

As described above, in the point effect in the third control example, when the mode transition is executed, the display manner of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display manner of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. Then, when the mode transition is executed while the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display notifying that the privilege is given to the player is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, a display mode similar to a display mode for notifying that a privilege is given to the player is discriminated and stored as a high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In this case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high standard value, the player will be notified that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode shift is executed in a state of paying attention to the point performance with anticipation, since the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in a display mode showing the high reference value, the sense of expectation can be maintained.

In this control example, the display mode is stored so that the display mode is not a display mode for notifying that the privilege is given, and the display mode is stored in two stages, high standard and other, but it is divided into three stages or more. may be configured to store the display mode. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the difference between the display state of the indicator before the mode transition and the display state of the indicator after the mode transition.

In addition, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the meaning is equivalent to the display mode before the mode transition. Although the display mode of the indicator after mode transition is displayed in the display mode with A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode shift. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the mode transition.

It should be noted that the configuration used for the point effect of this control example and the configuration used for the point effect of the above-described second control example may naturally be used in combination. As in the third control example, four modes may be set and the configuration of the mode transition processing of this control example may be added. As in the example, it may correspond to the display contents of the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Further, in this control example, the configuration for determining the positions where the points are displayed may be switched to the configuration used in the above-described second control example. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more diverse effects.

Further, in the "normal mode A", the "privilege 1" given when the indicator P1 reaches MAX and the "privilege 2" given when the indicator P2 or P3 reaches MAX are determined by the degree of expectation of the jackpot. is a privilege to notify that the stage is raised for the currently executed production content among the production contents of the third pattern variation production set in stages, and "Benefit 1" is, for example, the expectation of a big hit. A privilege for notifying that the level is increased by a plurality of levels (two levels), and "privilege 2" may be, for example, a privilege for notifying that the expectation level of the jackpot is increased by one level.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of expectation for the big win different depending on the contents of the performance executed in the third symbol variation performance and the timing when the indicator reaches MAX, and the player pays attention to the performance. It is possible to In this case, it is preferable that the timing at which the indicator becomes MAX and the timing at which the privilege is given are different. As a result, in a state in which the indicator becomes MAX and it is determined that a privilege will be granted, the player can play the game while predicting which performance content is being executed and the privilege will be granted. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. FIG. In the first control example described above, in order to suggest and notify the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (the effect being executed in the central part of the main display region Dm), it is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112). The control of the reach-navi effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is a secondary effect, has been described. This reach-navi effect includes a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the effect period of the main effect, a moving display portion (character Dm4b) that indicates the degree of progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification portion Dm4c that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. This is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach-navi effect described in the first control example will be described. In this fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that some parts have been changed, and that a plurality of patterns of reach-navigation effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 have been described. Other points are the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220, the flow of the reach-navi effect will be described in detail. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the reach-navi effect flow. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach-navi effect is performed in accordance with the variation time of the effect (main effect) executed according to a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) among the variation times of the special symbols. It is a sub-effect that the player can grasp visually, and is notified or suggested step by step. In this way, by displaying the contents of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (explanation of the effect of the main effect, fluctuation time, and the degree of expectation for the big win) using the sub-effect, the player can It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In FIG. 219, 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 117(b)), and 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the super reach develops, and 20 seconds after that (that is, 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). 2 shows the flow of the reach-navi effect when a variation pattern that further develops the main effect is selected.

As shown in FIG. 219, for 15 seconds after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol changes at high speed) is displayed in the main effect, and then the reach effect (the two left and right third symbols Stops at the same number, and only the third pattern inside is changed) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, in the main effect, a 30-second super reach effect (for example, the variation of the third pattern is displayed in a reduced size in a small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and an effect in which the characters face off in the main display area Dm. (see FIG. 163)) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, 20 seconds after the start of this super ready-to-win effect, the degree of expectation for a big win increases (for example, a friend character avoids an opponent character's attack, or uses a weapon different from usual). is used to attack the opponent's character) or to indicate that the winning result is a failure (for example, the opponent's character is attacked and knocked down). It is configured to make the player pay attention to what kind of performance is executed at the timing.

In accordance with the timing when this super reach effect is displayed, a reach navigation effect is displayed as a secondary effect in a small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). The detailed contents of this reach-navi effect are the same as those of the first control example described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect pattern is set in which the first reach-navi effect is 20 seconds and the second reach-navi effect is 10 seconds. 20 seconds after it is displayed) is associated with the timing of switching from the first reach-navi effect to the second reach-navi effect.

In this reach-navi effect, similar to the reach-navi effect of the first control example described above, guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle. As an effect that suggests that the result of the main effect will be a big hit, the characters "chance" are displayed, and the indicator attached to the rotating notification part Dm4c can be switched (point B and point C).

Then, when the production branch timing of the super ready-to-win production, which is the main production, reaches the timing (point D) when 20 seconds have passed since the super ready-to-win production was displayed, the production display continues to develop the super ready-to-win production in the main production. is performed, the reach-navi effect is switched from the first reach-navi effect to the second reach-navi effect. At this time, since the second reach-navi effect is set to have a half period (10 seconds) of the period of the first reach-navi effect (20 seconds), the second navi effect is the time used in the first navi effect. It starts from the half point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). Then, of the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) passes again through the guide display portion Dm4e through which the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) can pass in the second reach-navi effect (point E). The notification mode is changed again, and the second ready-to-navigation effect ends (point F) in accordance with the result display timing of the super ready-to-win effect (the stop display timing of the third symbol).

In this way, among the third symbol variation performances for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the variable display of the third symbol, it becomes a predetermined variation performance (super reach performance and special reach performance) with a high expectation of the big hit. By executing the reach-navi effect, which is a sub-effect, at the timing of the main effect, the player can visually grasp the progress of the mode of the main effect, and it is possible to notify or suggest step by step. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents displayed in the small area Dm4 when the example of the reach-navi effect shown in FIG. 219 is executed will be described. FIG. 220(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach-navi effect, and FIG. FIG. 220(c) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach-navi effect. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the parts explained in the above-described first control example, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 220(a), the display contents of the point C during the first reach-navi effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 220(a), in the first reach-navi effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section Dm4d, a "chance" with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed and guidance is given. "Chance" is not displayed when the display portion Dm4e is passed, but "X" is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach-navigation effect, the information content of the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined this time. Since the lottery result of the special symbol variation can be predicted, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220(b), the display contents of the point D during the first reach-navi effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the second reach-navi effect (10 seconds) is started from the half position of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portion Dm4e again during the second reach-navi effect. In this way, by setting the character Dm4b to pass again in the second reach-navi effect through the guidance display portion that has passed in the first reach-navi effect, it is possible to convert the notification contents of the guide display portion without discomfort. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 220(c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display section Dm4e in the second reach-navi effect, the notification content of the guidance display section Dm4e is changed to display "Chance". In this way, when switching from the first reach-navi effect to the second reach-navi effect, setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display section that passed in the first reach-navi effect, the first reach-navi effect can be achieved. This is because the player pays close attention to the reach-navigation effect while expecting that the second reach-navigation effect will be set so that the player will pass again through the guidance display unit where the high-expectation notification (“chance”) was not given in . , can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, since the same data can be efficiently used as display data for production in the first reach-navigation production and the second reach-navigation production, the amount of data used in production can be reduced.

In the example described above, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. . In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an action (for example, jump) to avoid the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach-navi effect, it is possible to make the character Dm4b pay attention to whether the character Dm4b passes through or avoids the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, thereby suppressing early boredom with the game and the first reach-navigation effect. When the second reach-navigation effect is started from a position where it is possible to pass through the guide display part where the expectation of a big hit is announced (“chance”) in the effect, the effect that lowers the expectation of a big win is suppressed. can do.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. FIG.

FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the ROM 222 in this control example has a second internal level selection table 222ba, a production scenario storage area 222bb, and a production scenario selection table 222bc added to the ROM 222 in the first control example. They are different, but the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. This second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting an internal level based on the winning/failure determination result of the pachinko machine 10. For the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above, The difference is that the winning/failing determination process based on the winning prize information that is reserved and stored is not executed.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “hit” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “2” is selected as the internal level, and when “150 to 198”, selects "3" as the inner level. Then, if the result of the judgment is "off" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "1" is selected as the internal level, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal "2" is selected as the level.

As a result, the internal level is set to "3" for about 25% of cases where the success/failure judgment result is "hit", about 75% of cases where the success/failure judgment result is "hit", and cases where the success/failure judgment result is "miss". can be set to "2" for about 25% of the cases, and about 75% of cases where the result of the judgment is "out" to be set to "1". By setting the internal level in this way and executing the performance corresponding to the internal level, it is possible to more easily set a plurality of expectations for the big win for the performance than in the case of executing the performance corresponding only to the success/failure determination result. becomes possible.

In this control example, three internal levels are set, but the number of internal levels is not limited to this and may be set to four or more. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level that is set to only about 1% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "hit", and by executing the effect corresponding to that internal level, valuable information that is rarely displayed is displayed. A presentation can be provided to the player. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, referring to FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the production scenario storage area 222bb. This production scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of production scenarios for reach-navigation production are stored. This is an area where scenarios are stored.

As shown in FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb is a scenario pattern of the effect scenario, and as an expectation level display notified (displayed) by the guide display Dm4d (first point) and the guide display section Dm4e (second point), Both the guidance display portion Dm4d and the guidance display portion Dm4e are used as the return position of the character Dm4b when the high-expected "chance" or the low-expected "x" is switched from the first reach-navi effect to the second reach-navi effect. A return position "1", which is a passable position, or a return position "2", which is a position where only the guide display part Dm4e can be passed, is set.

Specifically, in Scenario 1, during the first reach-navi effect, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed, the return position "1" is displayed, and the first point "x" is displayed during the second reach-navi effect. In Scenario 2, during the first reach-navi effect, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed, and the return position "1" is displayed. Returning to this scenario, the first point "chance" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach-navi effect. This is a scenario in which "x" is displayed, the player returns to the return position "1", and the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach-navi effect. In this way, a plurality of scenarios are prepared in which the display mode of the first reach-navigation effect and the return position are the same, but only the display mode of the second reach-navigation effect is different, and the scenarios are set corresponding to the internal levels described above. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute an effect matching the degree of expectation for a big win.

Similarly, the display mode shown in FIG. 223(a) is set for scenarios 4 to 12 as well. It should be noted that "super" displayed at the second point during the second reach-navigation effect of Scenario 11 indicates a display with a much higher degree of expectation for a big win than the display of "chance" (for example, "extra hot"). .

In this control example, scenarios 1 to 12 are used as scenario patterns for reach-navigation effect, but more scenarios may be used. Also, the type of the character Dm4b and the movement speed of the character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach-navi effect and the second reach-navi effect, thereby sharing the display data used for the effect. Alternatively, for example, when the second reach-navi effect is started, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach-navi effect may be displayed side by side. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a in the moving direction of the character Dm4b, it is possible to reduce the display area in which the reach-navi effect is executed.

Also, in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a for one path is used for the moving direction of the character Dm4b, but a time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of paths may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to set the scenario pattern so that the path along which the character Dm4b moves differs between the first reach-navigation effect and the second reach-navigation effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production contents of the reach-navi production.

Next, the effect scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario selection table 222bc. This effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table referred to when selecting a effect scenario in the reach-navi effect setting process 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 223(b), in the effect scenario selection table 222bc, each scenario is selected based on the internal level, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the value of the effect counter 223f. is set to

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "1", the variable time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 129", scenario "5" is selected and " 130-198”, scenario “4” is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is "1", the variable time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the value of the effect counter 223f Scenario "2" is selected when the value is "66-129", and scenario "3" is selected when the value is "130-198".

Further, when the value of the internal level is "2", the variable time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the value of the effect counter 223f is Scenario "8" is selected when the value is "66-129", and scenario "10" is selected when the value is "130-198". Further, when the value of the internal level is "2", the variable time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "9" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223f is Scenario "6" is selected when the value is "66-129", and scenario "1" is selected when the value is "130-198".

Then, when the value of the internal level is "3", the variable time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the value of the effect counter 223f is If the value is "66-198", scenario "12" is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is "3", the variable time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the value of the effect counter 223f is Scenario "6" is selected when the value is "66-129", and scenario "11" is selected when the value is "130-198".

Returning to FIG. 221, the description continues. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the above-described second internal level selection table 222ba based on the result of determination (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach-navi effect is executed. area. The second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) with the internal level determined in the reach-navi effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and referred to when selecting the effect scenario (see FIG. S2153 of 224), it is initialized when the reach-navi effect ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a reach-navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed instead of the reach-navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141), but other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the reach-navi effect setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. This reach-navi effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is to execute the reach-navi effect, and is the effect mode of the reach-navi effect. is determined.

When the reach-navi effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. , is set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2151). Here, the main effect is a effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 112 See) is a production that is executed in the central part.

After the processing of S2151 is completed, the internal level is determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152). Based on, a production scenario is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

When the process of S2153 is finished, the processes of S2107 and S2108 are executed in the same manner as the reach-navi effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and this process ends.

Next, a modified example of the display mode of the reach-navi effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. FIG. 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing Modification 1 of the fourth control example, FIG. 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing Modification 2 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 3 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example; FIG. 226(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in Modified Example 3 of the fourth control example. It should be noted that Modifications 1 to 3 are modifications of the display mode used in the reach-navi effect, and the control content uses the configuration described in the above-described first control example or fourth control example. Therefore, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 225(a) shows the contents of the second reach-navi effect of Modification 1 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(a), in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach-navigation effect is reversed and used as the time gauge Dm4a in the second reach-navigation effect. By doing so, it is possible to divert the display data used for the effect.

Next, FIG. 225(b) shows the contents of the second reach-navi effect of Modification 2 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(b), when the second reach-navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach-navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the character Dm4b continues to move. . In this case, the guidance display portions Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of locations for notifying the degree of expectation for the big win increases to four. As a result, a maximum of four "chances" for notifying that the degree of expectation for the big win is high is displayed, and the degree of expectation for the big win can be widely notified to the player.

In this modified example, the guidance display portions Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. The scroll display may be performed in the moving direction of the character Dm4b (to the right from the viewpoint in FIG. 225(b)) so that the area is erased. As a result, the effect of this modification can be executed without enlarging the area of the small area Dm4.

Further, in this case, only the display results of the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed in the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the guide display portion Dm4f. and Dm4g, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach-navi effect.

Next, FIG. 226(a) shows the content of the reach-navigation effect of Modification 3 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226(a), a time gauge Dm4a branched into two routes is used in the reach-navi effect of this modification, and the first route that finally reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 and the second A second route to reach the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Of these, when the character Dm4b moves along the first route, it passes through the guidance notification portions Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves along the second route, it passes through the guidance notification portions Dm4d and Dm4f on the way. .

When the reach-navi effect is executed in this modified example, the player moves either the first route or the second route in the first navigation effect, and reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2. Then, it is returned to the return position set before the branch point where the first route and the second route diverge, and the second navigation effect is executed.

Then, in the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves along either the path along which the character Dm4b moved in the first navigation effect or the path in which the character Dm4b did not move in the first navigation effect. As a result, when the same route is selected in the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display result of the guidance display part Dm4e through which the character Dm4b passed in the first navigation effect is changed in the second navigation effect. It is possible to

Also, when different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display results can be displayed on the three guidance display portions Dm4d, dm4e, and Dm4f as reach-navigation effects.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226(b), as a result of the selection of the first route in the first navigation effect, the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e display "chance" to notify that the expectation of a big win is high. 226(c), the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route, and the expectation of the big win is increased. A "chance" is displayed to inform you that the price is high. If different routes are selected in the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation effect indicates that the current navigation effect is the second navigation effect. "Development" is displayed to indicate that it is in progress. This allows the player to easily grasp the current situation.

Further, when the same route is selected in the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, for example, when the display result of the guidance display section Dm4e is "x" in the first navigation effect, the second navigation effect may change the display result of the guidance display section Dm4e to "Chance".

In other words, when the display result of the guidance display section Dm4e in the first navigation effect is "x" and the second navigation effect starts from the return position shown in FIG. The presentation mode of the second navigation presentation is a presentation mode in which the same route as in the first navigation presentation is selected and the display result of the guidance display part Dm4e displaying "x" in the first navigation presentation is changed to "chance". Alternatively, when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display part Dm4e remains "x", and the display result of "chance" is displayed in the guidance display part Dm4f. It is possible to expect both

In this case, it is preferable to set the second navigation effect so that it is more advantageous for the player to move on a route different from that of the first navigation effect. Specifically, the probability that "chance" is displayed as the display result of the guidance display section Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display section Dm4e is changed from "x" to "chance". Alternatively, it may be set so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the display result of the guidance display portion Dm4f is displayed as "chance" rather than the guidance display portion Dm4e. As a result, the player can expect that a route different from the first navigation effect will be selected as the route selected in the second navigation effect, and the player can continue to pay attention to the reach-navi effect. It becomes possible.

Thus, in the reach-navigation effect in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a that guides the progress of the game has a plurality (two) of routes, and depending on the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display section), , the route expected by the player can be changed in the second navigation effect.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the path along which the character Dm4b moves in the reach-navigation effect, which has the effect of improving the amusement of the game.

In this modified example, the position (return position) at which the second navigation effect is started is described as one position (the position before the route branches). may be provided. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guidance display section Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guidance display section Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the path along which the character Dm4b moves (the guide display section through which the character Dm4b passes) changes in the second navigation effect depending on the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects based on the result of the first navigation effect (the display result of the guide display section) and the position (return position) at which the second navigation effect is started.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two routes, but it may be branched into more (three or more) routes, or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Alternatively, a specific position may be set in the middle of the route along which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another route when passing through the specific position. As a result, the reach-navi effect can be made more versatile.

In addition, in this modification, a plurality of routes are displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach-navi effect is executed. (For example, only the first route) is displayed, and a plurality of routes (the first route and the second route) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. good too. By configuring in this way, since the player is not notified in advance (during the first navigation effect) what kind of route the route to pass in the second navigation effect is, the player can predict the effect. , can improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the content of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (explanation of the main effect, variation time, and expectation for the big win) is By displaying using , it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Also, the production branch timing of the super ready-to-win production executed in the main production (timing 20 seconds after the super ready-to-win production is displayed) is associated with the timing of switching from the first reach-navi production to the second reach-navi production. Because it is configured as such, out of the 3rd design variation performance (main performance) that notifies the lottery result of the special design using the variation display of the 3rd design, a predetermined variation performance (super reach performance) with high expectations for the big hit By executing the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect (effect branch timing) that becomes the main effect (or special reach effect), the player can visually grasp the progress of the main effect mode. It is possible to notify or suggest step by step, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, by notifying the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in a plurality of guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach-navigation effect, the information content of the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined this time. Since the lottery result of the special symbol variation can be predicted, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by setting the character Dm4b to pass again in the second reach-navigation presentation through the guidance display section passed in the first reach-navigation presentation, it is possible to convert the notification contents of the guidance display section without discomfort. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display portion that was passed in the first reach-navi effect, guidance that was not given with high expectations ("chance") in the first reach-navi effect Since the player gazes at the reach-navigation effect while expecting that the second reach-navigation effect is set so that the player passes through the display unit again, the effect of the playability can be enhanced.

In the example described above, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. . In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an action (for example, jump) to avoid the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach-navi effect, it is possible to make the character Dm4b pay attention to whether the character Dm4b passes through or avoids the guide display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, thereby suppressing early boredom with the game and the first reach-navigation effect. When the second reach-navigation effect is started from a position where it is possible to pass through the guide display part where the expectation of a big hit is announced (“chance”) in the effect, the effect that lowers the expectation of a big win is suppressed. can do.

Furthermore, since it is possible to efficiently reuse the same data as display data used for presentation in the first reach-navigation presentation and the second reach-navigation presentation, the amount of data used in presentation can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each of the above embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. FIG. In the above-described second control example, as the continuous slot effect, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the slot to be executed next depends on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. It was configured so that the production mode of the production was set.

On the other hand, in this control example, detailed control is added to the dynamic display (rotating display) mode and stop display mode of pseudo symbols in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. They are different in that respect.

In this fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed from the second control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the part is changed, and the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed. Other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228, the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbols in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols in slot effects can be set, and the types of slot effects to be executed (initial slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect, extended slot effect) and the remaining time of the operation effective period of the frame button 22 .

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of a dynamic display mode of pseudo symbols in a slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo-symbols "A" are statically displayed, and the dynamic display mode in which the middle pseudo-symbol is dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, when the player presses the frame button 22 and the pseudo symbols "A" on the left, middle and right lines up in a line, the pseudo symbol "A" is obtained. As explained in the second control example above, in the continuous slot effect, as a result of executing the slot effect a plurality of times, a plurality of types (three types) of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" are obtained. In this case, it is notified that the player has won a privilege (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227(b) to 227(e), other examples set as dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbols can be set, and the pseudo symbols can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes. It is possible to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 . Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the operation effect (slot effect) for operating the frame button 22 .

FIG. 227(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the number of reels as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(b), in this control example, as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbols, it is possible to set the dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect are displayed is one. there is This makes it possible to enlarge and display the pseudo pattern being dynamically displayed in a limited display space.

In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but the number of reels may be reduced from the normal number, and the number of reels may be two. In addition, in this control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol during dynamic display is displayed in an enlarged manner. In this case, a display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 in an empty area (usually the area where the left and right reels are displayed) (for example, at the timing when the pseudo symbol "A" is lined up in a row). It is preferable to display the degree of expectation in which the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row by pressing the frame button 22). As a result, an effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 can be executed.

FIG. 227(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(c), in this control example, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode for enlarging the dynamic display of the pseudo symbols used in the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbols. is doing. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time are dynamically displayed, so that the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 .

In this control example, the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed in a larger size than the other symbols, so that the player can easily understand it. A dynamic display mode may be adopted in which the pseudo symbol "A" is easier to visually recognize than the other symbols. As a result, the pseudo pattern "A" can be easily recognized visually without changing the dynamically displayed area.

FIG. 227(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the pattern arrangement of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227(d), in this control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbols, the reels (middle reels) displaying the pseudo symbols during the dynamic display have different symbol arrangements. It is configured so that the dynamic display mode can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is increased among the symbols to be dynamically displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time are dynamically displayed, so that the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 .

In this control example, by increasing the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol "A") to be stopped and displayed this time, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol "A". In addition, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not to be stopped and displayed this time, that is, the number of symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols “B” and “C”) It may be configured so that the number of pseudo symbols "A" increases immediately. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reels is reduced, the individual symbols dynamically displayed (rotated display) can be easily identified.

FIG. 227(e) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the dynamic display speed (rotational speed) of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227(e), in this control example, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) displaying the pseudo symbol during dynamic display among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol A dynamic display mode in which (rotational speed) is reduced can be set. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time are dynamically displayed, so that the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 .

In addition, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed near the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time, and fastened otherwise. As a result, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time, and furthermore, the period during which the reels go around can be shortened.

Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo symbols are dynamically displayed is set to the normal speed until the reel is rotated and displayed by a predetermined number (for example, 2 rounds), and after that (for example, the 3rd round), the speed is set to the normal speed. The dynamic display speed may be slowed down as described above. As a result, the player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (the period during which the reels make two turns) can easily grasp the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time. 22 can be prompted.

As described above, in this control example, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbols can be displayed in various dynamic display modes, so that the player is motivated. can be made to operate the frame button 22 .

In each dynamic display mode described above, only the pseudo pattern to be stopped and displayed this time is displayed with higher brightness than other patterns, or the display mode is changed to emphasize the edge of the pattern. This may make it easier for the player to understand.

In addition, the frame button 22 is operated even though the number of rotations of the reel reaches a predetermined number (the reel is dynamically displayed as if it has been rotated a predetermined number of times) or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the slot effect. If not, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. As a result, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

Next, the stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, but in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the result of judgment of the special symbol. is set so that three types of pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” can be obtained in multiple slot effects executed in continuous slot effects, and the result of judging the suitability of special symbols is In the case of loss, it is set so that the number of three types of pseudo symbols that can be acquired in a plurality of slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect is any one of 0 to 2.

Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect in the case where the result of the determination of whether the special symbol is right or wrong is not displayed, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not displayed on the line. controlled to stop. Specifically, patterns different from the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are set before and after the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated with an aim, stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed one before or one after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing so, it is possible to display the out of stop display mode without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the above-described stop control, by changing the starting position of the dynamically displayed reels without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels, the player is not given a sense of discomfort. It is configured to be able to execute a stop control that displays a stop display mode of disengagement. Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the stop control described above will be described.

FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the pattern arrangement and stop positions of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a), the pseudo pattern (pseudo pattern "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is not set as the pattern arrangement (pseudo pattern not to be stopped and displayed this time is set). ) is a continuous pattern array. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, one of which is a symbol array in which the pseudo symbol "A" is set (see FIG. 228(b)).

By using reels with such a pattern arrangement, it is possible to perform stop control in which a stop display mode is displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable simply by changing the start position of the reel and the dynamic display speed in each slot effect. It is executable.

This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228(b). FIG. 228(b) is a timing chart explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a). As shown in FIG. 228(b), in this dynamic display mode, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed this time is set to array 4 as the symbol array of the dynamically displayed reels. is set with a pseudo symbol "-" which is different from the current stop display target.

Then, in the dynamic display mode using this reel, the position where the dynamic display of the reel is started is the rotation start position 1 which is the array 1 of the symbol array and the rotation start position 2 which is the array 9 of the symbol array. is set. Two types of "high" and "ultra-low" are set as the speed of the dynamically displayed reels. Specifically, this reel speed "high" is set at a speed that takes 0.7 seconds to move one dynamically displayed symbol. is set at a speed that takes 1.2 seconds to move one dynamically displayed symbol.

In other words, when a slot effect is executed in which the effective period of operation of the frame button 22 (effective period of button operation) is set to 6 seconds, 9 to 10 symbols move when the reel speed is "high". When the reel speed is "ultra-low", an effect is executed in which five symbols move. Therefore, only by changing the reel dynamic display start position and reel speed, it is possible to change the types of pseudo symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of button operation without changing the symbol arrangement. Therefore, it is possible to set various dynamic display modes without increasing the number of types of pattern data, and to reduce the amount of effect data.

Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228(b). A dynamic display mode is executed in which the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed can be displayed. In this case, the reel speed "super low" (one symbol is displayed) is longer than the reel speed "high" (the period during which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds). A period of 1.2 seconds) allows the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time.

Also, if the rotation start position 2 is set, if the reel speed is set to "high", the symbols dynamically displayed during the effective period of the button operation will be in the range of array 9 to array 5, so the display will be stopped. It becomes a dynamic display mode that can display the target pseudo symbol "A", and if the reel speed is set to "super low", the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of button operation are in the range of array 9 to array 2 As a result, the dynamic display mode is such that the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed.

As a result, when the result of judging whether or not the special symbol is right is wrong, the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2 with the reel speed set to "ultra-low", thereby executing the dynamic display in which the pseudo symbol "A" is not displayed. It becomes possible to Further, when such stop control is executed, it is preferable to set symbols other than the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed to be the same symbols. As a result, whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in the current slot effect is a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed is set in addition to the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the dynamic display contents of the symbols.

Furthermore, when the reel speed is "super low", if the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1, the dynamic display mode ( dynamic display mode advantageous to the player), and when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed (disadvantageous to the player dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player only by grasping the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reels is started in the slot effect. can be prevented.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232. FIG.

FIG. 229(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , are otherwise the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 230, details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. This display mode storage area 222ca is a table that stores a plurality of dynamic display modes of reels for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is used in variable display setting processing 4 (see FIG. 233) to be described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes), the selected display mode is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, the display mode storage area 222ca stores a plurality of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) with different rotational speeds (dynamic display speeds) and pattern arrangements as dynamic display modes in the slot effect. It is As a result, when the continuous slot effect is executed in this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns as the dynamic display mode executed in each slot effect.

This rotation speed indicates the period during which the symbol being dynamically displayed is displayed in the display area where the slot effect is displayed. configured to be displayed. Also, at the "low" rotation speed, the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for one second. Furthermore, at the rotation speed "ultra-low", the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the rotation speed of the reel in three stages in this way, it is possible to set the dynamic display in which the player can easily distinguish the pseudo symbols and the dynamic display in which the pseudo symbols are difficult to distinguish in the dynamic display of each slot effect. It becomes possible. Therefore, different effects can be executed even in the dynamic display mode using the same pattern arrangement.

Furthermore, by providing three stages of rotation speeds of the reels, it is possible to vary the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect. For example, if the period of one slot effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be effective) is 6 seconds, 9 pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed "high". 6 pseudo-patterns can be displayed at "low", and 5 pseudo-patterns can be displayed at the rotation speed "very low". As a result, it is possible to change the number of times the pseudo-symbols in the current stop display mode are displayed, depending on the rotational speed of the reels.

Specifically, in the display mode 1, the rotation speed is "high", the pseudo pattern (indicated by "circle" in FIG. 230) whose pattern arrangement is to be stopped and displayed, and the pseudo pattern that is not to be stopped and displayed. (indicated by "x" in FIG. 230) are set to be displayed alternately. It is what is done.

The display mode 3 has the same rotation speed as the display mode 1, and the pseudo symbols (indicated by “circles” in FIG. 230) are set to be displayed side by side, and the pseudo symbol (indicated by a "star" in FIG. 230) to be stopped is emphasized (enlarged, light emission, etc.). In display mode 4, the rotational speed is "low" and the same pattern arrangement as in display mode 3 is set.

The display mode 5 is set so that the rotation speed is "ultra-low", the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed in the array 4, and the pseudo symbols other than those to be stopped and displayed are displayed in the other arrays. In the display mode 6, the rotation speed is "ultra-low", the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed in the array 11 as the symbol array, and the other arrays are pseudo symbols other than those to be stopped and displayed. is set to be displayed.

The display modes 5 and 6 use the same pattern arrangement data, and are display modes in which the position at which the dynamic display is started is different. That is, in display mode 6, dynamic display starts from array 5 shown in display mode 5. FIG. The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described with reference to FIG. 228 is executed.

In the display mode 7, the rotation speed changes in the middle. The rotation speed is "low" during the period when the pattern arrays 1 to 6 are displayed, and the rotation speed is "low" during the period when the arrays 7 to 11 are displayed. "High", as the pattern array, arrays 1 to 6 alternately display pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display and pseudo symbols that are subject to stop display, and arrays 7 to 11 are pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display. configured to be displayed.

In this way, the rotation speed is slowed down in the range (arrangements 1 to 6) where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed, and the rotation speed is reduced in the range (arrays 7 to 11) where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed. By increasing the speed, the speed of the dynamic display can be changed to attract the player's interest, and by lengthening the period in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed, the player can be motivated. A frame button 22 can be operated.

In addition, since the rotation speed is increased in the range (arrangements 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed, it is possible to shorten the period of one rotation of the reel, and one slot effect period ( During the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), the range (arrangements 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed can be dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the frame can be displayed to motivate the player. A button 22 can be operated.

In display mode 8, the rotation speed changes as the pattern array rotates, and the rotation speed is "high" in the first rotation and "low" in the second and subsequent rotations, which is the same as display mode 7. In display mode 9, the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are highlighted as the symbol array circulates. , which is the same symbol arrangement as the display mode 7, and is set to display a pseudo symbol "star" emphasizing the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed from the second round onward.

In addition, in this control example, the nine types of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) described above can be set as the dynamic display modes executed in the slot effect. , and many more display modes may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. This display mode selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when selecting the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is used in variable display setting processing 4 (see FIG. 233) to be described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 231(a), the display mode selection table 222cb has a winning display mode selection table 222cb1 and a winning display mode selection table 222cb2. A dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the determination result.

In this way, since the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the determination result of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot can be achieved by grasping the effect contents of the continuous slot effect. A player can be made to predict whether or not he/she has won a prize.

FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win display mode selection table 222cb1. According to this win display mode selection table 222cb1, each slot effect (initial slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is used as the initial slot effect, "display mode 1" is used as the normal slot effect, and "display mode 1" is used as the first shortened slot effect. mode 2", "display mode 2" is set as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect, and if the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", the first slot effect is set. "Display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" is the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 2" is the second shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" is the extended slot effect. mode 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" as the initial slot effect, "display mode 8" as the normal slot effect, and "display mode 8" as the first shortened slot effect. When "display mode 4" is set, "display mode 5" is set as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 5" is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot ``Display Mode 1'' as the effect, ``Display Mode 9'' as the normal slot effect, ``Display Mode 4'' as the first shortened slot effect, and ``Display Mode 7'' as the second shortened slot effect, and the extended slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

FIG. 231(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb2 for failure. With this display mode selection table 222cb2 for out, each slot effect (initial slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is used as the initial slot effect, "display mode 1" is used as the normal slot effect, and "display mode 1" is used as the first shortened slot effect. mode 1", "display mode 2" is set as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", the initial slot effect is set. "Display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" is the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 2" is the second shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" is the extended slot effect. mode 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 2" is the normal slot effect, and "display mode 2" is the first shortened slot effect. When "display mode 7" is set, "display mode 6" is set as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 6" is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as the effect, "Display mode 4" as the normal slot effect, "Display mode 8" as the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 9" as the second shortened slot effect, and "Display mode 9" as the extended slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

As described above, in this control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effect. The next slot performance can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot performance to be executed.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. This stop state selection table 222cc is a table for selecting the stop state of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. If it is determined (S2034 in FIG. 233: Yes), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), the stopping mode selection table 222cc includes a winning stopping mode selection table 222cc1 and a losing stopping mode selection table 222cc2, and is a table corresponding to the result of determining whether the special symbols are appropriate. is selected with reference to.

FIG. 232(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning stop mode selection table 222cc1. The win stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting stop patterns with different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of established symbols is "1" as the initial slot effect, the number of established symbols is "2" as the normal slot effect, the number of established symbols is "0" as the first shortened slot effect, and the second shortened slot effect is used. The established pattern number "2" is set as the extended slot effect.

Also, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of established symbols is "1" as the initial slot effect, the number of established symbols is "2" as the normal slot effect, the number of established symbols is "1" as the first shortened slot effect, and the second shortened slot effect is used. The established pattern number "1" is set as the extended slot effect.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a win, three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. As a result, the player is notified that the prize has been won.

Furthermore, in this control example, since there are a plurality of stop patterns for each slot effect when the success/failure determination result is a win, during the execution of the continuous slot effect, if the success/failure determination result is a hit It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the continuous slot effect has been executed.

FIG. 232(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc2 for failure. The stop mode selection table 222cc2 for failure is a table for selecting a stop pattern with different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of established symbols is "1" as the initial slot effect, the number of established symbols is "0" as the normal slot effect, the number of established symbols is "0" as the first shortened slot effect, and the second shortened slot effect is set. The established pattern number "0" is set as the extended slot effect.

Also, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of established symbols is "1" as the initial slot effect, the number of established symbols is "0" as the normal slot effect, the number of established symbols is "1" as the first shortened slot effect, and the second shortened slot effect is used. The established pattern number "0" is set as the extended slot effect.

As described above, in this control example, the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect is similarly stopped regardless of whether the result of the win/loss determination is a win or a loss, so the continuous slot effect is started. (at the time when the first slot effect is completed), the player grasps whether or not the current continuous slot effect is the continuous slot effect executed when the success/failure determination result is a win. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 229, the description continues. FIG. 229(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb are added, but other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. In this display mode storage area 223ca, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2071 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effects corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect are displayed. Information about the display mode that is referred to when setting the command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, and S5152 in FIG. 238) and stored when the continuous slot effect ends is initialized.

The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the stop mode selection table 222cc. In the stop mode storage area 223cb, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is displayed. A display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851 and S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, and S5151 in FIG. 238) and stored when the continuous slot effect ends information is initialized.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), but other points are the same. is. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variable display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

After the processing of S2006 is completed, the processing of S2034 and S2035 is executed in the same manner as the variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is selected based on the display mode selection table 222cb. It is selected and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

When the process of S2071 is completed, a stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, the process of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIGS. 234 to 238, various during-effect processing of slot effect processing (see FIG. 174) of main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in this control example. explain about

First, referring to FIG. 234, processing 2 during initial slot effect will be described. This FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 2 during the first slot effect. When the process 2 during the first slot effect is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed in the same manner as the process during the first slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. When the processing of S4707 is completed, next, a display slot stop effect command for the set stop mode is set (S4751), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is issued. It sets (S4752) and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even when it is determined that the current period is not the valid period for pressing the button (S4701: No), S4710 is performed in the same manner as the process during the first slot effect in the second control example (see FIG. 175). The processing of to S4712 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the processing 2 during normal slot effect will be described. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the contents of the processing 2 during normal slot effect. When the normal slot effect processing 2 is executed, the processing of S4801 to S4803 is executed in the same manner as the normal slot effect processing in the second control example (see FIG. 176), and in the processing of S4803, the slot effect counter 223p is determined to be greater than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is awaited for completion. state is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not greater than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. Then (S4852), the slot effect state is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809).

When the processing of S4809 is completed, next, a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second shortened slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 236, the process 2 during the first shortened slot effect (S4608) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 2 during the first shortening slot effect (S4608). When the process 2 during the first shortened slot effect (S4608) is executed, first, similarly to the process during the first shortened slot effect (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 are performed. process.

When the processing of S4904 is finished, next, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is displayed. A corresponding slot effect command for display is set (S4952), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the process 2 during the second shortened slot effect (S4610) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 2 during the second shortened slot effect (S4610). When the process 2 during the second shortened slot effect (S4610) is executed, first, similarly to the process during the second shortened slot effect (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed. , when the processing of S5002 is completed, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), and the display mode corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. A display slot effect command to be displayed is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to an end waiting state (S5004), and this processing is terminated.

FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 2 during extended slot effect (S4612). When the extension slot effect in progress process 2 (S4612) is executed, the processes of S5101 and S5102 are executed in the same manner as the extension slot effect process in the second control example (see FIG. 179), and then the stop mode is stored. A display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223cb is set (S5151), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152). ), the slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5104), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effect of the second control example, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbols are displayed in various dynamic display modes. , the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

Furthermore, even during one slot effect, the dynamic display mode is changed when a predetermined condition (the number of laps of the pattern array displayed on the reels or the elapse of a predetermined time) is established, so that the player can In contrast, the operation means (frame button 22) can be operated more willingly.

In addition, it is preferable to change the number of reels to be dynamically displayed as the plurality of dynamic display modes. This makes it possible to enlarge and display the pseudo pattern being dynamically displayed in a limited display space. Also, the size of the pseudo pattern may be changed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the place where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time are dynamically displayed, so that the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 .

In this case, a dynamic display mode may be adopted in which the other symbols are displayed in a reduced size so that the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are relatively easier to see than the other symbols. As a result, the predetermined pseudo pattern can be easily recognized visually without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Furthermore, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. As a result, the player can easily grasp the predetermined symbols. Alternatively, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols not to be stopped and displayed) may be decreased to relatively increase the number of predetermined pseudo symbols. In this case, it is possible to reduce the total number of dynamically displayed symbols, so that each dynamically displayed symbol can be easily identified.

Further, as a dynamic display mode, the pattern arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels may be changed to set a range in which predetermined pseudo-symbols (pseudo-symbols to be stopped and displayed) concentrate.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbols are dynamically displayed in the slot effect is configured to be changeable. As a result, even with the same pattern arrangement, it is possible to set a dynamic display that makes it easy to grasp a predetermined pseudo pattern (pseudo pattern that is to be stopped and displayed) and a dynamic display that is difficult to grasp, resulting in a variety of effects. can be executed.

Also, the dynamic display speed of reels that are dynamically displayed may be slowed down in a range in which predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) are displayed, and fastened in other areas. As a result, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time without changing the period of displaying the predetermined symbol array.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reels to be dynamically displayed is set to the normal speed until the reel completes a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 laps), and after that (for example, the 3rd lap), the dynamic display speed is set as described above. You may make it slow down. As a result, a player who does not operate the operating means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (a period during which the reels make two turns) can easily grasp a predetermined pseudo pattern (a pseudo pattern to be stopped and displayed). can prompt the user to operate the operation means (frame button 22).

In addition, in this control example, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the determination result of the special symbol. Based on this, it becomes possible to predict the result of determination of whether the special symbol is appropriate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the continuous slot effect.

In this control example, each slot effect (initial slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect) that may be executed in the continuous slot effect is dynamic in advance. Since the display mode is set, the next slot performance can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance. can be done.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same stop mode occurs in the first slot effect that is executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect regardless of whether the result of the success or failure determination is a win or a loss. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player grasps whether or not the current continuous slot performance is the continuous slot performance executed when the success/failure determination result is a win at the time the slot performance ends). .

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are set in advance. (When the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect), the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of the slot effect may be set.

Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the first slot effect is being executed are performed at the same timing as the other slot effects. It may be set.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. FIG. This control example describes in detail the composite pressing effect of the second control example described above. The composite pressing effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in this control example, it is configured to execute a compound pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and a compound effect executed based on a plurality of special symbol variations. They are different in that respect. In addition, a detailed explanation is added about the relationship between the operation contents of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the compound pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the pressing effect to be executed.

In this sixth control example, the content of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed from the second control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is the same. It is different from the part changed. Other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 239, the rear image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of back image data ("mountain" stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. ) is a schematic diagram showing an example of back image data ("sea" stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

In this control example, the stage shown in FIGS. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the variation of the special symbol, during which the game is played. When the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third pattern display device 81 is switched.

Further, in this control example, an effect corresponding to the stage being displayed is executed. Therefore, the player can change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22 during a period during which the stage can be changed (for example, 5 seconds after the special symbol variation is started). As a result, a new effect can be executed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the composite pressing effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of a compound pressing effect in this control example. Note that the same elements in the compound pressing effect of this control example that overlap with the compound pressing effect of the above-described second control example are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. period is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240, the repeated hit effect is executed for 10 seconds from the point when the remaining 12 seconds of the variation time of the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds) reaches the remaining 2 seconds.

When the player executes a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the number of repeated hits is 50 or more) on the frame button 22 during this repeated hit production, the background (stage) executed in the next special symbol variation is changed. It is configured such that the mode of operation to be changed is changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241(b) and (c).

Figure 241(b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode in which the background of the special symbol variation being executed can be changed as a background change operation mode, and Figure 241(c) is a background change operation mode in which the It is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode in which the background of the next special symbol variation can be changed. First, in FIG. 241(b), the rear image corresponding to the currently selected background ("sea" stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the sub-display area Ds is small. Selectable stages ("sea" stage and "mountain" stage) are displayed in the area Ds2 as a background selection screen, and the currently selected stage is displayed larger than the non-selected stages.

Then, below the main display area Dm, as a background change notification display for notifying the player that the current background change is possible, a message "Press the button to change the background" is displayed next to it. , a display resembling a “button” is displayed to indicate that the current operation valid period is during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid.

As a result, the player can easily recognize that it is a period during which the background can be changed, and the player can select an arbitrary background.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, an effect (for example, continuous hit effect) in which the player operates the frame button 22 for a predetermined period until the special symbol change ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol change ends). may be executed. In this case, as a result of the player's enthusiastic operation of the frame button 22, the player operates the frame button 22 even after the next special symbol variation is started, and the background is unintentionally changed in the next special symbol variation. In some cases, there was a problem that the

If this problem occurs, for example, in a state in which an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is executed across a plurality of variations is being executed, the player will not be able to see the effect that he was looking forward to. There is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to prevent the above-described problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, When it is determined that the continuous hitting operation) is executed, the background change operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode.

Here, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the specific background change operation mode described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 241(c), this specific background change operation mode differs from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. It is configured so that the background does not change until it ends. Below the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, there is a message "Press the button to select the background for the next variation" as a display to notify the player that the current mode is a specific background change operation mode. In the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the selected content indicating the background to be displayed in the next change is displayed.

In this way, by changing the aspect of the performance using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol variation based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol variation, the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends, the frame button 22 is executed in the next special symbol variation. (hereinafter referred to as a frame button operation effect) is changed, but other configurations may be used.

For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol variation exceeds a predetermined number of times, the aspect of the frame button operation effect in the next special symbol variation may be changed, or this time. The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol variation and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the mode of the subsequent frame button operation effect may be changed based on the determination that the operation content of the frame button operation effect to be executed before is the predetermined operation content.

Furthermore, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed. It is configured so that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only when the above-mentioned problem can actually occur, but it is not limited to this, and is executed in this special symbol variation. and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). You may comprise so that the aspect of the frame button operation production performed corresponding to special design variation may be changed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the above-described problems from occurring.

In addition, means is provided for determining whether the frame button 22 is being operated in a state in which the frame button operation effect is not set, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. Alternatively, when the determining means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation presentation may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is informed that the right/wrong judgment result of this special symbol variation is wrong although the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets that the frame button 22 is displayed. is being operated (pressed down) a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of an unintended background change due to the start of the next special symbol variation.

As described above, in this control example, a plurality of frame button operation effects executed across a plurality of special symbol variations (repeating effect of special symbol variation 1 and background change effect of special symbol variation 2 in FIG. 240) On the other hand, the form of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation contents during the frame button operation effect to be executed before.

In addition, in the same way as the second control example described above, even with respect to a plurality of frame button operation effects (compound pressing effect) executed during one special symbol variation, the frame button operation effect during the previously executed frame button operation effect It is configured to be able to change the aspect of the frame button operation presentation to be executed later based on the operation content.

Returning to FIG. 240, the composite pressing effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a composite pressing effect is executed in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed. This compound pressing effect is the same effect as the compound pressing effect executed in the above-described second control example (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation contents of the frame button 22 and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect in each frame button operation effect executed in the composite pressing effect will be described with reference to FIG. 242 .

FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the composite pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the compound pressing effect is executed, the pressing effect 1 is first executed. Similar to the second control example described above, this pressing effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that urges the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22 (the effect period is 12 seconds, and the effective operation period is 5 seconds after the start of the effect). for 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157(b)).

During this pressing effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (timing five seconds after the start of the operation effective period). Based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the contents of determination are "weak repeated hits" determined when the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (operation 3) and the number of repeated hits is small (50 times or less), and the repeated hits. The automatic repeated hitting function is executed by "strong repeated hitting" determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) and the operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for two seconds or more in the pressing effect 1. "Long press" determined when the frame button 22 is operated even once during the pressing effect 1, "No operation" determined when the frame button 22 is not operated even once during the pressing effect 1, and when an unnecessary frame button operation is executed for the pressing effect 1 There are five types of "other operations" that are determined to be present.

Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1, the form of the pressing effect 2, which is the frame button operation effect to be executed next, is set. Specifically, when the pressing effect 1 is determined to be “weak repeated hits”, the pressing effect 2 is set to “timing pressing effect” (see FIG. 158(a)), and the “strong continuous hits” is determined. , "continuous hit effect" (see FIG. 243(a)) is set for the pressing effect 2, and when it is determined as "long press", "timing release effect" (see FIG. 158(b)) is set, When it is determined as "no operation", "timing pressing effect" is set for the pressing effect 2 in the same manner as when it is determined as "weak continuous hit" described above, and when it is determined as "other operation", pressing A "timing pushing effect (difficult)" (see FIG. 243(b)) is set as the effect 2, in which the success difficulty level of the above-described "timing pushing effect" is increased.

In this way, by setting the mode of the pressing effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1, for example, pressing effect 1 exceeds a predetermined number of times (50 times), and the frame button A player who has pressed 22 (a player who is good at repeated hitting operation) can be motivated to participate in the frame button operation by executing the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 continuously.

In addition, for the player who is executing the auto repeated hitting function in the pressing effect 1 (the player who is continuously pressing the frame button 22), the effect of releasing the button instead of the effect of pressing the button is given. By executing , it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the current button operation state (depressed state), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the effect.

Furthermore, as a penalty for the player who is executing an unnecessary frame button operation for the pressing effect 1, an effect that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the pressing effect 2 to succeed can be executed.

Then, when the pressing effect 2 ends, a continuous hitting effect (the effect period is 7 seconds, and the operation valid period is 5 seconds from the start of the effect) is executed (Fig. 159 (b )), the composite pressing effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243(a), description will be given of the continuous hit effect of the pressing effect 2 that is executed when the pressing effect 1 of FIG. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the compound pressing effect of the second control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), when the repeated hit effect is started with the press effect 2, the comment column displays "high probability storage state", suggesting that the display mode of the meter display section D1 will change. "Maybe the meter may go through!?" is displayed. In addition, "Continuous hit" indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is the repeated hit effect is displayed between the meter display portion D1 and the small area Dm5.

In the repeated hitting effect executed in this pressing effect 2, similar to the pressing effect 2 of the second control example described above, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is changed based on the game result of the compound pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159(a)). Specifically, when the frame button is pressed more than 20 times during the period (3 seconds) during which the pressing effect 2 is executed, The display of the meter display portion D1 changes based on the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol for which the operation condition is satisfied and the composite pressing effect is performed is executed. For example, as a result of winning/failure judgment, if the special symbol of this time wins the big win and furthermore, the special symbol wins the big win in the winning prize information that is reserved and stored, the meter is displayed as shown in FIG. 159(a). The meter in section D1 is extended.

As described above, in the pressing effect 1, the player who has performed a sufficient number of repeated hitting operations can continue to perform the repeated pressing operations in the pressing effect 2. Since the presentation modes are different between the pressing presentation 1 and the pressing presentation 2, the player can be motivated to operate the desired frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In this control example, the effect mode is changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is hit repeatedly. It may be configured to be determined by lottery from. This makes it difficult for the player to comprehend the operation conditions in the current pressing effect, so that the frame button operation can be positively executed until the end.

The timing pressing effect (difficult) of the pressing effect 2 executed when "other operation" is determined in the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the compound pressing effect of the second control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the timing push effect (difficult) is the display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge as compared to the timing push effect of the second control example (see FIG. 158(a)). The difference is that the position is different and that the moving object D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the degree of success difficulty (difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the center timing of the target Db3) compared to the normal timing pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who does not intentionally participate in the composite pressing effect to succeed in the timing pressing effect (difficult to satisfy the operation condition), and the effect (special It is possible to make it difficult to execute the effect suggesting the lottery result of the symbol.

It should be noted that the method of increasing the success difficulty level is not limited to the configuration described above. , the display of the target Db3 may be temporarily erased, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or reduced to change the moving speed of the moving object D3a.

In addition, as a condition for setting the timing pressing effect (difficult), the operation determination result and the pressing effect 2 are started in addition to the case where the result of the operation determination in the pressing effect 1 is determined to be "other operation". If the operation status differs from the current time, for example, in the pressing effect 1, the frame button 22 is pressed at the time the pressing effect 2 is executed even though "long press" is set as the operation determination result. The timing pressing effect (difficult) may be set even when it is determined that there is no pressing.

Furthermore, in this control example, the timing pressing effect (difficult) is executed for the player determined not to participate intentionally in the composite pressing effect. For example, if the operation content for the frame button 22 in the press effect 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the number of repeated hits is 7), the timing press effect (difficult) is successful. In some cases (when the operation conditions are met), the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery, a specific effect (image or video) is displayed, or information that the player can accumulate is provided. You may comprise so that the privilege which becomes advantageous to may be provided.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 244, the RAM 223 in this control example has a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a checking flag 223dc, and a press count counter 223dd added to the RAM 223 in each control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, “sea” stage, “mountain” stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22 . This background information storage area 223da is stored when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation effective period, which is the operation period during which the background can be changed, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). , the background information based on the operation content is stored, and in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), when the checking flag 223dc is set to ON, the background information for display is stored based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation. indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. This operation change flag 223bd is set in the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 247) when it is determined that the frame button is input within 5 seconds (effective period before the end) until the special symbol variation ends ( S6810 in FIG. 247: Yes) is set to ON (S6811 in FIG. 247).

Then, in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that it is the first frame button operation valid period (S6802 in FIG. 247: Yes), and if the confirming flag 223dc is set to OFF. If it is determined (S6803 in FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to OFF (S6805 in FIG. 247).

The checking flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether or not the effect of changing the background of the next variation (see FIG. 241(c)) is being executed as the background change effect, and if it is ON, the background of the next variation will be changed. If it is off, it indicates that the effect of changing the background of the next fluctuation is not being executed. The checking flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) (S6804 in FIG. 247). In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when setting the background display command (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to OFF after the background display command is set (S2083).

The number-of-presses counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect. The number-of-presses counter 223dd is incremented by 1 (S4551 in FIG. 246) when it is determined in the auto press effect setting process 2 that the press effect 1 is in effect (normal press is being pressed) (S4510). It is referred to when determining whether or not the number of presses during effect 1 has reached a predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246), and when it is determined that the predetermined number (50 times) has been reached (FIG. 246 S4552: Yes), the value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Also, although not shown, the value of the counter is initialized to 0 at the timing when pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the second control example described above, the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the auto press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) is executed. 246) and a detailed description of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247), but other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When this variable display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the above-described second control example. A variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed based on the acquired variation pattern are set. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to S2033 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

When the processing of S2040 is finished, next, it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (that is, during the previous special symbol variation, If the effect of changing the background is executed in the next special symbol variation) (S2081: Yes), the background command for display is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da ( S2082).

Then, the checking flag 223dc is set to OFF (S2083), and then the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed in the same manner as the variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and this End the process.

By configuring in this way, based on the information (information set in the background information storage area 223da) in which the background of the next special symbol variation is set, at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started, the third The background (“sea” stage, “mountain” stage) displayed on the pattern display device 81 can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the auto press effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the contents of the auto press effect setting process 2 (S4410). This auto press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is different from the auto press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the above-described second control example. The processing content is different.

When the auto press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed in the same manner as the auto press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S4510 that it is the normal pressing period (S4510 in FIG. 246: Yes), a display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing number counter 223dd is incremented by 1. (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value added in the processing of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and if the value of the press count counter 223dd is not greater than 50 (50 or less) (S4552 in FIG. 246: No ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4522, if the value of the press count counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552 in FIG. 246: Yes), then the press effect scenario is changed to non-auto press middle use 2 (4553), and the press count The value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 247, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1707) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. If so (S6801: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), then the current is the first frame button operation effective period, which is the period during which the background can be selected. (S6802). In the process of S6802, if it is determined that the first frame button operation valid period has expired (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the confirming flag 223dc is set to ON (S6803), and if it is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no operation change flag 223db (set to OFF) (S6803: No), then it is determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804).

In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), and the checking flag 233dc is set to ON. (S6806), the process proceeds to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processes of S6804 to S6806 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6807.

In the processing of S6807, it is determined whether or not a confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation is the operation of the frame button 22 while the effect for setting the background of the next change is being executed. If it is determined (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this processing ends.

Here, the processing of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 241(c). When the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background of the next change is being executed, the display is switched to the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. The background display ("sea" or "mountain") enlarged and displayed in this small area Ds2 becomes the background to which the change starts next time. In other words, in the process of S6808, when the confirmation operation is executed once for the background information (the "mountain" stage in FIG. 241(c)) currently set (for the current change), the transition is made to the next change. The background information corresponding to the "sea" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background to be changed, and when the confirmation operation is performed twice, the background information corresponding to the "mountain" stage is set as the background to be changed in the next change. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description continues. In the processing of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S6804: No), the background for display corresponding to the background next to the currently set background is displayed. A background command is set (S6809), and this processing ends.

This processing of S6809 is during the valid period of the first frame button operation, and the operation change flag 223db and the confirming flag 223dc are both set to OFF, that is, the normal background change effect (FIG. 241(b)). ) is executed, and the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22 .

In the process of S6802, if it is determined that the current period is not the first frame button operation effective period (S6802: No), then it is determined whether the current period is before the end (S6810). This period before the end is a period indicating that the remaining period until the special symbol variation ends is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and if it is determined that it is not the period before the end (S6810: No ), this processing is terminated, and if it is determined that it is the period before termination (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends) ) is determined to have been executed, the background change operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by changing the aspect of the performance using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol variation based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol variation, a situation that dissatisfies the player occurs. It is possible to suppress

It should be noted that the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in this special symbol variation and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). It may be configured to change the aspect of the frame button operation effect executed corresponding to the next special symbol variation based on the setting in . As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the above-described problems from occurring.

In addition, means is provided for determining whether the frame button 22 is being operated in a state in which the frame button operation effect is not set, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. Alternatively, when the determining means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation presentation may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is informed that the right/wrong judgment result of this special symbol variation is wrong although the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets that the frame button 22 is displayed. is being operated (pressed down) a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of an unintended background change due to the start of the next special symbol variation.

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined to be a "long press" in the pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect, the timing release effect is executed in the pressing effect 2. However, for example, the player It may be configured such that all of the composite pressing effect can be executed while the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. The effect executed in the pressing effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pressing effect 2 that is executed when a "long press" is determined at the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1 as a compound pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player long-presses the frame button 22 and reaches the operation determination point in the state where the auto repeated hit function is being executed in the pressing effect 1, the comment column reads "Auto timing is set by long-pressing the button. Next to it, a schematic diagram simulating a timing gauge and the degree of expectation indicating the rate at which the timing is set are displayed.

In this case, during the press effect 1, the operation timing of the timing press effect is displayed on the timing gauge displayed in the comment column while executing the effect that the meter of the meter display section D1 rises by executing the auto repeated hitting function. A lottery production is executed.

Then, auto timing is set until the pressing effect 2 is started, and in the timing pressing effect (see FIG. 158(a)) executed in the pressing effect 2, the frame button 22 is operated at the set auto timing. The same production as when it is done is executed. By configuring in this way, the player can execute the continuous hitting effect and the timing pressing effect only by continuously pressing the frame button 22 (continuing to press it for a long time).

In the above-described example, the degree of expectation for auto-timing may be set at random, or may be set based on the lottery results of special symbols. Also, the degree of expectation may or may not be reported to the player. Furthermore, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (before the depression effect 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance. good too.

For example, two timings are provided to determine the operation content of the pressing effect 1, and when it is determined to be "long press" at the previous determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. A configuration may be adopted in which the player is informed of the setting result of the auto-timing. By configuring in this way, when the setting contents of the auto timing are bad, the normal timing pressing effect can be executed as the pressing effect 2 by changing the operation contents (for example, continuous hitting operation).

<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. FIG. In this seventh control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, when the pressing effect for pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at short intervals (10 seconds in this control example), the interval ( In this control example, it is configured to execute an additional effect for 10 seconds). Specifically, when the pressing effect (first pressing effect) ends and after a short interval (for example, 10 seconds), the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) starts, 1 An additional performance of pressing the frame button 22 is executed between the second pressing performance and the second pressing performance. As a result, the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 or the additional effect is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect.

Here, when the first pressing effect ends, the second pressing effect is executed after a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) even though the player has released the frame button 22. , the player has to move his/her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, increasing the operating burden on the player and possibly making it impossible to concentrate on the game. In contrast, in the seventh control example, the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 or the additional effect is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. Therefore, the above problem can be suppressed (prevented) by moving the hand to the frame button 22 until the second depression effect is completed.

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the flow of setting the additional effect in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a plurality of operation performances are performed in the third symbol variation performance (variation performance using the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (Effect for allowing the player to operate the frame button 22) can be set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for special symbol variation 1 (special symbol variation with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts) Variation pattern corresponding to the period of ~ 30 seconds), the second variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the special symbol variation started), and the third variation pattern (special symbol variation A variation pattern corresponding to a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start) is set so that the third symbol variation effect is set separately.

Here, in recent years, in order to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early, it is required to increase the types of production patterns of the third symbol variation production displayed on the third symbol display device 81. was Therefore, as in this control example, the applicant divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into a plurality of periods, and combines the variation patterns set for each period to create a series of effect patterns. I thought about the process to do.

By configuring in this manner, the same type of effect pattern can be created with a smaller amount of data than when a series of effect patterns are stored individually. Therefore, it is possible to create more production patterns using the same amount of data when storing each series of production patterns, reduce the amount of data used for the third symbol variation production, and use other effects (for example, characters) It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, special effects displayed during the big win, etc.), and it is possible to set various effects within a limited amount of data. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

However, when a series of effect patterns are created by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, in each of the continuous variation patterns, an operation effect is set in which an effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. was there. Furthermore, the operation effect is executed in the second half of the variation pattern that is executed first among the continuous variation patterns. When the operation effect is executed in the first half of the variation pattern to be executed next, an effect pattern is created in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds).

Further, by setting a long period of the operation presentation executed in at least one variation pattern among a plurality of variation patterns, the period of making the player enthusiastically play the game continues, and the player enjoys the game. It is conceivable to suppress early boredom, but if such a configuration is used, a production pattern in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is likely to be created. Met.

As described above, this control example solves the problem that occurs when a process capable of creating a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is executed.

In the first variation pattern, an operation presentation (“variation B”) with an operation valid period of 10 seconds for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is provided, and in the second variation pattern, an operation presentation (“SP2”) with an operation valid period of 25 seconds is provided. However, in the third variation pattern, an operation presentation ("SSP2") having an operation valid period of 10 seconds can be set.

Specifically, the "variation B" that can be set as the first variation pattern is the operation valid period (10 seconds) after 17 seconds after the first variation pattern is started (after the special symbol variation is started). It is set and ends 3 seconds after the operation validity period has passed. In the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed in the first 17 seconds, and after the ready-to-win state in which the left and right third patterns stop at the same number, an operation effect ( An operation effective period of 10 seconds) is executed, and an effect is executed to inform the player of the result of the operation effect in the remaining 3 seconds.

"SP2" that can be set as the second variation pattern is, after the end of the first variation pattern (30 seconds after the start of the special symbol variation), for 3 seconds, the next operation production ( After that, the operation valid period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation valid period ends after 4 seconds. In this "SP2", the operation effective period is set as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is variable (color change, change of comments, etc.), change the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 (change in color, change in brightness, change in the presence or absence of lighting), and drive provided in the pachinko machine 10 The drive mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change in presence/absence of drive, change in drive speed, change in drive range). Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 for a long period of time (23 seconds in this control example) to change various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode).

"SSP2" that can be set as the third variation pattern is, after the end of the second variation pattern (60 seconds after the special symbol variation is started), for 4 seconds, the next operation production ( After that, the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and 16 seconds after the operation valid period has passed, that is, after the special symbol variation is started. Ends after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect is executed in which the frame button 22 is hit repeatedly during the valid operation period. In addition, the effect for informing the player of the result of the judgment of the special symbol (lottery result) is the period during which the operation valid period is not set (15 seconds after the start of the third variation pattern until the end period).

Then, when "variation B" is set in the first variation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern, the operation valid period set in "variation B" and "SP2" are set The interval between the operation valid period to be executed is 6 seconds. This 6-second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed. In addition, when "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern and "SSP2" is set in the third variation pattern, the operation effective period set to "SP2" and "SSP2" are set The interval between the operation validity period is 8 seconds. This 8-second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed.

Then, the remaining period until the operation effective period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "Variation B" is set to "SP2" is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of the operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period (10 seconds) set in "Variation B" is within 4 seconds, an additional effect is executed. It will be. Also, an operation in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example) until the start of the operation effective period (10 seconds) set to "SSP2". In the case of the timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period (25 seconds) set in "SP2" is within 2 seconds, the additional effect is executed. Become.

In this way, when a plurality of operation effects for which operation effective periods are set are executed, an additional effect is generated based on the operation content (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated) of the previously executed operation effect. By using a configuration that determines whether or not to execute, there is a problem when a plurality of operation presentations for which the operation effective period is set is executed (that is, the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of not operating it are repeated in a short period of time). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player's operation load increases and the player cannot concentrate on the game.

As described above, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation valid period is set are executed, the operation contents of the previously executed operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated) ), but it is not limited to this. In this case, the additional effect may be executed at predetermined intervals (5 seconds) without determining the content of the operation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described. Figure 250 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the operation effect when "SP2" is set as the second variation pattern, Figure 250 (b) is between "SP2" and "SSP2" FIG. 250(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal display in which the "additional effect" is not executed during the set "additional effect" executable period, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the operation effect in.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), during "SP2", an effective period notification section S1 (a diagram simulating a frame button) for informing the third symbol display device 81 that it is the operation effective period of the frame button 22, A period display portion M1 indicating the operation valid period in "SP2" is displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display portion M1. Then, in the comment field, the characters "press the button" are displayed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22. - 特許庁

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the characters "Chance" are displayed in the comment field as shown in FIG. 250(b). Since the timing shown in FIG. 250(b) is the timing at which the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), the valid period notification section S1 and the period display section M1 display not.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250(c), "SSP2" is started, and the validity period notification section S1 (a diagram simulating a frame button) that notifies the third pattern display device 81 that it is the operation valid period of the frame button 22 ) and a period display portion M2 indicating the operation valid period in "SSP2" are displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display portion M2. In addition, the characters "continuous hit" indicating the operation content in "SSP2" and the characters "maximize the meter" indicating the effect content are displayed.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250(a) to (c), when a plurality of operation effects are executed, during the period between them (the period during which FIG. 250(b) is displayed), the operation effective period of the frame button 22 Since there is no display of the effective period notification section S1 for notifying that it is, a display of the period display section M2 indicating the operation effective period, or a display prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, the player can temporarily The operation of the frame button 22 is stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250(c) is made. If such a display (effect) is executed in a short period of time, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the desire to play the game will decrease. On the other hand, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-described problem occurs by executing the additional effect during the period between them (the period during which FIG. 250(b) is displayed). It is restrained from being overwhelmed. Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the display (effect) content of the additional effect will be described.

FIG. 251(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. 251(c) is a schematic diagram showing a further different example displayed as an additional effect in this control example.

In the example shown in FIG. 251(a), for the display contents shown in FIG. The difference is that the period display portion Ma is displayed, and the remaining period of the operation effective period (b in the figure) is displayed by the additional period display portion Ma. By executing the additional effect in this way, after the operation effective period of "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250(a)), the operation effective period of "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250(c)). ), the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and the player's motivation to play decreases. can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 251(a), the display mode (display form and display position) of the additional effective period notification section Sa for informing the operation effective period is the same as the display mode of the effective period notification section S1 or S2. , there is no sense of incongruity with regard to the execution of the additional performance. Furthermore, as an additional effect, the player operates the frame button 22 to display an additional comment in response to the comment displayed by the operation effect of "SP2". The player does not feel uncomfortable with the displayed performance (operation performance).

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 251(a), only the additional period display portion Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation effective period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251(b) and 251(c).

FIG. 251(b) shows display contents when an additional effect is set such that the display contents of "SP2" shown in FIG. 250(a) are continuously (extended) displayed. As shown in FIG. 251(b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display portion M1 indicating the operation effective period of "SP2" is displayed with no remaining period. The additional period display portion Ma is displayed on the left side of the view in FIG. 251(b). As a result, in "SP2", the remaining period a decreases (moves to the left side of the period display portion M1), and when the remaining period disappears (when the valid operation period ends), that is, an additional effect is performed. When it is started, the additional period display part Ma can be displayed, and the player can recognize that the operation performance of "SP2", which is the operation performance executed by the additional performance, has been extended. .

In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is more added because the effect in which the characters of "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" are rewritten (updated) is executed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the operation performance of "SP2" has been extended.

FIG. 251(c) shows display contents when an additional effect is set so that the display contents of "SSP2" shown in FIG. 250(c) are displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251(c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display portion M2 indicating the operation effective period of "SSP2" is displayed. right side), an additional period display portion Ma is displayed. As a result, in the additional effect, the remaining period b decreases (moves to the left side of the period display section Ma), and when the remaining period disappears (when the operation effective period ends), that is, "SSP2" When the operation effective period is started, the remaining period of the period display part M2 can be displayed to decrease, and the player is instructed to perform the operation of "SSP2" as the operation effect executed by the additional effect. It is possible to make the player recognize that the performance is being executed first.

Also, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also the effect of changing the display form of the meter that is increased by the operation effect of "SSP2" (for example, the color of the meter changes, the effect around the meter changes, etc.). By making it variable, an effect suggesting that the meter reaches MAX in the operation effect of "SSP2") is executed, so that the additional effect and the operation effect of "SSP2" are related more. can be recognized as

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice ramp control device 113 are changed from the second control example described above, and the RAM 223 in the voice ramp control device 113 and that the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 252, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

FIG. 252(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252(a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting detailed variation patterns according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110. It is Specifically, the first variation for selecting the effect mode (first variation pattern) for a period of 30 seconds after the start of the variation (that is, the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of the variation) Pattern selection table 222a1, second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the effect mode (second variation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of variation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of variation A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting an effect mode (third variation pattern) until the period elapses, and an additional effect selection table 222a4 for determining the effect mode of the additional effect are provided.

In this control example, according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110, the first to third variation patterns and additional effects are selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a, and a variation pattern combining them Based on this, one variable performance is executed. For example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first variation pattern is selected from the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, and one variation based on the selected variation pattern perform the performance. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first variation pattern is selected from the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, and the second variation is selected from the second variation pattern selection table 222a2. Select a pattern, select a third variation pattern from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, select an additional effect from the additional effect selection table 222a4, and select one based on the selected first to third variation patterns and the additional effect. Execute the variable performance of.

Although illustration is omitted, when a variable time other than the above-described variable time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) is selected in the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variable time is displayed. will be selected. For example, in the main controller 110, when short off (variation time 7 seconds) is selected, a variation pattern will be selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a that defines a variation pattern of 7 seconds.

First, with reference to FIG. 252(b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (effect mode of the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252(b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (the effect mode of the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of variation) corresponds to the value of the first effect counter 223f1. is stipulated as

Specifically, a variation A, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the first effect counter 223f1. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of types of presentation modes of the variation A are defined, and the variation A is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variation A, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Variation B, which is an effect mode in which a pressing effect for pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined for the value "100 to 198" of the first effect counter 223f1. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of types of presentation modes for the variation B are specified in the same manner as for the variation A, and the variation B is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variation B, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(c), a second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting a second variation pattern (effect mode for a period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252(c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the effect mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of variation is defined corresponding to the value of the second effect counter 223f2. there is

Specifically, a variation SP1, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the second effect counter 223f2. In addition, like the variation A, the variation SP1 is also provided with a plurality of types of presentation modes, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variable SP1, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

A variation SP2, which is an effect mode in which a pressing effect for pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined for the value "100 to 198" of the second effect counter 223f2. In addition, like the variation B, the variation SP2 is also provided with a plurality of types of presentation modes, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variable SP2, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (effect mode of the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252(d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the effect mode from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of variation is defined corresponding to the value of the third effect counter 223f3. there is

Specifically, a variable SSP1, which is an effect mode in which the depression effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the third effect counter 223f3. As with the variation A, the variation SSP1 is also provided with a plurality of types of presentation modes, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variable SSP1, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

A variation SSP2, which is an effect mode in which a pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined for the value "100 to 198" of the third effect counter 223f3. It should be noted that, like the variation B, the variation SSP2 is also provided with a plurality of types of presentation modes, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variable SSP2, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Although details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. With these independent counters, each variation period (first variation pattern with a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second variation pattern with a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds) is used as a detailed variation pattern. (3rd variation pattern) is selected, the variation of the presentation mode can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Here, in each variation period (first variation pattern with a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second variation pattern with a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, third variation pattern with a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) When the pressing effect of pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, when the pressing effect is executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds and a period of 31 to 60 seconds, the pressing effect is executed first. If the pressing of the frame button 22 is slow in (a pressing effect executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds), a short interval is provided after pressing the frame button 22, and a pressing effect (a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds) is displayed. Pressing effect to be executed at the time) will be executed. In this case, even though the user has released the frame button 22 after finishing pressing the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect, the second pressing effect is executed after a short interval (for example, 5 seconds). As a result, the player has to move his/her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, increasing the operating burden on the player and possibly making it impossible to concentrate on the game.

On the other hand, in this control example, in the case where the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variable effect, if the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow, the first pressing effect ends. In the period until the start of the next (second) pressing effect, an additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is selected and executed. As a result, the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 or the additional effect is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. The above problem can be suppressed (prevented) by moving the hand to the frame button 22 until the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

The additional effect selection table 222a4 is used to select an additional effect to be executed when the depression of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow in the case where the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variable effect as described above. is a table of

As shown in FIG. 253, when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect are in a specific combination (when the pressing effect continues), an additional effect is defined, When the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed in the pressing effect executed first among the continuous pressing effects, in the period from the end of the pressing effect executed first to the start of the pressing effect executed next, A prescribed additional effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect do not form a specific combination (when the pressing effect is not continuous), the additional effect is not defined, and the addition No performance is performed.

Specifically, first, a case where the first variation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (no pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (that is, 60 The variable performance ends in seconds), ``variable SSP1 (no pressing performance)'', and ``variable SSP2 (with pressing performance)'', the pressing performance is continuously executed in one variable performance. Since there is no additional effect, the additional effect is not defined, and the additional effect is not executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1 (No pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is not continuously executed in one variable effect, so the additional effect is not defined. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second and third variation patterns, so the additional effect 2 is stipulated.

If the additional effect 2 is defined, the additional effect 2 is executed when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late in the pressing effect executed in the second variation pattern. Since the additional effect 2 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to press the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. operation can be performed.

Next, a case where the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (without pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (that is, 60 The variable performance ends in seconds), ``variable SSP1 (no pressing performance)'', and ``variable SSP2 (with pressing performance)'', the pressing performance is continuously executed in one variable performance. Since there is no additional effect, the additional effect is not defined, and the additional effect is not executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none", "variation SSP1 (no pressing effect)” and “fluctuation SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern. Additional production 1 is defined.

Furthermore, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with press effect)", the press effect is continuously executed in the second and third variation patterns. , in addition to the additional performance 1, the additional performance 2 is defined.

When the additional effect 1 is defined, the additional effect 1 is executed when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late in the pressing effect executed in the first variation pattern. Since the additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to press the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed. operation can be performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 254, the contents of the RAM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example differs from the above-described second control example in that the content of the effect counter 223f is changed and that an effective period storage area 223ea is added, but other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect counter 223f is used to select the first variation counter 223f1 used to select the first variation pattern, the second variation counter 223f2 used to select the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern. A hanging third variation counter 223f3 is provided (see FIG. 254(b)).

The validity period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not it is a period during which an effect is executed based on pressing of the frame button 22 (that is, a period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is valid). A period during which pressing of the button 22 is effective is set by a value of elapsed time (ms) after the start of the variable performance. This effective period storage area 223ea is stored in the pressing effect to be executed when the variation pattern command for executing the pressing effect is set in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031 in FIG. 256: Yes). A period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. In addition, in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257), when an additional effect is set (S6854 in FIG. 257: Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the additional effect is valid. is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). Although not shown, the contents of the effective period storage area 223ea are cleared when one variable effect is completed.

Next, referring to FIG. 255, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration within the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example differs from the work RAM 233 in the second control example in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

The additional effect data storage area 233n is an area for storing effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. FIG. Additional effect data storage area 233n, in the variation pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)), when it is determined that there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751: Yes), the received command Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when the execution of the additional effect is determined at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is ON), it is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. The displayed effect data is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, an additional effect is executed.

The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined. When it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined, and when it is off. In some cases, it is determined that execution of the additional performance 1 has not been determined. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6903). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is time to update the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), reference is made (S3852), and the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is ON. When determined (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined. When it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and when it is off. In some cases, it is determined that execution of the additional performance 2 is not determined. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6902). Then, in pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is time to update additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), reference is made (S3856), and the value of additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is ON. When determined (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and frame button input monitoring is performed. - The difference is that frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed in place of the effect processing (see S1707 in FIG. 137), and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, when a variable pattern in which a pressing effect is executed is set in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example (S2031 : Yes), and the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the pressing effect to be executed is valid is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In the seventh control example, the pressing effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed, and the processes corresponding to these effects are not executed. , slot effect, and point effect can be executed, and processing corresponding to these effects may be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712), first, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed as in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (that is, the variation pattern received from the main controller 110) is set to the variation pattern selection table 222a (first variation pattern selection table 222a1 to third variation pattern selection table 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and set a display variation pattern command (S2006).

After completing the process of S2006, the process proceeds to S2031. In the process of S2031, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is for executing the pressing effect (S2031: Yes), each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091 The operation effective period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the effective period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the processing of S2006 is not one for executing the pressing effect (S2031: No), the processing of S2092 is skipped, and the processing of S2007 is skipped. Go to processing.

When the processing of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed in the same manner as in the second control example, and this processing ends.

Next, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1707), a frame button press command is set based on detection of pressing of the frame button 22 during the operation effective period of the frame button 22. FIG. When the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period of the depression effect, the period until the next depression effect is started is determined, and the period until the next depression effect is started is short. (10 seconds or less in this control example), it is configured to set an additional effect command in order to execute the additional effect.

Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the effective period storage area 223ea, the current period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid (frame button operation valid period) is determined. period) (S6851). In the process of S6851, if it is determined that the frame button operation valid period is not reached (S6851: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6851, if it is determined that the frame button operation valid period has expired (S6851: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801).

If it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6801: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801: Yes), a display frame button press command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to S6853. Transition. The display frame button pressing command set in the process of S6852 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . Upon receiving the display frame button pressing command, the display control device 114 determines the period in which the command is set from the received command (for example, the pressing effect period in the second variation pattern), and displays the effect corresponding to that period ( For example, a comment display effect (see FIG. 250(b))) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the processing of S6852 is completed, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853). In the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is not the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6853, when it is determined that the current period is the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in order to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, Go to processing.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the next depression effect is started is 10 seconds or less. In the processing of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), in order to execute the additional effect, an additional effect command for display is issued. After setting (S6855), the valid period storage area 223ea is updated (S6856) based on the press valid period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processing of S6855 and S6856 is skipped and this processing is performed. exit.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 258 to 260, control processing executed by the display control device 114 in this seventh control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, command determination processing 4 (FIG. 258) is executed instead of command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 180), and variation pattern command processing (FIG. 146 (a) reference) instead of executing the variation pattern command process 2 (Fig. 259 (a)), the point of adding the additional effect command process (see Fig. 259 (b)), and the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) is replaced with pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 258, details of command determination processing 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described. In the command determination process 4 (S2502) in the present control example, in contrast to the command determination process 2 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 180), instead of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)), the variation pattern command The difference is that the process 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) is executed and the additional effect command process (see FIG. S259(b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

In the command determination process 4 (S2502), first, the processes from S2601 to S2604 are executed as in the second control example. In the processing of S2604, if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), variation pattern command processing 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259(a). In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) in this control example, if there is additional effect data, the additional effect data is added to the variation pattern command process in the second control example (see FIG. 146(a)). The difference is that they are stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751). When the additional effect data is set as the variation pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when the pressing effect is continuously set (selected) in the first to third variation patterns is.

In the processing of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes), the additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to additional effect 1 or additional effect 2) , is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process proceeds to S2701.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, when it is determined that the received variation pattern command does not include additional effect data (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2701.

After proceeding to the process of S2701, the processes of S2701 to S2706 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example described above, and this process ends.

In this way, by storing in advance the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect in the additional effect data storage area 233n when a variation pattern command with the possibility of executing the additional effect is received, When executing (displaying) additional effects, you can execute (display) additional effects without delay. Incidentally, the present invention is not limited to this, and effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect may be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n only when executing the additional effect. Thereby, when the additional effect is not executed, the processing load can be reduced because the effect data does not need to be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example.

In the process of S2612, if it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the additional effect command has been received (S2639). In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command has been received (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259(b). This additional effect command process (S2640) is a process executed when an additional effect command indicating execution of an additional effect is received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the additional effect command process (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901).

In the processing of S6901, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and this process exit. The additional effect 1 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern, as described above.

By setting the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 to ON by the processing of S6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to be (displayed).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this processing ends. . The additional effect 2 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern, as described above.

By setting the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 to ON by the processing of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed ( display), the display data table buffer is updated.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. In the process of S2639, when it is determined that the additional effect command has not been received (S2639: No), other command processes are executed (S2614), and the process returns to S2601.

Next, the details of pointer update processing 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), with respect to the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the second control example described above, the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined, and the update timing of the additional effect (in each variation pattern The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and the other points are the same.

In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851). ).

In the process of S3851, when it is determined that it is time to update the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is ON (S3852). In the processing of S3852, if it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case to execute the additional effect 1 (the frame button 22 was pressed early or was not pressed). (or, the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is ON (S3852: Yes), it is a case of executing the additional effect 1 (from pressing the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). The start is within 10 seconds), the display data table buffer 233d is overwritten with the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to off. (S3854), and the process ends.

In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten starting from the area storing the display data to be executed one second later in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the additional effect 1 can be executed (displayed) after one second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (one second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). Note that the update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and may be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed according to the change.

In the processing of S3851, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). It is determined whether or not (S3855).

In the process of S3855, when it is determined that it is time to update the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is ON (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the case to execute the additional effect 2 (the frame button 22 was pressed early or was not pressed). (or, the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is ON (S3856: Yes), it is a case of executing the additional effect 2 (from pressing the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). The start is within 10 seconds), the display data table buffer 233d is overwritten with the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to off. (S3858), and the process ends.

In the processing of S3855, if it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the processing of S3802 to S3806 is executed in the same manner as in the second control example described above, and this processing ends.

In this way, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the display data table buffer is overwritten (updated) in advance with the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect at the update timing of each additional effect. The performance can be executed (displayed) without delay. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table buffer may naturally be updated at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed. It suffices to overwrite (update) the data table buffer 233d.

Further, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether or not it is time to update each additional effect, and then whether or not the additional effect is executed (whether or not the additional effect flag is ON) is determined. It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the additional effect is to be executed (that is, when the additional effect flag is ON), it may be determined whether it is time to update the additional effect. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, there is no need to determine whether it is time to update the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, additional effects are set for the intervals between them, but other structures may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, processing is performed so as to delay the start timing of the operation effect to be executed first by a predetermined interval, so that the plurality of operation effects are performed continuously. Alternatively, the processing may be performed such that the start timing of the operation presentation to be executed later is brought forward by a predetermined interval.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting an additional effect between the plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is preferable to set the additional effect described above after the end of the operation effect to be executed later, or to set a longer effect period for displaying the result of the operation effect.

<Modification of the seventh control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. FIG. In the seventh control example described above, the case where a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol variation effect executed for one special symbol variation has been described. A case where a plurality of operation effects are set so as to straddle will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the control examples described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the flow of setting the additional effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects across a plurality of special symbol variations.

As shown in FIG. 261, the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example changes the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set for a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the special symbol fluctuation is started. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22 .

Then, when the first variation pattern “variation A” and the second variation pattern “SP2” are set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds) (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol variation is 27. The operation effect is executed in a period of seconds to 4 seconds (23 seconds). In the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), the end of the special symbol variation is the end timing of the second variation pattern "SP2", so the end timing of the operation valid period of "SP2" in the special symbol variation 1 and the special symbol variation The period between the start timing of the operation valid period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

Also during these 5 seconds, the control similar to the above-described seventh control example is executed, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display contents of the additional effect 3 displayed in this modified example will be described.

FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining the display contents of additional effects when a plurality of operation effects are set across continuous special symbol fluctuations, and FIG. 262(a) is an example of the display contents during the normal background change effect period. It is a schematic diagram showing. FIG. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262(c) is the display content during the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of.

First, as shown in FIG. 262(a), in this modified example, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed in the same manner as in the sixth control example described above. The display contents are the same as those in FIG. 241(b) of the sixth control example described above, so description thereof is omitted.

Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262(b), an additional effective period notification part Sa for notifying the effective period set by the additional effect 3, and an additional period display indicating the additional operation effective period A portion Ma is displayed, and the remaining period of the operation effective period (b in the drawing) is displayed by the additional period display portion Ma. Then, characters of "get a new background with MAX" explaining the game contents in the additional effect 3 and a meter that can be changed by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third pattern display device 81 reaches MAX, the background that cannot be normally selected can be selected by the background change effect. Become.

FIG. 262(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the background change effect when the new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. FIG. As shown in FIG. 262(c), two types of backgrounds, the “sea” stage and the “mountain” stage, were normally selectable (see FIG. 262(a)). , the "River" stage is displayed as selectable.

As described above, in this modified example, additional effects (additional effects 3) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described seventh control example even in a plurality of operation effects that are set across a plurality of special symbol variations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the frame button performed by the player across a plurality of special symbol variations from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the additional effect 3, the condition that the meter becomes MAX may be the case that the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result (whether determination result) of the special symbol variation 2 is set in advance. (so-called look-ahead), and the result of the determination is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit). Moreover, you may combine both.

Further, the additional effect used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control additionally sets both the effect mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the operation effective period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be changed, and the operation valid period of the frame button 22 may be configured not to be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the case of changing only the mode of effect without changing the effective period of operation of the frame button 22 as an additional effect will be described. FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing display contents obtained by removing the display of the additional period display portion Ma indicating the additional operation valid period from the display contents of FIG. 251(a) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. 263(b) is a display obtained by deleting the additional period display portion Ma indicating the additional operation effective period and the period display portion M1 from the display contents of FIG. 251(b) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. FIG. 263(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 263(c) is an additional period display portion Ma and a period display portion M2 showing the additional operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251(c) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

As shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (c), since the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is not changed as an additional effect, the period during which the additional effect is executed is the period in which the operation effective period is not set. Therefore, the period display portions M1 and M2 indicating the effective period of the operation and the additional period display portion Ma indicating the effective period of the additional operation are not displayed.

However, since the operation display section Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the effective period notification section Sa shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the frame button 22 during the period (operation invalid period) between the period and the operation valid period.

In this way, without changing the effective period of operation as an additional effect, the notification (display of the operation display section Sb) prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed as the effect mode. It is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 across a plurality of operation valid periods by using the above operation, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of stopping the operation of the frame button 22 are frequently repeated. .

In this case, as the effect mode of the additional effect, it is preferable to use the effect mode in which the display mode is changed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the display mode is variable based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22, although it is actually the operation invalid period.

Specifically, as effects that are actually executed during the effective period of operation, effects in which an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. The operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect in which the content of the comment changes in the middle based on the operation of the frame button 22, and an effect in which the meter accumulates based on the operation of the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. It is preferable to execute a pseudo-effect mode that is pseudo-executed regardless of.

This makes it possible to make the user think that the display mode is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22 . Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the above-described pseudo effect mode may be switched based on the operation contents (operation interval and number of operations) of the frame button 22 executed during the actual operation effective period. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the mode of presentation during the operation invalid period is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22 .

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. FIG. Each of the control examples described above constitutes various effects as operation effects for the player to operate the frame button 22 . This control example is different in that the effect mode control is different when the operation effect in each control example described above is executed.

Specifically, based on the remaining period of the operation effective period set for each operation effect, control is executed to change the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated. By configuring in this way, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the valid operation period becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the valid operation period is reduced to the predetermined amount of time. Execution of an effect mode in which the amount of change in the effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 (the amount of increase in the meter, the amount of increase in numerical value, etc.) is greater than in the above case (for example, more than 5 seconds). So, you can enjoy the operation performance to the end.

Furthermore, in an operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (that is, a long press operation) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds or less), the period for determining that a long-pressing operation has been performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). By configuring in this way, even at the end of the operation presentation, it is possible to experience the change in the presentation mode based on the long-pressing operation, so that the operation presentation can be enjoyed until the end.

In this eighth control example, the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the above-described control examples, and the processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. It is different from the changed point. Other points are the same as the control examples described above. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in each control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 264(a) and 264(b), the operation effect in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 264(a), a display mode is displayed in which the player is urged to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 during the variable display of the third symbol. A remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the design imitating the shape of the frame button 22 . The display color of the remaining time indicator M is configured to change based on the decrease in remaining time. In this control example, the remaining time period is displayed in red, and when the remaining time decreases, the remaining time is changed to white (the part displayed in red decreases). See FIG. 264(b)).

Also, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, there is a message "Long press to auto-repeat" indicating that by pressing the frame button 22 for a long time, it will be controlled (determined) to be in the same state as if the frame button 22 were being pressed for a long time. characters are displayed. At the top of the display area, an indicator is displayed that changes color based on repeated pressing of the frame button 22 . A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the scale is set to the degree of expectation that the success/failure determination result of the special symbol during fluctuation is a win. When the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit and the color of the scale of the indicator is changed to a larger value (changed from white to red), the player can judge whether the special symbol during the change is not a hit. can be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 264(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (continuously pressing the frame button 22 for 3 seconds or 1 second), a pattern imitating the frame button 22 is displayed for a long time. Detects and displays the characters "automatic continuous hitting" indicating that it is set to the state of automatic continuous hitting. Note that, in this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 determined as a long press is variably set according to the remaining time during which it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. Specifically, when the remaining time becomes 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 has been pressed continuously for 3 seconds up to that point, the setting that was determined to be a long press is changed to the frame button 22 that has been pressed continuously for 1 second. When is pressed, it is switched and set so that it is determined as a long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed long after the remaining time is running short, more indicators can be accumulated and the button presentation can be enjoyed.

In this embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed depending on the remaining time. may be configured. When the frame button 22 is operated when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less), the indicator can be changed to the maximum value or a predetermined value (for example, scale MAX). If an effect to be displayed up to is selected, the indicator may be changed and displayed up to scale 1, etc.).

Next, referring to FIG. 265, regarding frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707) which is one processing in main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707).

In frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether or not the SW valid time (frame button operation valid period) is greater than 0 (S7031). When it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW valid time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is greater than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW valid time is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is not less than 5 seconds (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW depression counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the long depression determination value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). If it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the long press judgment value (S7040: Yes), 1 is added to the SW indicator within the range of effect values set in the variation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. A display command is set (S7042). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7040 that the value of the SW depression counter (not shown) is less than the long-press judgment value (S7040: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7037 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7037: No), the period during which the frame button 22 has not been pressed is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer. (S7043). If it is determined that the time is longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW depression counter (not shown) is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S7044). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after it is pressed, it is assumed that the button has been repeatedly pressed, and the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is incremented by 1. Update. Then, when the long press judgment value or more is reached, the SW indicator is set to be varied. The amount by which the SW indicator varies is set in advance for each variation pattern, and is set so as to represent the degree of expectation of the success/failure determination result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator by long pressing or continuous hitting. Furthermore, since the long-press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, even if the SW effective time is running out, the player can see the effect of changing the indicator. Note that the speed at which the indicator is changed may be set to be faster depending on the value of the SW valid time.

Note that the above-described SW pressing counter (not shown) is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and also to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of pressing times of the frame button 22 (pressing number measuring counter) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing period measuring counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, the number-of-presses counting counter is incremented by 1, and the pressing period measuring counter starts counting.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count counter is not incremented, the value of the press period counter is incremented, and the value of the press period counter reaches a predetermined value ( A value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds) is determined by the depression period determining means.

When the pressing period determination means determines that the value of the pressing period measuring counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. may

Thus, by providing the pressing count counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to independently control the pressing operation (continuous pressing operation) and the long pressing operation of the frame button 22 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a modification of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described. In the above-described frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265), when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is long-pressed. By shortening the long-press determination value (from 3 seconds to 1 second), which is a value for determining that a long-press operation (automatic repeated hits) can be executed, and in the state where the long press determination value is shortened, by increasing the speed at which the SW indicator is changed, when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (to the maximum range previously set to be variable) by a long-pressing operation (automatic repeated hitting) executed at the beginning.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the long-press operation (auto repeat) is executed in the state where the long-press determination value is shortened, the long-press operation (automatic The difference is that the value of the SW pressing counter is incremented more than the continuous hitting).

Note that, in this modification, when a long press operation (automatic repeated hits) is performed in a state where the long-press determination value is shortened, the value of the SW depression counter is increased (the interval between automatic repeated hits is shortened). ), but other configurations may be used. The value of the SW depression counter may be incremented by automatic continuous hitting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of this modification will be described. This FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266).

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, similar to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) in the eighth control example described above, S7031 to S7037 Processing is performed. Then, in the process of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7051). (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processing of S7038, S7041 and S7042 is executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7051, if it is determined that the time is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW depression counter (not shown) is incremented by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is incremented by 2 ( S7053), a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and this process ends.

Also, in the processing of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), it is the same as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. Then, the processing of S7043 and S7044 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in this modified example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) is equal to or less than a predetermined period (5 seconds or less). The value (time) to be pressed is shortened (reduced from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW pressing counter incremented by the automatic continuous hitting operation is increased more than usual. did.

As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range previously set to be variable) by the long-pressing operation (auto repeated pressing) executed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. be able to.

Furthermore, unlike the eighth control example described above, since the value added to the SW depression counter is configured to increase, the value of the SW depression counter can be associated with the value of the SW indicator, and the control load can be reduced. There is also the effect of being able to reduce the

Note that the above-described SW pressing counter (not shown) is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and also to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of pressing times of the frame button 22 (pressing number measuring counter) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing period measuring counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, the number-of-presses counting counter is incremented by 1, and the pressing period measuring counter starts counting.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count counter is not incremented, the value of the press period counter is incremented, and the value of the press period counter reaches a predetermined value ( A value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds) is determined by the depression period determining means.

When the pressing period determination means determines that the value of the pressing period measuring counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. may

Thus, by providing the pressing count counter and the pressing period measuring counter, it becomes possible to independently control the pressing operation (continuous pressing operation) and the long pressing operation of the frame button 22 .

As described above, the configurations described in each control example may be appropriately combined, and in particular, each configuration of the reach-navigation effect described in the first control example and each configuration of the reach-navigation effect described in the fourth control example may be combined. Alternatively, each configuration of the compound pressing effect described in the second control example may be combined with each configuration of the pressing effect in the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or described in the second control example. Each component of the continuous slot effect described above is combined with each component of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example, and each component of the point effect described in the second control example is described in the third control example. It may be combined with each configuration of the point production with

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Slide Unit 400 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and an abutting member formed so as to abut on the displacement member, wherein the displacement member A first member that is linearly displaceable on a member, a pinion gear that is rotatably disposed on the first member, and a rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and is linearly displaceable on the first member. a second member disposed; the base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is meshed; and the first member of the displacement member abuts against the abutment member. Game machine A1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member and a displacement member arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable (for example, JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacing member is brought into contact with the abutting member, and the abutting member is displaced together with the displacing member, or the abutting member is arranged at the end of the displacement range of the displacing member. , when the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc., the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper). Are known.

However, the conventional configuration described above has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down in order to suppress the breakage, the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the displacement member and the abutment member while ensuring the performance effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member. Since the first member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member via the pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased more than the first member. In the accelerated state, it can be linearly displaced relative to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the production effect associated with the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, the displacement member causes the contact member to contact the first member whose displacement speed is lower than that of the second member. Therefore, the impact at the time of contact is weakened, and damage to the displacement member and the contact member is suppressed. can do.

As a form of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a pinion gear provided on the base member is meshed with a rack gear formed on the first member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to move the first member to the base. By linearly displacing the first member with respect to the member, or by connecting the distal end of an arm whose proximal end is rotatably supported by the base member to the first member and driving the arm to rotate, the first member is moved to the base member. For example, linear displacement is performed with respect to .

Further, the contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the displacement member is linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the projecting direction, or Alternatively, the second member may be linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the housing direction. In either case, the first member, whose displacement speed is lower than that of the second member, is brought into contact with the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of contact. Damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is the straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. The game machine A2 is characterized in that the direction allows displacement.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the abutment member is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the abutment member is aligned with the displaceable member. Since the displacement of the displacement member is allowed in the direction in which the displacement member is actually displaced, the abutment member receives the displacement of the displacement member while escaping, thereby exhibiting a cushioning effect. can be easily suppressed.

The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be linear displacement, and may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement need not be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the displaceable direction of the contact member is set parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the direction in which the contact member can be displaced is set parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. In this case, the movement of the contact member to escape can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert a cushioning action and easily suppress breakage of the displacement member and the contact member.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that, in the game machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided. can be improved. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. , the space in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement increases accordingly, leading to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, by also using one guide member, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

A gaming machine A5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the abutment member can be arranged at a position not abutting against the displacement member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where it does not contact the displacement member, so that the displacement member can contact the contact member. A non-contact state can be formed. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the displacement member will extend beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. When the displacement member is brought into contact with the member (the contact member functions as a stopper) while the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the stop position of the displacement member can be easily matched with the target position. By arranging it at a position where it does not contact with the displacement member and not contacting them, the number of times of contact is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to contact is reduced, and the life of them is improved. can be achieved.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A5, further comprising contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member, the contact member pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the base member, and a second member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the first member. By meshing with the rack gear of the base member via the pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member. Since it is a structure in which it is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while being accelerated, the force required for driving is relatively large. In particular, at the time of initial movement of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from a stopped state), the force required for driving becomes maximum due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial motion (the speed of linear displacement from the stopped state) is slowed down, and there is a risk that the performance effect associated with the displacement will be hindered.

In this case, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, it is possible to assist the initial movement of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial motion and improve the presentation effect associated with the displacement.

The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be linear displacement, and may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement need not be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member contacts the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized in that

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, , the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, the abutting member is abutted by the first member whose displacement speed is lower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, so that the abutting member exerts an assisting force on the displacement member (first member). (i.e., the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state starts to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) is made longer. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

In the game machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the same as the rack in the contact member. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that it is set to a gear ratio greater than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, the displacement member can be readily linearly displaced from the stopped state, and after the start of linear displacement, the displacement member ( It is possible to increase the speed of linear displacement of the second member), and as a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect associated with the displacement.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the abutment member is set to a small gear ratio, a greater driving force can be exerted. It is possible to reliably assist the initial movement of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the linear displacement speed of the first member can be increased. You can increase your speed.

A large (small) gear ratio means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear is large (small) when the pinion gear rotates once.

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to hasten the initial movement of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement, the initial movement of the displacement member slows down. That is, conventionally, it was impossible to speed up the initial movement of the displacement member and to increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, such coexistence has become possible for the first time.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Combined Unit 600 as an Example>
a driving means, a displacement member driven by the driving means and formed to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member to which the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts. A game machine B1 characterized in that at least a component of a velocity component of said displacement member in a direction toward said abutted member decreases in the vicinity of said first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members are displaceable between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and a contact position (first position) where they contact each other. A game machine formed is known (for example, JP-A-2015-51160). In this type of game machine, for example, a pair of displacement members that are retracted to a retracted position are displaced in a direction approaching each other, and are brought into contact (combined) at the contact position, thereby integrating the pair of displacement members. A production is performed that transforms and forms one character.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated and, for example, they bounce off each other, resulting in an unstable posture. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time required to integrate the pair of displacement members to form one character increases and becomes slow. The performance effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member among the speed components of the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from rebounding from the abutted member, thereby stabilizing the posture of the displacement member.

Further, of the velocity components of the displacement member, the decrease in at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the displacement speed of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time required to integrate the displacement member with the abutted member to form one character, thereby suppressing the lengthening. As a result, the effect of presentation can be enhanced.

Further, the abutted member may be a member that stops at the first position, or may be a member that is displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is placed at the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displaced member reaches the first position first and is in a stopped state with respect to the abutted member). and placed at the first position substantially at the same time as the displacing member (that is, the displacing member and the abutted member, which are in a mutually displaced state, abut at the first position). can be

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position or a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position , a form in which these are combined, and the like.

Further, the decrease in the component in the direction toward the member to be contacted means that not only the velocity toward the member to be contacted is reduced, but also the velocity in the direction toward the member to be contacted becomes 0, and This is intended to include the case where the speed in the direction away from the member to be contacted increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the member to be contacted becomes negative).

In the game machine B1, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means, in a state in which the driving state of the driving means is kept constant, at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the transmission means causes the reduction in the vicinity of the first position of at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member to the driving means. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the driving means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

As a state in which the driving state is constant, for example, if the driving means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. be. However, the change of state in the transient response at start-up and shutdown shall be ignored.

In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member displaceably disposed, and the transmission means includes a rotation base rotatably connected to the base member and a position spaced apart from the rotation base by a predetermined distance. and a connecting tip formed to be rotatably connected to the displacement member, wherein the connecting member is rotated around the rotation base in a direction in which the connecting tip is brought closer to the first position. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position by doing so.

According to the game machine B3, the connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip of the connecting member forms an arc centering on the rotation base. That is, displacement in the tangential direction of the arc is imparted to the displacement member. In this case, the connecting member rotates about the rotating base portion as the center of rotation in a direction in which the connecting tip portion approaches the first position. The component in the direction toward the direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. Thus, the transmission means interposes the connecting member between the base member and the displacement member, and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the game machine B2, a base member is provided on which the displacement member is displaceable, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending from the base member and guiding the displacement member, and the displacement member A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is at least a component in a direction toward the abutted member among speed components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove. is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion guided along the guide groove. Of the speed components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove. structure can be simplified.

A game machine B5 characterized in that in any one of the game machines B2 to B3, the game machine B5 is characterized by comprising an intervening member that is connected to the base member so that one side can be displaced and that the other side is connected to the displacement member so that the other side can be displaced.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B2 to B3, it is equipped with an intervening member that is connected to the base member so that one side can be displaced and that is connected to the displacement member so that the other side can be displaced. When the driving force of the drive means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means and the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the intervening member can be applied to the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be a form in which the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposed member are combined. This makes it possible to complicate the form of displacement of the displacement member and enhance the effect of presentation by the displacement.

In game machine B5, game machine B6 is characterized in that the one side and the other side of the interposition member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by means of pivots.

According to the game machine B6, one side and the other side of the intervening member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by means of pivots. is the center of rotation, and the other side is displaced along an arc-shaped locus. Therefore, such arc-shaped displacement (that is, displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied from the interposed member to the displacement member. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the presentation by the displacement can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed such that a component of a velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. A gaming machine B7 characterized by:

According to the game machine B7, in any one of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is arranged such that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. , it is possible to more reliably suppress the generation of impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from rebounding from the abutted member, thereby stabilizing the posture of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that a component of a speed component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member becomes a negative value at the first position. That is, at the first position, the displacement member has a component in the direction in which it separates from the abutted member. can escape from the abutted member, thereby more reliably suppressing the occurrence of impact. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from rebounding from the abutted member, thereby stabilizing the posture of the displacement member.

Further, if the value is negative at the first position, even if the displacing member is brought into contact with the abutted member before the displacing member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is low (or a negative value) can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of impact.

In any one of game machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the abutted member, and a second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the abutting member, The abutted member is formed to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means is adapted to reduce the speed component of the abutted member while the driving state of the second driving means is constant. A game machine B9 characterized in that at least a component of the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B2 to B8, the member to be contacted is formed to be displaceable toward the first position. can enhance the effect of For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displacement member toward each other and abutting (combining) them at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the abutted member is provided, and the second transmission means transmits at least the speed component of the abutted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, generation of impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the abutted member and the displacement member from rebounding from each other, and stabilize the postures of the abutted member and the displacement member.

Further, of the speed components of the abutted member, at least the component in the direction toward the displacing member decreases in the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the abutment member can be increased, the time required to integrate the abutted member with the displacement member to form a single character can be reduced for both the abutted member and the displacement member. can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of presentation can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means controls the reduction in the vicinity of the first position of at least the component in the direction toward the displacement member among the velocity components of the abutted member, in a state in which the driving state of the second driving means is kept constant. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displaced position of the abutted member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the second driving means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

The abutted member, the second drive means and the second transmission means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement member, the drive means and the transmission means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the abutted member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Protrusion Unit 700 as an Example>
A driving means, a first member and a second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and first transmission means and a second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. , wherein the first transmission means includes a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is applied to the driving means, and the first driving force applied in the first predetermined section. a first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means, and the second transmission means can form a second predetermined section in which a second driving force is applied to the driving means. and a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force applied in the second predetermined section is applied to the driving means. In the state where one predetermined section is formed, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least part of the first predetermined section, and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the first transmitting means forms the first suppression section in at least part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively, and A game machine having a second transmission means is known (for example, JP-A-2015-53958). According to such a game machine, two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by one driving means, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the structure in which the two members are displaced by one driving means, the driving force for driving both members overlaps, so that the load on the driving means increases and the durability of the driving means deteriorates. rice field. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (the first member and the second member) are alternately displaced (one by one), the load on the driving means is reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed. Performance effects are hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the first transmission means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section that can make the load of the drive means smaller than the first predetermined section. In a state where the second transmission means is capable of forming the second predetermined section and the second suppression section in which the load on the driving means can be made smaller than the second predetermined section, and the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section. One transmission means forms a first restraint section, i.e. when one is relatively heavily loaded, the other is relatively lightly loaded, and when the other is relatively heavily loaded, the other is relatively heavily loaded. It can be relatively lightly loaded. Therefore, the load on the driving means can be distributed, so that the load on the driving means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to alternately displace the first member and the second member (one by one), it is possible to create a state in which both the first member and the second member are displaced. The production effect can be improved.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first member or the second transmission means in frictional contact with the peripheral surface of the cam member. and a cam friction contact member that imparts displacement to the second member, wherein in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the cam friction contact member per unit rotation of the cam member is set to the first predetermined amount. A game machine C2 characterized in that the load on the drive means is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the cam rubbing contact member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. and a crank rubbing member that has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides and that displaces the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. wherein, in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the crank friction contact member per unit rotation of the crank member is set to the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section The game machine C3 is characterized in that the load on the drive means is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the crank rubbing member.

According to the game machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction contact member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank friction contact member. Unit rotation of the cam member and the crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member can be changed. In other words, the load on the driving means can be varied. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, electric power supplied to the electric motor) is kept constant, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member can be varied. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member are varied to enhance the presentation effect while the first or second suppression In the section, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes an upward displacement component in the direction of gravity, and the first suppression section or the second In the second suppression section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the displacement of the first member or the second member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section has an upward displacement component in the direction of gravity. In addition, in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity. The load of the drive means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the drive means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

In addition, by changing the load of the driving means using the weight of the first member or the second member in this way, for example, the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction contact member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank member It is not necessary to change the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member when changing the load of the driving means as in the case of using interlocking, and the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member can be kept constant. The load of the driving means can be varied while maintaining the

In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means includes a cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the cam member being in frictional contact with the peripheral surface of the cam member to impart displacement to the first member. The second transmission means comprises a crank member having a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body, and the crank of the crank. a crank rubbing member having a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides, and the pin portion sliding along the guide groove to impart displacement to the second member; A game machine C5 characterized in that the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, since the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, there is space for separately arranging the cam member and the crank member. can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress displacement deviations of the first member and the second member, thereby enhancing the accuracy of synchronizing both members.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, thereby transmitting the driving force to the first member or the second member. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is possible to form a non-transmission interval for maintaining the two members in a stopped state, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission interval.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. The transmission can form a non-transmission interval that maintains the first member or the second member in a stopped state, and after passing through the non-transmission interval the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, so that it is in a stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when starting to displace the first member or the second member in the stopped state, the load on the driving means increases under the influence of inertia force, so the initial speed of the first member or the second member slows down. , where it is difficult to displace smoothly, the non-transmission section is provided for non-transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member so as to maintain the first member or the second member in a stopped state. The drive means can be idled in the transmission means to provide momentum, and displacement of the first member or the second member can be initiated after the momentum is provided (ie, through the non-transmission section). Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each non-transmission section. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form a non-transmission section, and after passing through each non-transmission section, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, neither the first member nor the second member needs to be displaced, during which the driving means can idle with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the drive means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member and the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, in a state in which one of the first member and the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member and the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when one of the first member and the second member is maintained in a stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the drive means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member and the second member can be displaced while one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. The production effect can be improved by avoiding the state.

In any one of game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a main body rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin eccentrically positioned from the center of rotation of the main body. and a guide groove in which the pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to impart displacement to the first member or the second member. A section in which the guide groove of the crank friction contact member is formed in an arc concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached a predetermined position in the guide groove changes its sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. A game machine C9 characterized in that, when the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, the rotation of the crank member is stopped.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C6 to C8, the section in which the guide groove of the crank friction contact member is formed in an arc concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as the non-transmission section. , the pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion reaches a predetermined position in the guide groove, changes the sliding direction, and enters the non-transmission section. When the pin portion is slid toward, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmitting section, so it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank friction contact member in an arc concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), whereas the pin of the crank member In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, when the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position, the shape of the non-transmission section becomes a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member. becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section after the direction change, not only does the sliding resistance increase, but also the amount of displacement of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member increases. is overloaded. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Slide Unit 2400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to slide the slide member, wherein the slide member is rotatable. and conversion means for converting sliding displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into rotational motion of the rotary member, wherein the conversion means converts the slide displacement into rotation of the rotary member. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being capable of forming a state that is not converted into exercise.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and drive means that applies a driving force to the slide member to cause the slide to be displaced. (For example, JP-A-2013-236802). Also known is a gaming machine in which a rotating member and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member are arranged on the slide member. According to this game machine, while the slide member is slidably displaced (linear motion), the rotary member arranged on the slide member can be rotated, and an effect combining the linear motion and the rotary motion can be performed. can be done.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotating the rotating member are arranged on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases, and the slide member needs to be driven. There is a problem that the load on the driving means for (sliding and displacing) becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since it comprises a rotating member rotatably disposed on the slide member and conversion means for converting the sliding displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational motion of the rotating member, The rotary member can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to provide the slide member with a drive means for driving (rotating) the rotating member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly, and the slide member can be driven (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for

In this case, according to the game machine D1, since the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member, only the form in which the rotating member rotates with the sliding displacement of the slide member Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the sliding member is slidably displaced while the rotating member remains non-rotating. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of motions (linear motions and rotary motions) of the slide member and the rotary member, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear formed to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. a pinion gear, and release means arranged on the base member so as to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear.

According to the gaming machine D2, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a pinion gear formed to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into rotational motion of the rotating member. In addition, since the conversion means has a release means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to create a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to form not only a configuration in which the rotating member rotates as the sliding member slides, but also a configuration in which the sliding member slides while the rotating member remains non-rotating. The number of combinations of member movements (linear and rotary) can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, the release means is provided on the base member, and there is no need to provide a means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. . As a result, the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby disengaging the rack gear and the pinion gear. A gaming machine D3 characterized by releasing.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the releasing means rotates at least the portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby allowing the rack gear and the rack gear to rotate. Since the meshing with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released) can be suppressed and the size can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D3, the teeth of at least one of the rack gear and the pinion gear are formed in such a shape that the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-described portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. , when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed, such meshing can be performed smoothly.

In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means releases the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least the portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby releasing the rack gear and the pinion gear. Since the meshing is released, the above-described portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction after such releasing, and when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed, such meshing can be performed smoothly.

In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear formed to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. and a pinion gear, wherein a part of the rack gear is missing teeth.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed to mesh with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear is partially toothless, when the pinion gear passes through the toothless portion of the rack gear, it is possible to create a state in which the sliding displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. . That is, according to this configuration, until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the tooth is missing, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide member. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the portion where the pinion gear is missing, the rotation of the rotary member can be continued by its inertia force.

As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, not only is the rotating member rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also in a state where the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped. A configuration in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of motion (linear and rotary) of the sliding member and the rotating member can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game machine D6, the gearing of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released by partially missing the teeth of the rack gear. Since there is no need to dispose the slide member on the side, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

The game machine D7 is characterized in that, among the teeth of the rack gear, the tooth adjacent to the missing portion has higher rigidity than the other teeth in the game machine D6.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, the teeth of the rack gear adjacent to the missing portion have higher rigidity than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. can be planned. That is, the tooth adjacent to the missing part is easily damaged because the tooth of the pinion gear that has passed through the missing part of the rack gear collides with each other, so the rigidity is increased to improve the durability. be able to.

As means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a form of increasing the face width of the teeth is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without deteriorating the engagement with the pinion gear.

In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear formed to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. and a one-way clutch disposed in a rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or from the pinion gear to the rotating member, wherein the one-way clutch changes between a state of allowing transmission of rotation and a state of blocking transmission of rotation. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed so as to be possible.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed to mesh with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so as to be able to change between a state of allowing transmission of rotation and a state of blocking it. A state can be created that is not translated into rotational motion of the member. That is, the one-way clutch is put in a state in which the transmission of rotation is allowed, and the rotary member is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide member. The slide member is slidably displaced while the slide member remains non-rotating, or when the displacement of the slide member is stopped, the one-way clutch is changed from a state of allowing transmission of rotation to a state of blocking it. is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member is continued by its inertial force.

Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, not only is the rotating member rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is non-rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the sliding member is displaced, or a form in which the rotating member is rotated while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped. can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The game machine D8 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the slide member, and driving means for driving the displacement member and disposed on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A game machine D9 comprising an operating element operated to change between a state of allowing and a state of blocking the operation, wherein the operating element is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of the game machine D8, the displacement member displaceably arranged on the slide member and the driving means arranged on the slide member while driving the displacement member are provided. , the movements (linear and rotary) of the slide member and the rotary member, as well as the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, since the manipulator of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacing member can serve both the role of effecting by displacement and the role of manipulating the manipulator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide means for operating the operating element of the one-way clutch on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch has an operator that is operated to change between a state of allowing transmission of rotation and a state of blocking it, and the base member is adapted to operate when the slide member is slidably displaced. A gaming machine D10 comprising an engaging portion positioned on a displacement trajectory of the operator, wherein the operator is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slidably displaced.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, the base member includes the engaging portion positioned on the displacement trajectory when the slide member is slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the engaging portion is provided. Since the manipulator is operated by the joint portion, there is no need to provide means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (i.e., manipulating the manipulator) on the slide member. can be lightened. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the arrangement position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the displacement trajectory of the manipulator described above. For example, it may be at one end or the other end of the displacement trajectory, or it may be in the middle of the displacement trajectory.

The game machine D10 comprises a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to slide the second slide member. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion can be changed along the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member as the member slides.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed along the direction of the slide displacement of the second slide member along with the slide displacement of the second slide member. The position at which the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position at which the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the restricted state to the permitted state can be changed. As a result, the position at which the rotation state of the rotating member is changed when the slide member is slid and the position at which the rotation member is rotated while the slide member is stopped from sliding can be changed according to, for example, the game state. It can be changed, and as a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, the second sliding member can also be slidably displaced, so that the production effect can be enhanced by that amount. , and the role of changing the position of the engaging portion, there is no need to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game machine D10 comprises a second slide member slidably disposed on the base member, and second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to slide the second slide member. A gaming machine D12 characterized in that the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position in which the manipulator is operable and a position in which the manipulator is not operable as a member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operator can be operated and the position where the operator cannot be operated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched when the slide member is slidably displaced. In other words, there is a mode in which the rotation state of the rotating member is changed while the slide member is being displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotation state of the rotating member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, the second sliding member can also be slidably displaced, so that the production effect can be enhanced by that amount. , and the role of changing the position of the engaging portion, there is no need to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, in the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be arranged on the second slide member, or may be arranged on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably disposed on the base member, and the second slide member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Slide Unit 8400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member and shielding opening means capable of forming a shielding state of shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an opening state of opening the predetermined area, the shielding opening means is: A first member arranged linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear arranged rotatably on the first member, and a second side rack gear meshing with the first side pinion gear. a second member that is arranged on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a base-side rack gear that is formed on the base member and meshes with the first-side pinion gear, wherein the first member and the first By linearly displacing the two members to one side, the shielding state is formed, and by linearly displacing the first member and the second member to the other side opposite to the one side, the A gaming machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a base member and shield opening means capable of forming a shielded state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an open state for opening the predetermined area. For example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-like rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined area, and the predetermined area is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. (to form a shielded state) On the other hand, by rotating each rotating plate 90 degrees and facing the plate thickness portion (side surface) to the front, a gap is provided between each rotating plate to open a predetermined area (to form an open state). (does) is disclosed.

However, according to the above-described conventional game machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotary plate remains in a predetermined area with the plate thickness portion (side surface) turned to the front after being rotated by 90 degrees. , there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the plate thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to how thin the plate can be made in order to ensure strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-shaped body having the same area as the predetermined region is displaceably arranged, and the predetermined region is shielded by displacing (arranging) the plate-shaped body to the predetermined region. On the other hand, there is also known a game machine configured to open a predetermined area (to form an open state) by withdrawing a plate-shaped body from a predetermined area (displacing it out of the predetermined area). there is According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the predetermined area can be completely opened by withdrawing the plate-like body from the predetermined area.

However, in a game machine with such a configuration, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, there is a space with the same area as the predetermined area as a space for arranging the plate-like body that is retracted from the predetermined area. There is a problem that it becomes necessary and causes an increase in size. In addition, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to evacuate the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area or arrange it from the retracted position to the predetermined area. , there is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the closed state and the open state.

In this case, according to the game machine E1, the shield opening means includes a first member arranged linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear arranged rotatably on the first member, and A second member having a second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and arranged linearly displaceable on the first member; and a base side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first side pinion gear. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side By doing so, an open state is formed.

That is, the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, since the first member and the second member are overlapped in a state in which the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to reduce the size of the space required for this.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while being accelerated relative to the first member. It is possible to shorten the time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined area or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area, thereby quickly switching between the shielded state and the open state.

The shielded state in which the predetermined area is shielded does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely shielded by the first member and the second member. may exist. Similarly, the open state in which a predetermined area is opened does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a portion of the predetermined area is partially opened by the first member or the second member. There may be occluded areas. That is, the shielded state should have a relatively large shielded area with respect to the open state. In other words, the open state should have a relatively large open area with respect to the shielded state.

In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion connected to the main body portion. a second body portion having the second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement portion connected to the second body portion. A game machine E2, wherein a first body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first member includes the first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable and the first displacement portion connected to the main body portion. a second body portion having a second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second body portion connected to the second body portion. and a second displacement portion, wherein the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined area, so that when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side. , only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion and the second main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and the trajectories thereof can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined area, and part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined area. The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear arranged on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. , the game machine E3, wherein the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the driving gear.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear arranged on the base member, and the first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear is provided on the first member. The structure for linearly displacing the first member with respect to the base member is achieved by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear. can be That is, of the space required outside the predetermined region of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear is A gaming machine E4 comprising: a third member having a meshed third side rack gear and arranged linearly displaceably on the second member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear. and a third member having a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear meshes and being arranged in the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side as the second member is displaced, and the second member is linearly displaced to the other side as the first member is linearly displaced. When the third member is linearly displaced to the other side, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side along with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, linear displacement of the first member, the second member and the third member to one side enables the first member, the second member and the third member to be arranged in a predetermined area to form a shielding state, and Linear displacement of the first, second and third members to the other side causes the first, second and third members to retreat from the predetermined area (displace out of the predetermined area). ), which can form an open state.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. Further, in a state in which the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and miniaturization can be achieved.

In particular, according to the structure in which a predetermined area is shielded by three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member), compared with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by two members As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superimposing a predetermined area divided into three than by superimposing a predetermined area divided into two.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while being accelerated relative to the first member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area or from the retracted position. It is possible to shorten the time required for arranging in a predetermined area and to switch between the shielded state and the open state more quickly.

In the gaming machine E4, the third member includes a third body portion having the third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable; A gaming machine E5 comprising a third displacement section connected to the main body section.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear that meshes with the second side pinion gear, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first Only the trajectories of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion, and the third main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and the trajectories thereof can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third displacement portion are moved to the predetermined region. Since no part of the member remains, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

By expanding the technical idea (relationship of the third member to the second member) in the gaming machine E4 or E5, the gaming machine may further include the fourth member, the fifth member, . . . , the nth member.

That is, the shield opening means has a second side pinion gear that is rotatably disposed on the second member and meshes with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear that meshes with the second side pinion gear. and a third member arranged linearly displaceable on the second member, and shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the n-th member and meshes with the base-side rack gear. and an n+1-th member having an n+1-th side rack gear with which the n-th pinion gear is meshed and arranged linearly displaceably on the n-th member ( However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member has a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and is connected to the third body portion. The n+1-th member has the n+1-th side rack gear meshed with the n-th pinion gear and is supported by the n-th member so as to be linearly displaceable. and an (n+1)-th displacement portion connected to the (n+1)-th body portion (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 3).

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the shielding opening means includes a third member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and a third member arranged to be linearly displaceable to the second member, and the first member and the second member facing one side or the other side. a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when linearly displaced by the Gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, the shielding opening means includes a third member arranged to be linearly displaceable in the second member, and a case where the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. and a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other along with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the following effects are obtained.

That is, linear displacement of the first member, the second member and the third member to one side enables the first member, the second member and the third member to be arranged in a predetermined area to form a shielding state, and Linear displacement of the first, second and third members to the other side causes the first, second and third members to retreat from the predetermined area (displace out of the predetermined area). ), which can form an open state.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. Further, in a state in which the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and miniaturization can be achieved.

In this way, according to the structure in which a predetermined area is shielded by three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member), compared with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by two members As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area becomes smaller by superimposing a predetermined area divided into three than by superimposing a predetermined area divided into two.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member while being accelerated relative to the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the speed of the second member is accelerated, and the third member linear displacement of at least the first member. By shortening the time required for retracting the first member, the second member and the third member from the predetermined area or arranging them from the retracted position to the predetermined area, switching between the shielded state and the open state can be performed more easily. can be done quickly.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as examples>
In a gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member that are displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the second member is arranged at the extended position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a first member and a second member that are linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an overhanging position (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-252533). In this type of game machine, for example, the first member and the second member, which are retracted to the retracted position, are displaced to the overhanging position and brought into close proximity or abutment to associate (integrate) the two. , are made to be viewed by the player as one character.

In this case, in order to enhance the presentation effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging positions. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member to be large.

However, in the conventional technology described above, since the first member and the second member are each displaced to the overhanging position by linear displacement, if the first member and the second member are increased in size, the overhanging position cannot be reached. They may interfere with each other during displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time. There is a problem that the production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first member is arranged at the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. As a result, the first member and the second member are prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed can be shortened, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, the second member is displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined so as to be arranged at the overhanging position.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the second member is displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement, so that the second member is arranged at the projecting position, so that the second member is curved. can form the trajectory of Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member while being displaced to the projecting position.

In the game machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement by being rotatably disposed on the linear base member. A gaming machine F3 characterized by:

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, it is equipped with a linear base member that is linearly displaced. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily suppress the second member from interfering with the first member in the middle of displacement to the extended position, and the second member can be freely positioned at the retracted position. degree can be increased. That is, the second member can be rotated in relation to the first member while being moved to the extended position by the linear displacement of the linear base member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. In addition, since the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the extended position, the flexibility of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

A game machine F2 or F3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device disposed in a game area, a retraction position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, and The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontal orientation at the extended position and arranged in a vertical orientation at the retracted position.

Here, in a configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally elongated shape and arranged in a horizontally elongated posture at the overhang position to form a character together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the production effect is sufficiently obtained. I can't do it. That is, since the game area is formed vertically long, and the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow, and the arrangement space for the members is reduced. is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it was necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a landscape orientation at the extended position, and arranged in a portrait orientation at the retracted position. Therefore, the space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively used, and the size of the second member can be increased accordingly. can be made larger.

The game machine F3 is characterized by comprising a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a converting mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, a driving means for imparting a driving force to the linear base member for linear displacement and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member while being displaced to the projecting position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed in a large size, and the character formed together with the first member in the protruding position can be made larger. . For example, even if it is a relatively narrow area such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area and it is difficult to secure the space for arranging the members, the second member is retracted to such an area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

Any one of the game machines F1 to F5 is provided with a third member that is displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the third member is in the overhanging position with the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being arranged with different front-rear positions.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, since the third member is formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position, the first member and the second member At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the performance effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is arranged at a front-rear direction position different from that of the first member and the second member at the extended position, the third member does not come into contact with the first member and the second member at the extended position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the protruding position, or when there is a possibility of contact, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of the damage due to the impact at the time of contact. , the first member and the second member, the displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later-starting third member is displaced so as to catch up with the starting first and second members at the overhanging position, and the production effect when forming a character can be enhanced. .

In the game machine F6, the third member has a protruding portion formed to protrude in the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

Here, if the front-rear direction positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made different, the front-rear dimension of the gaming machine increases accordingly. If the front-rear dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made small (thin) in order to suppress the front-rear dimensions, it becomes difficult to secure the rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the third member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the same side as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction. and the total of the second member and the third member) to reduce the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction, while increasing the front-rear dimension of the third member to ensure its rigidity. can do.

A gaming machine F8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the gaming machine F8 is characterized by comprising a contacted member disposed on the first member and with which a part of the second member abuts in an extended position.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a member to be abutted against which a part of the second member abuts in the extended position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by contacting the contact member.

The abutted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly abutted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the protruding positions, or the abutted member may be formed at a position where the first member and the second member are constantly abutted. It may be formed at a position where the second member abuts when both are closer than the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation when the second member is arranged at the extended position.

In the game machine F8, the member to be contacted is formed to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the first member is in a state in which the member to be contacted is separated from the first member. A game machine F9 characterized in that it is arranged in the overhanging position at .

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is configured such that the abutted member is the first Since it is arranged at the protruding position while being separated from the member, it is possible to reliably abut against the second member at the protruding position. Further, in the extended position, the abutted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member, so the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger.

A game machine F10 characterized in that, in the game machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the projecting position, the abutted member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the projecting position, the abutted member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member. A space can be formed for the member to be displaced. That is, when the first member is arranged at the protruding position, the abutted member is separated from the first member so as to perform the role of receiving the displacement of the second member, and then the contact member is moved to the first member. The abutted member is displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space for the second member, and the displacement of the second member can enhance the presentation effect.

In the game machine F8, the member to be contacted is formed to be displaceable in a direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member, at least at the retracted position, is the member to be contacted. A gaming machine F11 characterized in that it is in a state of being close to .

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed to be displaceable in the directions of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least at the retracted position. Since the contact member is brought close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the installation space for the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the abutted member is displaced away from the first member at the overhang position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be enlarged accordingly.

In the game machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the abutted member is maintained in a state of being close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. .

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the abutted member is in close proximity to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abutted member from interfering with the second member in the middle of the displacement to the projecting position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the performance effect.

In any one of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two pairs of the second member and the member to be contacted are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the member to be contacted in one pair, the contact The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the member to be abutted in the other pair is displaced toward the second member along with the second pair.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member contacts the contacted member. When they are in contact with each other, the member to be contacted in the other pair is displaced toward the second member along with the contact. , the contact member can be displaced toward the second member in the other pair along with the contact. Therefore, when the member to be contacted in the other group is brought into contact with the second member, the impact caused by the contact of the second member to the member to be contacted in the one group can be received only by the first member. Instead, it can be received by the second member in the other set. Thereby, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and breakage of each member can be suppressed.

As a structure in which the contacted member of the other set is displaced toward the second member as the contact of one set is displaced, for example, the displacement of the contacted member of the one set causes the contact of the other set to be displaced. A structure in which a contact member is transmitted to the abutting member, and the abutted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member along with the transmission, and the displacement of the abutted member in the one set is transmitted to the first member, and the displacement is transmitted to the first member. As the first member is displaced along with the transmission, a structure in which the abutted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member, or a structure in which these are combined, etc. are exemplified.

A game characterized in that any one of the game machines F1 to F13 is provided with a cyclically displaceable member that is in contact with the first member and the second member in the extended position and is formed to be capable of cyclical displacement. Machine F14.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F13, the periodic displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member and the second member at the extended position, and the periodic displacement member is , the periodic displacement is possible, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member can be used to periodically displace the first member and the second member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the performance effect. Further, in this case, by bringing the members into contact with each other, the structure is such that the cyclically displacing members share the cyclical displacement, and there is no need to provide a mechanism for cyclically displacing the first member and the second member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the extended position, or may be in a separated state (non-contact).

A game machine F15 characterized in that, in the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position in front of the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction in the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the front-rear direction position in the overhang position is ahead of the first member and the second member, so that the game It is possible to periodically displace (vibrate) a member (periodic displacement member) disposed on the side closer to the person. That is, since the character is vibrated with the member on the front side that is easily visible to the player as the vibration source, it is possible to perform an effect that easily conveys the force of the vibration to the player.

A gaming machine F16 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the overhang position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodically displacing member is the first. It can facilitate transmission to the first member and the second member. Also, the first member and the second member can be unrelated and cyclically displaced (oscillated) in different manners. That is, since the first member and the second member have mutually different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they vibrate in different manners. Therefore, the part formed by the first member and the part formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 700, and the lower combined unit 800 as examples>
A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the extended position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. When each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the extended position, each displacement means of the first group forms a first performance mode, and the displacement means of the second group forms a first performance mode. In a gaming machine in which a second performance mode is formed by each displacement means of the second group when each displacement means is arranged in the extended position, one displacement means of the first group and the A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising a shared means that also serves as one displacement means of the second group.

Here, from a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position A gaming machine with a second group is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this gaming machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhanging position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) to form one character (first On the other hand, when each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhanging position, each displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) to create another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect is performed to make the player recognize it. That is, in the first game state, each displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the first group is arranged to the overhanging position. A first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second game state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is extended to the extended position. By arranging them, an effect is performed in which the second character is formed in the game area by each displacement means of the second group.

In this case, it is effective to be able to form a larger character in order to enhance the presentation effect. For this purpose, each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group must be formed large.

However, forming a plurality of characters (drawing modes) as in the above-described conventional technique increases the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters, and each displacement means is retracted. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means because the area (space) for keeping them is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to make each character (drawing mode) larger.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since it is provided with dual-use means that serves as one displacement means in the first group and one displacement means in the second group, a plurality (second It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the 1st and 2nd) presentation modes, and to increase the size of each displacement means. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means is positioned such that the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode is different from the overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode. A gaming machine G2 characterized by:

Here, if the shared means is arranged at the same projecting position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are formed. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (common means) is used in the performance mode, which hinders interest. In addition, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode using the common means arranged at the same position (overhanging position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the combined means forms the overhang position arranged when forming the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. Since the overhang position that is actually arranged is set to a different position, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the shared means is used in both the first performance mode and the second performance mode. can be suppressed. In addition, since the common means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the degree of freedom can be increased, and the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode can be arranged. difference (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-use means is characterized in that the attitude when forming the first performance mode and the attitude when forming the second performance mode are different. Gaming machine G3.

Here, if the combined means has the same posture in the case where the first presentation mode is formed and the case in which the second presentation mode is formed, it is common to the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) is being used, which impairs interest. In addition, if it is necessary to form the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode by using the common means of the same posture, the degree of freedom will decrease accordingly, and the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode will be formed. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode of .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture for forming the first presentation mode and a posture for forming the second presentation mode. Since the positions are different from each other, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used in both the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and it is possible to suppress the inhibition of the interest. . In addition, since the shared means can be in different postures between the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode, the degree of freedom can be increased, and the difference (shape or arrangement) between the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode can be increased. position) can be easily formed.

In the game machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged in the projecting position for forming the first effect mode, it moves back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means of the first group. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the directional positions are different and at least a part overlaps when viewed from the front.

Here, the dual-purpose means is set to a different overhanging position or (and) a different posture depending on whether the first presentation mode is formed or the second presentation mode is formed, thereby forming a plurality of stop states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure is complicated, and the stopping state (arrangement position and/or attitude) tends to vary accordingly. In this case, in a structure in which the shared means abuts on the one displacement means at the overhang position (at least partly coincides in front-back direction position), if the arrangement position or posture of the shared means does not reach the target position, the one While a gap is formed with the displacement means, if the disposition position or posture of the shared means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause positional deviation. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with the one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged in the projecting position when forming the first effect mode, the first group Since the position in the front-rear direction differs from at least one of the displacing means and at least partially overlaps with it in a front view, even if there is a variation in the stop state (extended position or/and posture) of the one displacement means, It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the combined means. That is, even when the displacement of the shared means is insufficient due to the partial overlap in a front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the shared means and the one displacement means. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the one displacement means due to being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the shared means.

In the game machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when arranged in the overhanging position for forming the first effect mode. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the game machine G5, in the game machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are arranged in the projecting position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are brought into contact with each other, the one displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) to make it easier for the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the dual-purpose means is likely to cause variations in the stopped state (extended position or (and) posture), but such dual-purpose means is not in the extended position when forming the first effect mode. In a structure in which one displacing means abuts (at least a part of which is aligned in the front-rear direction), if the disposing position or posture of the dual-purpose means does not reach the target position, a gap is created between the one displacing means and the one displacing means. is formed and the association (integration) is inhibited. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a positional deviation, thus interfering with association (integration). That is, when one displacement means and another displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the game machine G4 (the positions in the front-rear direction are different and ) is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine G5, when the shared means is arranged in the overhanging position for forming the first effect mode, it is positioned in front of the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the front-rear direction. A gaming machine G6 characterized in that the one displacement means and the other displacement means are overlapped with each other in a front view.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is placed in the protruding position for forming the first effect mode, it is more flexible than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and overlaps the portion where the one displacement means and the other displacement means contact each other in a front view, for example, the one displacement means and/or the other displacement means When a gap is formed between the two displacement means due to deviation of the target positions of the two, the gap can be shielded by the shared means to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gap. As a result, it is possible to suppress obstruction of the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the shared means.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member so that rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. and an overhanging position of the dual-purpose means that is displaced in a manner to form the first effect mode, and an overhanging position of the dual-purpose means that is arranged to form the second effect mode. are positioned at different positions, and the posture of the dual-use means when forming the first effect mode and the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the second effect mode are different postures. A game machine G7 characterized by

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G6, it is provided with a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the combined means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the rotary displacement and the linear displacement are achieved. Since it is displaced in combination with the displacement, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the protruding position and posture when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the longitudinal position of one displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the shared means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machine G7, the position of one displacement means in the first group in the front-rear direction is set between the linear base member and the dual-use means. By locating the means closer to the front side, it is possible to make the positions of the one displacement means and the combined means closer to each other in the front-rear direction while making it easier for the player to visually recognize them. Therefore, by associating (integrating) the one displacement means with the dual-use means, the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In the gaming machine G8, in a state where one displacement means and the combined means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view. A gaming machine G9 characterized by:

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effects of the game machine G8, in a state in which one displacement means and dual-purpose means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means and the linear base member Since they are arranged in overlapping positions when viewed from the front, when the one displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position to form the first effect mode, the one displacement means is arranged in a straight line. Contact with the side surface of the base member can be suppressed.

In the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position not overlapping the linear base member in a front view. and, while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the extended position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is: A game machine G10 characterized in that at least a region in which the other displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front is smaller than a region in which the one displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effects of the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and dual-use means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means is positioned in front of the linear base member. The linear base member is arranged at a position that does not overlap in view, and the other displacement means is arranged at a position that overlaps the linear base member in a front view while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position. Since at least the area where the other displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front is smaller in the front-to-rear dimension than the area where the one displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front, the other displacement means is arranged to form the first effect mode. And when the linear base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent other displacing means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

The game machine G10 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-use means, wherein the conversion mechanism A game machine G11, wherein said one displacement means of said linear base member is arranged in an overlapping region in a front view at the retracted position.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effects of the game machine G10, there are provided a drive means for linearly displacing the linear base member by applying a driving force, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. , the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the combined means can be synchronized, so that the relative positional accuracy (orientation) of the combined means with respect to the linear base member can be enhanced. Therefore, by associating (integrating) the displacement means and the dual-purpose means, the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the combined means can be formed in a larger size, and the character formed at the extended position can be made larger. For example, even if it is a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the shared means material is retracted to such an area. The shared means can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In this case, the conversion mechanism is arranged in a region where one displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the retracted position in the front view, so that the other region of the linear base member (where the conversion mechanism is not arranged) area) can be reduced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (common means) are displaced to the extended position, it is possible to prevent the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Characteristic H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
A performance mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of performance modes, a display means capable of displaying the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, and step information of a plurality of stages on the display means. step information display means for displaying, step information changing means for varying the step information displayed by the step information display means, and when the step information is changed to predetermined step information by the step information changing means and switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to a display mode corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. and a gaming machine H1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of performance modes can be set as performance modes displayed on a display device, and when a specific performance mode is set, a predetermined score is awarded to a player, There is one in which an effect is executed based on the cumulative value of given points (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-215579).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since points are given only in a specific production mode, all the accumulated points acquired when shifting to another production mode are discarded. There is a problem that the desire to obtain a score is lowered and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. In addition, in order to reliably execute the production using the given score, it is necessary to fix the production mode to a specific production mode from the time when the score is given until the production based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production became monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, one of the plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display means. The stage information display means variably displays the stage information of a plurality of stages on the display means, and when the stage information is changed to the predetermined stage information, the specified stage information is displayed by the specific stage information execution means. is executed. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means is switched by the switching means to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, even if a different presentation mode is set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set presentation mode. It is possible to perform the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

The game machine H1 has level information storage means for storing the level information displayed by the level information display means, and the level information display means, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the stage information is displayed based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. The step information displayed by the step information display means is stored by the step information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, the step information is displayed by the step information display means based on the step information stored in the step information storage means.

Thereby, even when the display mode is switched by the switching means, it is possible to display the step information based on the step information stored in the step information storage means. Therefore, even if a different presentation mode is set, the presentation using the stage information can be continuously executed, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Note that the display mode corresponding to the presentation mode is, for example, the number, letters, symbols used in the currently set presentation mode, and the characters that appear in that presentation mode. It is conceivable to use a display mode using In addition, it is conceivable to change the image attached to the identification information that can identify the score to be given to a display mode using an image corresponding to the motif (for example, sea or mountain) used in the currently set production mode. be done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in a display mode corresponding to the currently set presentation mode, even if the presentation mode changes while the presentation of displaying the stage information is being executed, the changed presentation mode is displayed. The stage information can be displayed without giving a sense of incongruity.

The game machine H3, wherein the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information in the game machine H2.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, at least the predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that different presentation modes are set in the state where the predetermined stage information is displayed, Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the predetermined level information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the step information is displayed is being executed.

The gaming machine H4, wherein the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information that approximates the predetermined stage information in the gaming machine H2 or H3.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or H3, since the approximation level information at least approximating the predetermined level information is stored by the level information storage means, when the approximation level information is displayed, Even if a different presentation mode is set and the display mode is switched, the approximation level information can be displayed in the display mode after the switching. Therefore, when the presentation mode is switched in a state in which the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is about to be displayed is displayed, the stage information not approximating the predetermined stage information is displayed, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Here, as the approximation level information in the game machine H4, for example, in the case of using an indicator capable of displaying the level information in 7 levels, the level information indicating the 7th level (MAX) is set as the predetermined level information, and the approximation is performed. It is preferable to set the stage information indicating the sixth stage as the stage information.

A plurality of approximation level information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the predetermined level information. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when a different presentation mode is set and the display mode is switched.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the performance mode setting means has specific performance mode setting means for setting the specific performance mode when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. A gaming machine H5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, a specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

As a result, it is possible to switch the presentation mode according to the stage information to be displayed, so that there is an effect that the presentation effect of displaying the stage information can be enhanced.

Here, if the game machine H3 has the configuration, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the presentation mode is switched in a state where the predetermined level information is not displayed, there is an effect that the presentation effect of displaying the level information can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine H4 has the configuration, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the presentation mode is switched in a state where the approximation level information is not displayed, there is an effect that the presentation effect of displaying the level information can be further enhanced.

In the game machine H5, the step information display means displays the predetermined step information as the step information when the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means. Game machine H6 to play.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, when a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means, predetermined stage information is displayed as stage information by the stage information display means. .

As a result, when specific stage information is displayed, a specific presentation mode is set, and when the display mode is switched, predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the display mode will be switched in the effect in which the stage information is displayed.

Here, if the game machine H3 has the configuration, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the performance mode in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance. There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine H4 has the configuration, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the state in which neither the predetermined stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, in the state in which the stage information is displayed, the performance mode is switched in the state where the expectation of the jackpot is low. is displayed, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player, and the effects of the performance can be further enhanced.

In any one of game machines H1 to H6, variable amount determination means for determining a variable amount of the stage information to be varied by the stage information variable means; and variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable amount of the stage information to be varied by the stage information varying means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting means is determined. Displayed by variable information display means.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the variable amount by which the stage information is changed by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

Furthermore, since the variable amount by which the step information is varied is displayed as the variable information corresponding to the presently set presentation mode, the variable information is displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable even if the presentation mode is switched. It has the effect of being able to

The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information specifically indicating the variable amount or information suggesting the variable amount (for example, information such as a large variable amount or a small variable amount). If the stage information is displayed, it may be information indicating the stage information to be changed among the plurality of stage information.

In addition, the timing of displaying the variable information may be appropriately set based on the variable information to be displayed. It is preferable to display the variable information after the step information is changed by . As a result, the player can pay attention to the state in which the step information changes, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if information suggesting a variable amount or information indicating step information to be changed is displayed as variable information, it is preferable to display the variable information before the step information is changed by the step information changing means. As a result, it is possible to make the user pay attention to how the step information is specifically changed after grasping the displayed variable information, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H7, variable information differentiation means for dividing the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display for displaying the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means. and display timing setting means for setting timing.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is divided into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information dividing means, and the display timing for displaying the small variable information is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to divide and display the variable information for varying the step information. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, as a method of differentiating variable information by the variable information differentiating means, when the variable information displays a specific numerical value (for example, a score), the numerical value (score) is divided into a plurality of numerical values (small scores). ), and if the variable information is a display that suggests the variable content of the step information (for example, the degree of change or the variable target), it should be divided so that the suggested content is displayed step by step. Just do it. As a result, the player can continue to pay attention to the effect in which the step information is varied, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when displaying variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, variable information (level information that is advantageous to the player) is highly expected to be changed to predetermined level information. variable information) should be displayed later. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the performance can be executed while keeping the player's sense of expectation until the end.

In the game machines H1 to H8, the performance mode setting means has setting regulation means for regulating the setting of the predetermined performance mode according to the set performance mode. Game machine H9.

According to the game machine H9, since the setting of a predetermined effect mode is regulated by the setting regulation means according to the set effect mode, various effects can be executed by using a plurality of effect modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate the switching of the predetermined presentation mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the step information is switched by the switching means, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to understand that the effect of displaying the step information is continuously executed. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In the game machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the set condition when any one of the plurality of set conditions is established. priority order setting means for setting a priority order, and when a plurality of the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is based on the setting condition with the high priority order set by the priority order setting means A gaming machine H10 characterized by setting a mode.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when any one of a plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the effect mode is set based on the setting condition. Priority order is set for a plurality of setting conditions by the priority order setting means, and when a plurality of setting conditions are established, the setting condition having the highest priority order set by the priority order setting means is produced. Aspects are set.

As a result, since the presentation mode is set based on the setting condition with the highest priority, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Feature J group> (Production display position setting)
a display means having a display area; a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period; In a gaming machine comprising a second effect execution means for executing a second effect, the second effect execution means includes the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. A game machine J1 characterized in that the second effect is executed at the same time.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that executes an effect in which a point indicating a predetermined value is displayed on a display device, and gives a privilege effect when the point reaches a predetermined number (for example, , JP-A-2012-179176).

In such a conventional game machine, a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and there is a problem that the manner in which the points are displayed becomes monotonous. Also, if the points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying the points on the display device, the display of another effect executed on the display device overlaps the display of the points, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. There was a problem that

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing means on the display means having a display area for a predetermined period, and while the first effect executing means is being executed, the second effect is executed. A predetermined second effect on the display means is executed in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect by the effect executing means.

Thus, the position where the second performance is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first performance being executed, and the overlapping display of the first performance and the second performance can be prevented. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine J1, the second effect executing means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means, and the second effect when the second effect is executed. A game machine J2 characterized by comprising area variable means for varying the allowable area based on the display mode of one effect.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means. Then, the allowable area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

This makes it possible to vary the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area where the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine J2 has a first effect determination means for determining a subject display area in which a main image is displayed in the first effect displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means, A game characterized in that the area varying means varies the allowable area in which the second effect can be executed based on the display area determined as the subject display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect determination means determines the subject display area in which the main image is displayed in the first effect displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means. Then, the allowable area in which the second effect can be executed is varied by the area varying means based on the display area determined as the subject display area by the first effect determining means.

This makes it possible to vary the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the main image is displayed in the first effect. Therefore, since it becomes possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

In the game machine J3, the area varying means sets the display area determined as the subject display area by the first effect determination means to be the prohibited area where the second effect is difficult to execute, and allows areas other than the subject display area. A game machine J4 characterized by being a region.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display area determined as the subject display area by the first effect determining means is set as the prohibited area where the second effect is difficult to execute by the area changing means. Areas other than the main display area are set as the allowable area by the area changing means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed from overlapping, thereby reducing the effect of the effect. effective.

In the gaming machine J3, the first effect determination means determines a specific subject display area in which the subject image is no longer displayed after a predetermined period of time from among the display areas determined to be the subject display areas. A game machine J5 characterized in that it has a discrimination means, and the area changing means makes the display area, which is determined as the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area determination means, the allowable area.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, of the display areas determined to be the subject display area, the specific subject display area in which the subject image will not be displayed after the elapse of a predetermined period of time is determined by the specific subject display area determination means, and the display determined to be the specific subject display area. The area is made an allowable area by the area changing means.

As a result, the display area after the predetermined period of time has elapsed can be set as the allowable area as the display area for executing the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to give a range to the timing of executing the second effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value and second value information having a higher value than the first value information as the second effect in any one of the game machines J2 to J5. and allowable area setting means capable of setting the allowable area to a first allowable area and a second allowable area different from the first allowable area, wherein the second effect executing means includes the first allowable area. A gaming machine J6 characterized in that the value information is set to be displayed in the first allowable area and the second value information is displayed in the second allowable area.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first value information indicating at least a predetermined value and second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means as the second effect, and the allowable area is set by the allowable area setting means. A first allowable region and a second allowable region different from the first allowable region are set. Then, the second effect executing means sets the first value information to be displayed in the first allowable area and the second value information to be displayed in the second allowable area.

As a result, it is possible to display the value information in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, since value information indicating different values can be displayed in different small areas, for example, even when displaying the same value in total, the first value information can be displayed multiple times in the first allowable area. A plurality of display methods can be set, such as displaying the second value information only once in the second allowable area. Therefore, since the player sees the value information displayed on the display means while paying attention to the portion where the value information is displayed and the number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. There is

Any one of the game machines J1 to J7 has display image creation means for creating a display image to be displayed on the display means, and the display image creation means is a first layer on which at least the first effect is displayed. and a second layer on which the second effect is displayed are synthesized to create the display image, and a first synthesizing process of superimposing the first layer on the front side of the second layer and a second synthesizing process of making transparent the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display image displayed on the display means is created by the display image creation means by synthesizing at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed and the second layer on which the second effect is displayed. . Then, the first layer is superimposed on the front side of the second layer by the first synthesizing process, and the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer is transparent by the second synthesizing process. be done.

As a result, it is possible to easily display the first effect and the second effect on the display means at the same time, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

In the gaming machine J8, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas. Gaming machine J9.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

As a result, there is no need to change the display content of the second layer according to the area where the second effect is displayed, and the display area corresponding to the display area of the first layer that is transmitted through the second layer can be displayed. Only the displayed second effect is visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the first effect and the second effect on the display means at the same time, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

<Characteristics K group> (change the production navigation on the way)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result; and a result of discrimination by the discrimination means. and display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, wherein the effect executed by the effect executing means Period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of performance, elapsed information display means for displaying elapsed information indicating an elapsed period from the start of the specific period, and display by the elapsed information display means. specific effect mode information display means for displaying specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode given to a player when said progress information satisfies a predetermined condition; and said progress displayed by said progress information display means. A game machine K1 characterized by comprising a performance mode changing means for varying the specific performance mode information based on information.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a time gauge that displays the progress of the effect, and display the progress of the effect to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6280). In such a conventional gaming machine, the player predicts the lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter and plays the game. Furthermore, since the performance continues, there is a problem that the motivation to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter is lowered.

On the other hand, in the game machine K1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, the privilege giving means gives a privilege to the player. The effect execution means executes an effect based on the result of determination by the determination means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Specific period information indicating a specific period of the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed by the period information display means, and elapsed information indicating an elapsed period from the start of the specific period is displayed by the elapsed information display means. . Further, when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a predetermined condition, specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode given to the player is displayed by the specific effect mode information display means, and the progress information is displayed. The specific effect mode information is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

As a result, it is possible to change the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode that is given when the progress information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the specific period satisfies a predetermined condition based on the progress information. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. A gaming machine K2, wherein the effect mode varying means varies the pseudo specific effect mode of the specific effect mode information.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific effect mode display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode, and the specific effect mode is displayed. Of the information, the pseudo-specific effect mode is varied by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, the pseudo specific effect mode that is displayed in a pseudo manner is varied based on the progress information, so that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display content based on the progress information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the degree of expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result can be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition. The gaming machine K3 is characterized by having a time display means, wherein the effect mode varying means makes the specific effect mode information variable when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the progress information display means displays the expectation that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the progress information can be displayed by the expectation display means when the progress information satisfies a specific display condition, and the progress information is displayed. When a specific display condition is satisfied, the specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, it is possible to perform both of the expectation degree display and the change of the specific presentation mode information at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and to improve the interest in the game.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3 has specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined performance mode is provided as the specific performance mode.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, when a predetermined performance mode is given as a specific performance mode, the specific period is extended by the specific period extending means. , it is possible to set a specific period according to the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine K4 is characterized by having extended period information display means for displaying the extended period extended by the specified period extending means using at least part of the specified period information displayed by the specified period information display means. A game machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4, the extended period extended by the specified period extending means is displayed by the extended period information display means using at least part of the specified period information, There is an effect that the amount of display data for displaying the extended period can be reduced.

In the game machine K4 or K5, at least a part of the elapsed information displayed by the elapsed information display means is used as the elapsed information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the extended period extended by the specific period extending means. A gaming machine K6 characterized by having an extension progress information display means for displaying the extension progress information.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period from the start of the extended period extended by the specific period extending means is determined by using at least part of the elapsed information. Since it is displayed by the information display means, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the display data for displaying the progress information of the extension period.

Any one of the game machines K4 to K6 has an expectation degree display converting means capable of converting the degree of expectation displayed by the degree of expectation display means when the specific period is extended by the specific period extending means. A game machine K7 characterized by.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation displayed by the expectation display means is converted by the expectation conversion means. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that the specific period will be extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines K7, the specific period information used when the extended period information display means displays the extended period includes the specific display for the degree of expectation display means to display the degree of expectation. An establishment period in which a condition can be satisfied is included, and when the extension progress information by the extension progress information display means passes the establishment period, the expectation conversion means converts the expectation level. A gaming machine K8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the extended period information display means displays the extended period, the specific period information including the establishment period in which the specific display condition for displaying the expectation level by the expectation level display means can be satisfied is used. When the extension progress information passes the establishment period, the expectation conversion means converts the expectation.

Thereby, when the expectation level is converted by the expectation level conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation level display displayed during the period when the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is executed. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to display that the degree of expectation is changed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a movement on the time gauge. A gaming machine K9 characterized by displaying a body.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a moving body moving on the progress information time gauge.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific period by the time gauge, and the progress information can be easily grasped by the moving state of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K9, the expectation level display means displays the expectation level when the establishment condition is established when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the extension period information display means. displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position on the time gauge. A game machine K10 characterized in that it displays.

According to the gaming machine K10, when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, the establishment condition is established, and the degree of expectation is displayed by the degree of expectation display means. Then, the extension period is displayed using part of the time gauge by the extension period information display means. Furthermore, the extension progress information is displayed by moving the moving body to a predetermined position on the time gauge by the extension progress information display means.

This makes it possible to display the extended period using the time gauge and the moving object. Therefore, the extension period can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Furthermore, since the display data for displaying the specific period can be used as the display data for displaying the extended period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

A game machine K11 in the game machine K9 or K10, wherein the time gauge has a plurality of paths along which the moving body can move.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K9 or K10, since it has a plurality of paths along which the moving body can move, the player can predict which path the moving body will move. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through a branch position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of paths. Game machine K12.

According to the game machine K12, in addition to the effects of the game machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of paths. , it is possible for the player to predict which path the moving object will take again when the specific period is extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group L> (variable each effect mode of continuous slot effect)
An operation means operable by a player, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect execution means executes a specific effect that can be executed multiple times within a specific period of time, the operation effect set with an operation valid period during which at least the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid. a performance mode varying means for varying the performance mode of other operation performances based on information relating to an operation for at least one of the plurality of operation performances executed during the specific performance. Gaming machine L1.

Here, some game machines, such as pachinko machines, are provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and by operating the operation means, an effect of arranging predetermined patterns is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-223651).

In such a conventional game machine, an effective period is set for validating the operation of the operation means, and operating the operation means within the effective period only executes a specific effect, which makes the game monotonous. As a result, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine L1, the effect execution means executes an effect based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means is displayed on the display means. Is displayed. Further, a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, wherein an operation effect set with an operation effective period during which at least the operation to the operating means is determined to be effective is executed a plurality of times within the specific period, and Based on the information regarding the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation effects executed during the effect, the effect mode of the other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means.

Thus, in a specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, it is possible to change the effect mode of other operation effects based on the operation content of the operating means in one operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the game machine L1, the game machine L2 is characterized in that the effect mode varying means varies the operation effective period of the other operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, the operation effective period of other operation effects can be varied by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting bored with the game.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the game machine L3 is characterized in that the effect mode varying means varies the number of times of the other operation effect.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the operation effect is to execute a symbol effect of dynamically displaying a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period. The game machine L4 is characterized by having privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by a plurality of the operation performances in the specific performance form a predetermined combination.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operating means is operated during the effective period of operation, a symbol effect for dynamically displaying the symbols to be stopped and displayed is executed as the operation effect, and the symbols stopped and displayed by the plurality of operation effects in the specific effect are displayed in a predetermined manner. When they are combined, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the symbols stopped and displayed for each of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game while the specific effect is being executed.

Any one of the game machines L1 to L4 has operation timing determination means for determining timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period set for the operation effect, and the effect mode changing means A game machine L5, characterized in that the effect mode of the other operation effect is variable based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation timing determination means determines the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period set in the operation presentation. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode changing means.

Thus, it is possible to change the effect mode of another operation effect according to the operation timing of the operating means in one operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine L5, the effect mode changing means is operated when the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means is operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started. , a game machine L6, which increases the number of times of the other operation effects.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the start of the operation effective period of one operation effect, the effect mode changing means changes the number of times of the other operation effect. Increased.

As a result, it is possible to increase the number of operation performances by operating the operation means at an early stage. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L5 or L6, the effect execution means can execute the other operation effect a plurality of times, and the operation timing determining means determines that after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started, When it is determined that the operation means has been operated over a predetermined period of time, a first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation timing determining means determines whether the operation is valid for the first operation effect. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the period has started, it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the predetermined period since the operation valid period of the one operation effect has started. The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the same number of operation performances as in the case are executed.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5 or L6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect execution means executes other operation effects a plurality of times, and the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated for a predetermined period after the start of the operation effective period of one operation effect. Then, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect executing means. Then, when it is determined that the operation means is operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the first operation effect is started, within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started. The same number of operation performances as when it is determined that the operation means is operated are executed.

As a result, even if the operating means cannot be operated within a predetermined period of time in one operation presentation, one operation can be performed by operating the operating means within a predetermined period of time during the next first operation presentation. It is possible to perform the same number of operation performances as when the operating means is operated within a predetermined period in the performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of operation performances to a player who did not notice that the operation performance was executed or who was too focused on the operation performance and was unable to operate the operation means early. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L7, the effect executing means performs a normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of the one operation effect. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it executes.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of one operation effect, the normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, the player who did not operate the operating means during the effective period of operation, that is, the player who does not like the operation performance is repeatedly executed with the operation performance, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play. has the effect of being able to suppress

In any one of the game machines L4 to L8, the game machine L9 is characterized in that the greater the number of times of the operation performances executed by the performance execution means, the more easily the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L4 to L8, the greater the number of operation performances executed by the performance execution means, the easier it is for the privilege granting means to give a privilege, so that the player is motivated. It is possible to have the player operate the operation means, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

<M group of features> (changes the aspect of the slot effect based on the remaining period of the operation valid period)
Operation means operable by a player, operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period during which an operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and effect execution means for executing an effect for which the operation valid period is set. and display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. and executing a dynamic display effect of stopping and displaying predetermined identification information from the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed by operating the operation means when the operation valid period is set. wherein, when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode and dynamically displayed. A gaming machine M1 characterized by:

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player, and an effect is executed to align predetermined symbols by operating the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-2012). 223651).

In such a conventional game machine, an effective period is set for validating the operation of the operation means, and operating the operation means within the effective period only executes a specific effect, which makes the game monotonous. As a result, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, an operation valid period for which the operation of the operation means that the player can operate is determined to be valid is set by the operation valid period setting means, and an effect for which the operation valid period is set is executed. A performance mode based on the performance is displayed on the display means. Then, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and operates the operation means when the operation valid period is set to dynamically display the plurality of identification information. A dynamic display effect for stopping and displaying predetermined identification information from the information is executed, and when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period changes. displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is varied depending on the remaining period of the operation validity period in which the operation to the operation means is valid, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the game machine M1, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time. Remaining period determining means for determining a period, and when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period, at least part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A game machine M2 characterized by having a dynamic display mode changing means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determination means. be. Then, when the remaining period determining means determines that the predetermined remaining period is reached, at least part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches the predetermined remaining period, so it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation valid period in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced when executing the dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 has specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode is the plurality of dynamic display effects. The game machine M3 is characterized in that the specific identification information among the identification information has a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.

According to the game machine M3, when the specific identification information is statically displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect executing means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification among the plurality of identification information is displayed as the variable dynamic display mode. A dynamic display mode is provided in which the information is more easily identifiable than other identification information.

As a result, the specific identification information for executing a specific effect when stopped and displayed becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the game machine M3, the effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect executing means executes during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a plurality of dynamic display effects satisfies a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is the one dynamic display mode. The game machine M4 is characterized by a dynamic display mode that dynamically displays variable symbols that satisfy the predetermined condition by being stopped and displayed in the display effect.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times is executed by the effect executing means, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means when the combination of the above satisfies a predetermined condition. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, a dynamic display mode is obtained in which a variable symbol that satisfies a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by static display in one dynamic display effect.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol that satisfies the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in one dynamic display effect. be. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the operation means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the game machines M2 to M4, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed, and the remaining period determining means includes: The game machine M5 is characterized in that it is determined whether the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is discriminated by the remaining period discriminating means based on the remaining number of times of the operation effective period.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the number of remaining operation effective periods, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means during the remaining operation effective period. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of game machines M1 to M5, arrangement information storage means for storing arrangement information in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined arrangement; starting position setting means for setting a starting position of dynamic display, wherein the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the starting position setting means is set by the operation valid period setting means A first start position at which the predetermined position of the arrangement information is likely to be displayed on the display means and a second start position at which the predetermined position of the arrangement information is difficult to be displayed on the display means within the operation valid period set. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that it is capable of setting

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, arrangement information in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined arrangement is stored by the arrangement information storage means, and the start position of dynamic display using the arrangement information stored in the arrangement information storage means is set by the start position setting means. set by Predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information. A first start position at which a predetermined position of the arrangement information is likely to be displayed on the display means and a second start position at which the predetermined position of the arrangement information is difficult to be displayed on the display means within the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means. is set by the start position setting means.

As a result, using the same arrangement information, it is possible to perform dynamic display in which predetermined identification information is easily displayed on the display means and dynamic display in which predetermined identification information is difficult to be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the data volume of display data for executing dynamic display can be reduced.

The game machine M7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M1 to M6, the effect executing means has dynamic display speed varying means for varying the speed of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M6, the speed of dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display speed changing means, so the number of times the predetermined identification information is displayed within the valid operation period. can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide various effects to the player, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Feature N Group> (Determines the next button effect based on the content of the button operation)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated, a determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means, and the Operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on a determination result by the determination means, and a determination result determined by the determination means during a period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect execution means. and a determining means for determining when the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within a period in which a predetermined condition is established after the first operation effect mode is executed, the and execution control means for switching the second operation presentation mode to a specific operation presentation mode for execution based on a determination result by the determination means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operation of actually pressing an operation button and an operation of automatically executing repeated hitting operations by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period are used as operation effects using the operation buttons. (For example, JP-A-2014-180364).

In such a conventional game machine, in an operation effect (for example, a repeated hit effect) that requires the operation button to be operated multiple times, the operation button is actually pressed multiple times, or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. , it was possible to enjoy the operation effect by automatically executing the continuous hitting operation, but when the operation effect is continuously executed multiple times, the operation effect that is executed first There is a problem that the executed operation to the frame button may be executed in the operation performance to be executed later, and the performance effect of the operation performance to be executed later is lowered.

Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, as the operation effect of operating the operation button, the operation effect described above (continuous hit effect) and the operation effect of operating the operation button at a predetermined timing (for example, timing press effect) are provided for the player. There are some that have an operation effect that makes you perform different operations. In this case, when the timing push effect is executed after the repeated hit effect is executed, the timing push effect is started while the operation (continuous hit operation) that is executed during the repeated hit effect is continuously executed. However, there is a problem that the operation button is operated without aiming at the predetermined timing during the timing pressing effect, and the effect of the timing pressing effect is lowered.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, production is generally executed based on the fluctuation period of special symbols. Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the interval at which multiple operation effects are executed. Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, it was not possible to solve the problem by a simple method of lengthening the intervals at which a plurality of operation effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine N1, when the player operates the operation means, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and determined by the determination means. A predetermined operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. The determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means while the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect execution means. If the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, the execution control means controls the determination result by the determination means. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to the specific operation effect mode and executed.

As a result, when the second operation effect mode is executed within a period in which the predetermined condition is established after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed It is possible to switch the second operation presentation mode to a specific operation presentation mode and execute it based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine N1, the determination means determines the determination result determined by the determination means to be at least a first determination result different from the first determination result during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is executed. When the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained, the execution control means selects the first determination result as the specific operation rendering mode. A game machine N2 characterized by executing a corresponding operation presentation mode.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means as a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result. . Then, when the determining means determines that the first determination result is obtained, the operation effect mode based on the first determination result is executed as the specific operation effect mode by the execution control means.

As a result, as the second operation presentation mode, it is possible to execute the operation presentation mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being performed. Therefore, when the operation presentation mode is continuously executed, the presentation effect does not deteriorate. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced by continuing the operation production modes.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means determines that the specific operation presentation mode is the The game machine N3 is characterized by switching to an operation presentation mode in which an operation means is operated a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means switches the specific operation presentation mode to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times. be done.

As a result, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation presentation mode, an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation presentation mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the performance effect of the second operation performance mode does not decrease, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. .

In a gaming machine N3, an operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is executed, and the number of times measured by the operation number measuring means are discriminated. and a number-of-times determining means, wherein the determining means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number-of-times determining means. A gaming machine N4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the operation means is operated is counted by the operation count measuring means while the first operation presentation mode is being executed, and the number counted by the operation count measuring means is discriminated by the number discriminating means. . Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines the first determination result and the third determination result different from the first determination result.

As a result, it is possible to switch between the second operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operating means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed.

In gaming machine N4, game machine N5 is characterized in that said determination means determines said first determination result when said determination result of said number of times determination means is greater than a predetermined number of times. .

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination means is greater than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the first determination result. Thus, when the operation means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the operation presentation mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation presentation mode. It is possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the state in which the player is actively operating the operating means can be continued.

In the game machine N4, the determining means determines the third determination result when the determination result of the number of times determining means is less than a predetermined number of times. .

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effects of the game machine N4, when the determination result of the number determination means is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the third determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated less than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is selected as the second operation effect mode. You can prevent it from running.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period as the first determination result, and the execution control means has the specific operation presentation mode. , the game machine N7 is characterized by switching to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is continuously operated.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determining means determines that the operation of the operating means has been continuously performed for a predetermined period as the first determination result. Then, by the execution control means, the specific operation presentation mode is switched to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is continuously operated.

Thus, when the player continuously operates the operation means for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, the operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated is executed as the second operation effect mode. . Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the performance effect of the second operation performance mode does not decrease, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. .

Any one of the game machines N1 to N7 has notification means for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the execution control means, and the notification means is configured to notify that the second operation effect mode is executed. A game machine N8, characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation effect mode will be executed by the time the game is played.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the notifying means notifies that the execution control means will execute the specific operation effect mode before the second operation effect mode is executed. As a result, even when a specific operation effect mode is executed as the second operation effect mode, the player can play the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In the gaming machine N8, the determination means executes the determination while the first operation presentation mode is being executed, and the notification means performs the first operation after the determination by the determination means is executed. A gaming machine N9, characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation presentation mode will be executed until the operation presentation mode of No. 1 ends.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination by the determination means is executed, and the specific operation effect mode is executed between the execution of the determination and the end of the first operation effect mode. The informing means informs that it is executed.

Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably notify that a specific operation presentation mode will be executed before the second operation presentation mode is started.

In a game machine N8 or N9, mode display means for displaying the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means; operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode; , wherein the notification means displays the operation contents of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation presentation mode by the operation content display means.

According to the game machine N10, the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation presentation mode is displayed by the operation content display means.

As a result, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation presentation mode is displayed, so that the player can play the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In any one of game machines N1 to N10, the operation effect executing means can execute a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A gaming machine N11 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine N11, the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed is executed by the operation effect executing means. As a result, it is possible for the player to operate the operation means in a short period of time, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine N11 has effect result display means for displaying effect results of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means, and the effect result display means is configured to display the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode. A game machine N12 characterized in that the effect result is displayed based on the operation effect mode.

According to the gaming machine N12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N11, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the effect result display means. Then, the effect result is displayed based on the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode.

As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are associated with each other, and thus there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature P Group> (Change the interval between auto hits)
Operation means operable by the player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal a first setting means for setting a first performance mode in which a specific performance is executed when a determination result by the determination means satisfies a first condition; and the signal determination in the state in which the first performance mode is set. a specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect every first period when the determination result by the means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition; and when the first effect mode is being executed. and variable period setting means for variably setting an execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means to a second period different from the first period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. A gaming machine P1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period, there is a game machine that automatically executes a continuous hitting operation (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364 publication).

In such a conventional game machine, in an effect (for example, a repeated hit effect) in which an operation button must be operated multiple times, the player can enjoy the repeated hit effect simply by continuously pressing the operation button. However, in operation effects other than repeated hit effects (for example, timing press effects), automatic repeated hit operations are executed, which impairs the operation effects other than repeated hit effects, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. There was a problem of hoarding.

On the other hand, in the game machine P1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player, and the output signal is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Then, when the determination result by the signal determining means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means sets a first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and in the state in which the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the signal determination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect for each first period. Furthermore, when the first effect mode is being executed, the execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means is changed from the first period by the variable period setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. is variably set to a different second period.

As a result, it is possible to vary the intervals of the specific effects executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects using the operation means while the specific effect execution means is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine P1, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. and a predetermined variable condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and when the discrimination result is a predetermined discrimination result, the privilege giving means gives a privilege to the player. A predetermined variable condition is established based on the determination result of the determination means.

Thereby, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the determining means by the execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game by paying attention to the specific effect executed based on the player's operation.

A gaming machine P3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P1 or P2, it has an informing means for informing that the second condition is satisfied by the signal discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the notifying means notifies that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determining means. When the conditions are satisfied, even if the execution period of a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the game machine P3, the notification means guides the execution period set by the variable period setting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the notifying means guides the execution period set by the variable period setting means, so that the player can be informed of the timing at which the next specific effect will be executed. It is possible to guide. Therefore, even if the execution period of a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period for validly determining the operation of the operation means, and a remaining period for determining the remaining period of the valid period set by the valid period setting means. determining means, wherein the signal determining means determines that the second condition is established when the operation means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determining period; The apparatus is characterized by comprising determination period changing means for changing the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period when the determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period. Gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective period for validly determining the operation of the operating means is set by the effective period setting means, and the remaining period of the effective period is determined by the remaining period determining means. When the operation means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period. , the discrimination period varying means changes the first discrimination period to a second discrimination period shorter than the first discrimination period.

As a result, when the remaining period of the effective period during which the operation of the operating means is determined to be effective reaches the predetermined period, the specific performance changed during the second period can be easily executed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine P5, the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determination means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period.

According to the game machine P6, since the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the first determining period as the predetermined period, even if the remaining valid period is short, the specified period is changed to the second period. effect can be executed, and the effect can be enhanced until the end of the effective period.

<Feature Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
an operating means operable by a player, a determining means for determining whether the operating means has been operated, and a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the valid operation of the operating means is determined by the determining means. a notification means for notifying an operation notification mode for causing a player to operate the operation means; an operation presentation execution means for executing an operation presentation based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means; When at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under a predetermined condition by the valid period setting means, specifying a period spanning the first valid period and the second valid period and notification control means for causing the notification means to notify the operation notification mode of the game machine Q1.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

In such a conventional game machine, since a plurality of operation effects are executed, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation buttons is increased and the player's desire to play can be increased. If this happens, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating it, and there is a problem that the desire to play the game is lowered.

Furthermore, in conventional game machines, an effective period during which the operation of the operation button can be accepted is set. However, since it is configured so that the effect based on the operation of the operation button is not executed, when the player operates the operation button multiple times, some of the multiple operations are performed during the invalid period. , there is a problem that the performance is not executed even though the operation button is operated, and the desire to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine Q1, the determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated, and sets the valid period during which the valid operation of the operating means is determined by the determining means. The notification means notifies an operation notification mode set by the means for causing the player to operate the operation means. Further, the operation presentation is executed by the operation presentation executing means based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means.

Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the notification control means causes the first valid period and the second valid period to to cause the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

Accordingly, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set under predetermined conditions, the specific operation notification mode is notified across the first effective period and the second effective period. It becomes possible to notify as if the effective period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the operating means between the first valid period and the second valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In this case, as the predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period, it is desirable that the interval to be set is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such a condition, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

Further, as a method of determining whether or not the first effective period and the second effective period are set under predetermined conditions, a method of determining an actual period may be used, or a plurality of operation effects are predetermined. You may use the method of discriminating|determining that it is set by the combination which was set.

Furthermore, as an operation presentation in the game machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the game machine, a drive mode of a driving object provided in the game machine, and an output from a sound output device provided in the game machine and a light emission mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game machine. In this way, it is sufficient that the player who operates the operation means can recognize the effect executed based on the determination of the operation to the operation means.

In addition, the operating means in the gaming machine Q1 may be any device that can be operated by the player. A sensor device that rotates, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, and a lever device that can be operated by the player in the forward/backward/leftward/rightward direction can be considered.

A game machine Q2, characterized in that, in the game machine Q1, it has information mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means, so that the first effective period and a specific operation notification mode to be notified over the second effective period can be set based on the operation effect executed during the first effective period or the second effective period.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to notify the player of the specific operation notification mode that is notified over the first valid period and the second valid period in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extended presentation mode based on the first operation presentation executed when the first effective period is set. A game machine Q3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the first operation effect executed when the first effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the extended performance mode is set based on, it is possible to make it appear that the first valid period continues until the second valid period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation means and the act of not operating the operation means.

In the game machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means selects, as the specific operation notification mode, a pre-rendering mode based on the second operation performance executed when the second effective period is set. A game machine Q4 characterized in that it is set.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the second operation executed when the second valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means Since the pre-rendering mode based on the performance is set, it is possible to make it appear that the second valid period is set continuously with the first valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q4, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated. A gaming machine Q5 characterized by having a pseudo performance executing means for executing.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated by the pseudo effect executing means.

As a result, the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, so that the player can see that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuously set, and the operation buttons can be displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent repetition of an act of operating and an act of not operating.

It should be noted that, as the pseudo operation effect in the game machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the effect mode is variable. As a result, during the period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the invalid period is actually set, the operation means is operated by the player who is continuously operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that the performance mode is variable, and to increase the willingness to play the game.

Furthermore, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine Q3, it is possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed in the first effective period is extended, thereby providing the player with a pseudo operation effect. There is an effect that a more comprehensible presentation can be provided.

Further, according to the configuration provided with the game machine Q4, the pseudo operation presentation can be executed such that the operation presentation executed during the second effective period is continuously executed with the first effective period. is possible, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a more comprehensible presentation to the player.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means controls the specific operation notification mode based on the fact that the determination means has determined that a predetermined operation condition has been established during the first effective period. A gaming machine Q6 characterized in that the information is notified by the notification means.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode based on the fact that the determination means determines that the predetermined operation condition is established during the first effective period.

As a result, even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, the specific operation notification Modes are not reported. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a specific operation notification mode from being wastefully notified to a player who does not like the operation effect, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation for playing the game.

Even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, the above-mentioned problem, that is, Since the problem that the player's motivation to play is lowered due to the frequent repetition of the action of operating and not operating the operation means does not occur, the player's motivation to play is reduced even if the specific operation notification mode is not notified. No decrease. Rather, it is possible to reduce the number of processes for informing a specific operation informing mode, and to provide the player with an effect executed in a normal state.

As the predetermined operation condition in the gaming machine Q6, for example, it is preferable to set the operation condition that the operation means is operated multiple times during the first effective period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who is actively operating the operating means from losing his/her willingness to play. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first valid period is provided, and the operation means is operated in a state in which the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds). A state in which a means is provided for determining the period until the start of the second valid period, and the means determines that the predetermined remaining period (for example, within 10 seconds remaining) is reached. You may set as operation conditions that the operation means was operated by . Even in the case of such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in desire to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation means and the act of not operating the operation means.

In the gaming machine Q6, the determining means has an operation frequency measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operating means, and the operation frequency measuring means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first effective period. A game machine Q7 characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the operation number measuring means of the determining means. The operation condition is established when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

Thereby, a specific operation notification mode is notified when the predetermined number of operations are performed during the first effective period. Therefore, for example, in the case where the operation performance of repeatedly hitting the operation means is executed during the first effective period, the player who is actively operating the operation means is notified of a specific operation notification mode. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who is actively operating the operating means from frequently stopping the operation of the operating means, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play. It has the effect of being able to

Furthermore, according to the configuration provided with the game machine Q5, by executing the operation performance in which the performance mode is frequently changed as the operation performance to be pseudo-executed, the pseudo operation performance is executed, thereby allowing the player to There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity. Further, it is preferable that the simulated effect executing means can execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the effect mode is changed, and the operation effect is set based on the number of times the operation means is operated by the operation number measuring means. .

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Machine Q8.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first effective period. , it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the second valid period is set until the first valid period ends. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the player grasping the operation performance to be executed later.

In any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q8, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under the predetermined condition, the first valid period and The gaming machine Q9 is characterized by comprising valid period changing means for changing the valid period so that it is continuous with the second valid period.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effects of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the valid period is set so that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuous. The validity period is changed by the changing means.

As a result, when a plurality of validity periods are set, it is possible to make the plurality of validity periods continuous. In other words, since the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period can be eliminated, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the performance does not change despite the operation of the operating means. It has the effect of being able to

Here, making the validity period of the game machine Q9 continuous means that a period is set between the first validity period and the second validity period in which the effect does not change even if the player operates the operation means. The valid period may be changed so that the first valid period and the second valid period are actually connected, or the first valid period and the second valid period A period shorter than the period required to determine that the operating means has been operated may be provided between the two.

In the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets a period between the first valid period and the second valid period to the valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets the valid period between the first valid period and the second valid period. As a result, a plurality of valid periods can be continued without changing the first valid period and the second valid period, so there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In gaming machine Q9 or Q10, gaming machine Q11 is characterized in that the effective period changing means delays the start of the first effective period.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the valid period changing means delays the start of the first valid period. As a result, since the first effective period and the second effective period can be made continuous, there is no need to set a new effective period, and there is an effect that the control load of the effective period changing means can be reduced.

In any one of gaming machines Q9 to Q11, gaming machine Q12 is characterized in that said effective period changing means advances the start of said second effective period.

According to the game machine Q12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q9 to Q11, the start of the second valid period is advanced by the valid period changing means. As a result, since the first effective period and the second effective period can be made continuous, there is no need to set a new effective period, and there is an effect that the control load of the effective period changing means can be reduced.

In any one of gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has valid period display means for displaying the operation notification mode on the display means, and when the valid period is changed by the valid period changing means, A game machine Q13, further comprising valid period display change means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the valid period display means.

According to the gaming machine Q13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective period display means displays the operation notification mode on the display means, and the effective period display change means changes the operation notification mode based on the change of the effective period by the effective period change means.

As a result, it is possible to display to the player that the valid period has been changed by the valid period changing means, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine Q13, the valid period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the expiration of the first valid period.

According to the gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q13, the valid period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the lapse of the first valid period. As a result, the player grasps the details of the operation performance to be executed later (the operation performance in which the second effective period is set) before the first valid period has passed, and the performance effect is lowered. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation that occurs.

In any one of game machines Q1 to Q14, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and privilege granting for giving a privilege to a player when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determining means, wherein the period effect executing means executes a compound effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set. The game machine Q15 is characterized in that the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine Q15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Then, based on the determination result of the determination means, the period effect execution means executes a compound effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set as a period effect of a predetermined period.

As a result, it is possible to execute a composite effect based on the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any one of game machines Q1 to Q14, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and privilege granting for giving a privilege to a player when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of determination by the determining means, wherein the notification control means is executed first among the continuous period effects. When the first effective period set in the first period effect and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later are set under predetermined conditions. A game machine Q16, characterized in that the notifying means notifies the specific operation notifying mode.

According to the gaming machine Q16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Also, based on the determination result of the determining means, the period effect executing means executes the period effect for a predetermined period. Then, of the continuous period effects, the first effective period set in the first period effect executed earlier and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later. is set under a predetermined condition, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

Thereby, even when the first effective period and the second effective period are set across a plurality of period performances, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operation means and the act of not operating the operation means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to this.

In the game machine Q16, a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination information based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a preliminary determination means for determining in advance the determination information stored in the determination condition storage means. and wherein the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

According to the gaming machine Q17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q16, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of discrimination information based on the fact that the discrimination condition is satisfied is stored by the discrimination condition storage means, and the plurality of stored discrimination information are judged by the prior judgment means. Then, based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means for the second period effect, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

Thereby, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set across the first period effect and the second period effect, the advance determination corresponding to the second period effect to be executed later A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A game machine Z1 in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6 and Q1 to Q17, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6 and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A game machine Z3 in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6 and Q1 to Q17, wherein said game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).
However, in the pachinko machine described above, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims at improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises operation means that can be operated by a player, determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and operation of the operation means by the determination means. Valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation is determined to be effective; notification means for informing an operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operation means; and operation of the operation means by the determination means. When at least the first effective period and the second effective period are set under predetermined conditions by the operation effect execution means for executing the operation effect based on the fact, and the effective period setting means, the first and notification control means for causing the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode over the first valid period and the second valid period.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, further comprising notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. have.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the notification mode setting means is executed when the first effective period is set as the specific operation notification mode. This is to set an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the notification mode setting means executes when the second validity period is set as the specific operation notification mode. It sets a preliminary effect mode based on the second operation effect to be performed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, It has a pseudo-effect executing means for quasi-executing the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated, and the effective period during which the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means is valid is valid. An operation notification mode set by the period setting means and for causing the player to operate the operation means is notified by the notification means. Further, the operation presentation is executed by the operation presentation executing means based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means. Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the notification control means causes the first valid period and the second valid period to to cause the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.
As a result, it is possible to notify a plurality of validity periods as if they are continuous, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1. That is, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to notify the player of the specific operation notification mode that is notified over the first valid period and the second valid period in an easy-to-understand manner.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2. That is, the notification mode setting means sets, as a specific operation notification mode, an extended presentation mode based on the first operation presentation executed when the first effective period is set.
This has the effect of making it appear that the first valid period continues until the second valid period starts.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3. That is, the notification mode setting means sets, as a specific operation notification mode, a pre-rendering mode based on the second operation rendering that is executed when the second effective period is set.
This has the effect of making it appear as if the second valid period is set continuously with the first valid period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4. That is, during the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated by the pseudo effect executing means.
As a result, the operation performance is displayed in a simulated manner, so that the player can see that the first effective period and the second effective period are continuously set, and the player is motivated to play the game. There is an effect that the decrease can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
113 Audio ramp control device (effect mode determining means, determining means)
114 Display control device (effect mode display means, stage display means)

Claims (1)

an effect mode determining means capable of determining any one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode;
A game machine having an effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means on a display means,
a determining means capable of determining any one stage information among the stage information indicating each of the plurality of stages;
stage display means for causing the display means to display a display mode for showing the stage information determined by the determination means;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the display mode displayed by the stage display means satisfies a predetermined condition;
The determining means can determine stage information different from the one stage information in a state in which the one stage information is determined ,
The effect mode determination means is capable of determining the second effect mode when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied in a situation where the first effect mode is displayed on the display means ,
The stage display means causes the display means to display the first display mode as the display mode corresponding to the first presentation mode when the first presentation mode is displayed on the display means, and the display means displays the first presentation mode as the display mode corresponding to the first presentation mode. When the effect mode is displayed on the display means, the display means sets a second display mode different from the first display mode corresponding to the first effect mode as the display mode corresponding to the second effect mode. can be displayed in
the predetermined determination condition can be established regardless of the display mode displayed by at least the stage display means;
The game machine is
a determination means capable of performing determination;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination means;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed,
It is possible to display a plurality of the display modes in the same mode in a situation where at least the first effect mode is displayed on the display means,
When one of the display modes among the plurality of display modes displayed on the display means satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect. is,
The display mode displayed at a predetermined position among the plurality of display modes determines the different stage information by the determination means rather than the display mode displayed at a specific position different from the predetermined position. designed to facilitate
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect in an effect mode based on the determination result of the determination means,
The game machine is
While the identification information is dynamically displayed, the display mode for showing the stage information can be changed multiple times,
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting that the display mode for indicating the 1st step information changes to the display mode for indicating the tier information different from the 1st step information. A game machine characterized by

Images